Mercedes-Benz 2007 slr-class Operator`s manual

Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren
Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren.
Operator’s Manual.
M e r c e d e s - B e n z S L R M cL a r e n . O p e r a t o r ’ s M a n u a l.
S LR . U N L I M I T E D .
Thank you for choosing Mercedes-Benz.
Our company and staff congratulate you on the purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren.
Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desire to own
an automobile that will be as easy as possible to operate and provide years of service.
Should you have any questions, please contact your dealer contact for your Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren or call us at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). Your dealer contact will co-ordinate appointments for servicing of
your vehicle and clarify any issues arising from the use of your Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To help assure your driving pleasure, and also
the safety of you and your passengers, we ask you to make a small investment of time:
앫
Please read this manual carefully, then return it to your vehicle where it will be handy for your reference.
앫
Please follow the recommendations contained in this manual. They are designed to acquaint you with the operation of your
Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren.
앫
Please pay attention to the warnings and cautions contained in this manual. They are designed to help improve the safety of the
vehicle operator and occupants.
We extend our best wishes for many miles of safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
C o n te nt s
Contents
Introduction .......................................
Product information.............................
Operator’s Manual ...............................
Service and warranty information ..
Important notice for California
retail buyers and lessees of
Mercedes-Benz automobiles ..........
Maintenance ..................................
Roadside Assistance ......................
Change of address or ownership....
Operating your vehicle outside the
USA or Canada...............................
Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren
compliance ....................................
Where to find it....................................
Symbols...............................................
Operating safety ..................................
Proper use of the vehicle ...............
Problems with your vehicle..................
Reporting safety defects......................
Reporting safety defects ................
Vehicle data recording.........................
Information regarding electronic
recording devices...........................
12
13
14
14
15
16
16
16
17
17
18
19
20
20
21
22
22
23
23
At a glance .......................................... 24
Cockpit................................................. 26
Instrument cluster ................................ 28
Multifunction steering wheel ................ 30
Center console ..................................... 31
Upper part ...................................... 31
Lower part ...................................... 32
Overhead control panel ........................ 33
Control panel on the door sill ............... 34
Getting started ...................................
Unlocking .............................................
Starter switch positions..................
Adjusting ..............................................
Seats ..............................................
Steering wheel................................
Mirrors............................................
Driving..................................................
Fastening the seat belts .................
Starting the engine .........................
Parking brake .................................
Driving off .......................................
Switching on headlamps.................
Turn signals ....................................
Windshield wipers...........................
Problems while driving....................
Parking and locking..............................
Parking brake .................................
Switching off headlamps.................
Turning off the engine.....................
Releasing seat belts........................
Locking ...........................................
36
38
40
41
41
42
43
45
45
47
49
50
51
51
52
54
55
55
56
56
56
57
Contents
Safety and Security ...........................
Occupant safety...................................
Air bags ..........................................
Occupant Classification System.....
Seat belts .......................................
Children in the vehicle....................
Panic alarm ..........................................
Activating .......................................
Deactivating ...................................
Driving safety systems.........................
ABS ................................................
BAS ................................................
ESP® ...............................................
Electro-hydraulic brake system ......
Performance enhancement system .....
Airbrake..........................................
Anti-theft systems................................
Immobilizer.....................................
Anti-theft alarm system ..................
Tow-away alarm .............................
58
60
62
67
71
75
80
80
80
81
81
83
83
86
89
89
92
92
92
94
Controls in detail ............................... 96
Locking and unlocking ......................... 98
SmartKey ....................................... 98
Opening the doors ....................... 101
Opening the trunk ........................ 102
Closing the trunk lid ..................... 103
Trunk emergency release ............. 104
Automatic locking ........................ 104
Locking and unlocking from
the inside ..................................... 105
Lighting.............................................. 106
Exterior lamp switch..................... 106
Combination switch ..................... 110
Hazard warning flasher ................ 111
Interior lighting............................. 112
Courtesy lighting .......................... 113
Trunk lamp ................................... 113
Instrument cluster ............................. 114
Adjusting instrument cluster
illumination .................................. 114
Coolant temperature gauge ......... 115
Resetting trip odometer ............... 115
Tachometer.................................. 116
Outside temperature indicator ..... 116
Control system ..................................
Multifunction display....................
Multifunction steering wheel........
Menus ..........................................
Standard display menu ................
722 Edition menu.........................
AUDIO menu ................................
Vehicle status message memory
menu............................................
Settings menu..............................
Trip computer menu.....................
TEL menu .....................................
Audio system.....................................
Audio and telephone, operation ...
Operating safety ..........................
Location of the audio system.......
Operating and display elements...
Button and soft key operation......
Operation.....................................
Radio operation ...........................
Cassette operation ......................
CD changer operation..................
Telephone operation ....................
Automatic transmission.....................
Gear selector lever.......................
Shifting procedure .......................
117
117
118
120
122
123
126
128
129
139
141
145
145
145
145
146
148
148
151
154
158
162
169
169
170
Contents
Gear selector lever positions ....... 171
Driving tips................................... 173
Gear ranges ................................. 174
Shift program mode selector
switch .......................................... 175
Gear selector lever one-touch
gearshifting .................................. 175
Steering wheel gearshift control
one-touch gearshifting ................. 177
Manual shift program................... 179
Emergency operation
(Limp-Home Mode) ...................... 181
Good visibility .................................... 182
Headlamp cleaning system .......... 182
Rear view mirrors......................... 182
Sun visors .................................... 183
Rear window defroster ................. 185
Automatic climate control ................. 186
Deactivating the automatic
climate control system................. 190
Operating the automatic climate
control system in automatic mode 190
Setting the temperature............... 191
Adjusting air distribution.............. 192
Adjusting air volume .................... 193
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL ....... 193
Front defroster.............................. 194
Air recirculation mode .................. 195
Air conditioning............................. 196
Residual heat and ventilation........ 197
Power windows .................................. 199
Opening and closing the windows. 199
Synchronizing power windows ...... 201
Summer opening feature .............. 201
Convenience closing feature......... 202
Driving systems .................................. 203
Cruise control ............................... 203
Useful features ................................... 206
Map pocket in passenger
footwell......................................... 206
Storage compartments ................. 206
Parcel net in trunk ........................ 207
Ashtray and cigarette lighter......... 208
Power outlet ................................. 209
Telephone ..................................... 209
Tele Aid......................................... 214
Garage door opener...................... 221
Floormats*.................................... 226
Floormats* (Only Mercedes-Benz
SLR McLaren 722 Edition) ............ 227
Dust cover .................................... 228
Roof and trunk lid racks................ 230
Operation.......................................... 232
The first 1000 miles (1500 km).......... 234
Driving instructions ............................ 235
Drive sensibly – save fuel ............. 235
Drinking and driving...................... 235
Pedals........................................... 235
Power assistance.......................... 236
Brakes .......................................... 236
Driving off ..................................... 239
Parking ......................................... 239
Tires.............................................. 240
Hydroplaning ................................ 241
Tire traction .................................. 241
Tire speed rating........................... 241
Winter driving instructions............ 242
Standing water ............................. 243
Passenger compartment............... 243
Driving abroad .............................. 243
Control and operation of radio
transmitters .................................. 243
Catalytic converter ....................... 244
Emission control ........................... 245
Coolant temperature .................... 245
Contents
At the gas station...............................
Refueling ......................................
Check regularly and before
a long trip ....................................
Engine compartment..........................
Hood ............................................
Engine oil......................................
Transmission fluid level ................
Coolant.........................................
Trunk .................................................
Batteries.......................................
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system ...........
Tires and wheels ................................
Important guidelines ....................
Tire care and maintenance ...........
Direction of rotation .....................
Loading the vehicle ......................
Recommended tire inflation
pressure .......................................
Checking tire inflation pressure ...
Tire labeling..................................
Load identification........................
DOT, Tire Identification Number
(TIN) .............................................
Maximum tire load .......................
247
247
248
250
250
253
254
255
256
256
257
258
258
259
261
261
267
268
274
278
279
280
Maximum tire inflation pressure ..
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards (U.S. vehicles) .............
Tire ply material ...........................
Tire and loading terminology........
Rotating tires ...............................
Anti-theft wheel nuts....................
Winter driving ....................................
Winter tires* ................................
Snow chains.................................
Maintenance......................................
Clearing the maintenance
service indicator message............
Maintenance service term
exceeded .....................................
Calling up the maintenance
service due date...........................
Resetting the maintenance
service indicator...........................
Vehicle care.......................................
Cleaning and care of the vehicle ..
Vehicle washing ...........................
281
281
283
284
287
288
290
290
291
292
292
293
293
294
295
295
296
Practical hints .................................
What to do if .....................................
Lamps in instrument cluster ........
Lamp in center console................
Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display....................
Symbol messages ........................
Where will I find ...? ...........................
First aid kit...................................
TIREFIT kit, electric air pump,
towing eye bolt and vehicle
literature portfolio........................
Compact guide (Canada only) ......
Unlocking in an emergency ...............
Unlocking the vehicle...................
Replacing SmartKey batteries ...........
Replacing bulbs .................................
Front lamps..................................
Rear lamps...................................
Replacing wiper blades......................
Removing wiper blades ................
Installing wiper blades .................
298
300
300
312
314
327
353
353
353
354
355
355
357
359
360
360
361
361
361
Contents
Flat tire ..............................................
Preparing the vehicle ...................
Sealing tires with TIREFIT.............
Batteries ............................................
Charging the batteries .................
Towing the vehicle .............................
Installing/reinstalling towing
eye bolt ........................................
Points to bear in mind..................
Transporting the vehicle...............
Fuses .................................................
Technical data .................................
Spare parts service............................
Warranty coverage.............................
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet .....................
Identification labels ...........................
Engine number.............................
Layout of poly-V-belt drive.................
Engine................................................
362
362
362
367
368
370
372
372
372
373
374
376
377
377
378
378
379
380
Rims and tires .................................... 381
Mixed size tires............................. 382
Winter tires* ................................. 384
Electrical system ................................ 386
Main dimensions ................................ 387
Weights .............................................. 388
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. .......... 389
Capacities ..................................... 389
Engine oils .................................... 391
Engine oil additives ....................... 391
Air conditioning refrigerant ........... 391
Brake fluid..................................... 392
Premium unleaded gasoline.......... 392
Fuel requirements......................... 393
Gasoline additives......................... 393
Coolants ....................................... 394
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system............ 397
Technical terms ............................... 398
Index ................................................. 404
I n t r o d u c t io n
Introduction
Product information
왔 Product information
Please observe the following in your own
best interest:
We recommend using Genuine
Mercedes-Benz Parts as well as conversion
parts and accessories explicitly approved
by us for your vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine
their reliability, safety and special suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
We are unable to make an assessment for
other products and therefore cannot be
held responsible for them, even if in individual cases an official approval or authorization by governmental or other agencies
should exist. Use of such parts and accessories could adversely affect the safety,
performance or reliability of your vehicle.
Please do not use them.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts as well as
conversion parts and accessories approved by us are available at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center where you will receive comprehensive information, also on
permissible technical modifications, and
where proper installation will be performed.
13
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great
deal of useful information. We urge you to
read it carefully and familiarize yourself
with the vehicle before driving.
For your own safety and longer service life
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the
instructions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in
damage to the vehicle or personal injury to
you or others. Vehicle damage caused by
failure to follow instructions is not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual.
Therefore, you may find explanations for
optional equipment not installed in your
vehicle. If you have any questions about
the operation of any equipment, your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to demonstrate the proper
procedures.
We continuously strive to improve our
product, and ask for your understanding
that we reserve the right to make changes
in design and equipment. Therefore,
information, illustrations, and descriptions
in this Operator’s Manual might differ from
your vehicle.
Service and warranty information
앫
New Car Limited Warranty,
Optional equipment is also described in
this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they are
special-order items, the descriptions and
illustrations herein may vary slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehicle.
앫
Emission System Warranty,
앫
Emission Performance Warranty,
앫
California, Maine, Massachusetts and
Vermont1 Emission Control System
Warranty (California, Maine, Massachusetts and Vermont1 only),
앫
State Warranty Enforcement Laws
(Lemon Laws).
If there are any equipment details that are
not shown or described in this Operator’s
Manual, an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to inform you of correct
care and operating procedures.
The Service and Warranty Information
Booklet contains detailed information
about the warranties covering your
Mercedes-Benz, including:
The Operator’s Manual and Maintenance
Booklet are important documents and
should be kept with the vehicle.
1
14
At time of printing, the decision regarding compliance with Vermont certification regulations was
still pending. The vehicle may not be permitted to
be registered in Vermont. Check with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details.
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Important notice for California
retail buyers and lessees of
Mercedes-Benz automobiles
Under California law you may be entitled to
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund
of the purchase price or lease price, if
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by
its express warranty after a reasonable
number of repair attempts. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18000 miles (approx. 29000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs
first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following
occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to
repair two or more times, and you have
directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,
LLC in writing of the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have directly notified us in writing of the need for
its repair, or
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a
cumulative total of more than
30 calendar days.
Written notification should not be sent to a
dealer, it should be addressed to,
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Customer Assistance Center
Attn: SLR Liaison
Three Paragon Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
15
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Maintenance
Roadside Assistance
Change of address or ownership
The Maintenance Booklet describes all the
necessary maintenance work which should
be performed at regular intervals.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program provides factory trained technical
help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number:
If you change your address, be sure to
send in the “Change of Address Notice”
found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It
is in your own interest that we can contact
you should the need arise.
Always have the Maintenance Booklet with
you when you take the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for service. The service advisor will record each
service in the booklet for you.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Representatives
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
For additional information refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program brochure in your vehicle literature
portfolio.
16
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
literature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
Car” found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes,
or Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Operating your vehicle outside the USA
or Canada
Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren
compliance
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that:
The Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren vehicle
does not comply with the state certification regulations of select states. It is not
permitted to register the vehicle in such
states. Check with an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for details.
앫
service facilities or replacement parts
may not be readily available,
앫
unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available;
the use of leaded fuels will damage the
catalysts,
앫
gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can
cause engine damage.
17
Introduction
Where to find it
This Operator’s Manual is designed to provide comprehensive support information
for you, the vehicle operator. Each section
has its own reference color.
At a glance
Here you will find an overview of all the
controls that can be operated from the
driver’s seat.
Controls in detail
Technical data
Here you will find detailed information
about the equipment installed on your vehicle. This section expands on the “Getting
started” section and also describes technical innovations. If you are already familiar
with the basic functions of your vehicle,
this section will be of particular interest to
you.
All important technical data for your
vehicle can be found in this section.
Getting started
Operation
Here you will find all the information you
need for your first drive. You should read
this section first if this is your first
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are
renting or borrowing this vehicle.
Here you will find all the information you
need for the proper operation of your
vehicle.
Practical hints
Safety and Security
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
and security features in your vehicle.
18
This section provides fast assistance for
dealing with problems you may encounter.
Indexes
The glossary provides explanations of the
most important technical terms.
The table of contents and the index are designed to help you find information quickly
and easily.
The following publications are part of your
vehicle documentation:
앫
this Operator’s Manual
앫
the Maintenance Booklet
Separate operating instructions will be
provided as required depending on the
equipment options installed in your
vehicle.
Introduction
Symbols
왔 Symbols
Trademarks:
앫
앫
ESP® is a registered trademark of
DaimlerChrysler.
The following symbols are found in this
Operator’s Manual:
*
Optional equipment is identified
with an asterisk.
®
HomeLink is a registered trademark
of Prince, a Johnson Controls
Company.
Warning!
G
Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.
! Highlights hazards that may result in damage to your vehicle.
i Helpful hints or further information you may
find useful.
왘
This symbol points to instructions for
you to follow.
왘
A number of these symbols appearing
in succession indicates a multiple-step
procedure.
컄 page
This symbol tells you where to
look for further information on a
topic.
컄컄
This continuation symbol marks
a warning which is continued on
the next page.
컄컄
This continuation symbol marks
a procedure which is continued
on the next page.
->
This symbol is used to indicate
cross-references to term
definitions.
Display
Words appearing in the multifunction display and audio display are printed in the type
shown here.
19
Introduction
Operating safety
Warning!
G
Work improperly carried out on electronic
components and associated software could
cause them to cease functioning. Because
the vehicle’s electronic components are interconnected, any modifications made may
produce an undesired effect on other systems. Electronic malfunctions could seriously impair the operating safety of your
vehicle.
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for repairs or modifications to electronic
components.
Other improper work or modifications on the
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
the operating safety of the vehicle.
Some safety systems only function while the
engine is running. You should therefore never turn off the engine while driving.
20
Warning!
G
Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody
or tires/wheels, for example when running
over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
may cause serious damage and impair the
operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a
sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that damage to your
vehicle has occurred, you should turn on
your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow
down, and drive with caution to an area
which is a safe distance from the road.
Inspect the vehicle underbody and
tires/wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or other qualified maintenance or repair facility for further inspection or repairs.
Proper use of the vehicle
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
are familiar with the following information
and rules:
앫
the safety precautions in this manual
앫
the “Technical data” section in this
manual
앫
traffic rules and regulations
앫
motor vehicle laws and safety
standards
Warning!
G
Various warning labels are attached to your
vehicle. These warning labels are intended
to make you and others aware of various
risks. You should not remove any of these
warning labels unless explicitly instructed to
do so by information on the label itself. Removal of any of these labels may cause you
and others to be unaware of certain risks
which may result in an accident and/or
personal injury.
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
왔 Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is
not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us
at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Customer Assistance Center
Attn: SLR Liaison
Three Paragon Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
21
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
22
Introduction
Vehicle data recording
왔 Vehicle data recording
Information regarding electronic
recording devices
(Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951)
Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system,
may transmit some data in certain accidents.
This information helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety.
DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others
앫
for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes
앫
with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee
앫
in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency
앫
for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler, its affiliates or sales/service organization and/or
앫
as otherwise required or permitted by law.
Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted
via that system.
23
At a glance
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Center console
Overhead control panel
Control panel on the door sill
At a glance
Cockpit
26
At a glance
Cockpit
Item
Page
Item
Page
1 Cruise control lever
203
9 Headlamp washer button
2 Steering wheel gearshift
button
177
a Steering wheel adjustment
stalk
177
b Hood lock release
250
c Exterior lamp switch
51,
106
Steering wheel gearshift
paddles (only Mercedes-Benz
SLR McLaren 722 Edition)
3 Instrument cluster
28,
114
4 Multifunction steering wheel
30,
118
5 Overhead control panel
6 Center console
7 Starter switch
33
182
42
d Combination switch
앫
Turn signals
51
앫
Windshield wipers
52
앫
High beam
110
31, 32
40
8 Horn
27
At a glance
Instrument cluster
28
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item
1 Coolant temperature gauge
with
D Coolant temperature
warning lamp
Page
115
306
2 Speedometer with
; Brake warning lamp,
USA only
303
3 Brake warning lamp,
Canada only
Item
Page
3 Left multifunction display
with
앫
Outside temperature
116
1 Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS)
indicator lamp
앫
Main odometer
117
< Seat belt telltale
4 Reset button
114
5 Tachometer with
116
303
A High beam headlamp
indicator
110
v ABS/ESP® warning
lamp
300
? Engine malfunction indicator lamp, USA only
304
> Gearshift indicator
lamp
307
± Engine malfunction indicator lamp, Canada
only
304
< Airbrake warning lamp
307
- Antilock Brake System
(ABS) indicator lamp
302
X Low tire pressure
telltale
311
L Left turn signal
indicator lamp
K Right turn signal
indicator lamp
Item
Page
310
308
6 Right multifunction display
with
앫
Current gear selector lever
position/gear range
117,
171,
174
앫
Trip odometer
117
앫
Automatic transmission
shift program mode
117,
175
앫
Clock
133
= Engine oil temperature
indicator
307
7 Fuel gauge with
A Fuel reserve warning
lamp
307
29
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Item
Page
1 Left multifunction display in
the speedometer
117
2 Right multifunction display in
the tachometer
117
118
ì to end a call
to reject an incoming
call
30
6 Moving within a menu:
Press button
k for previous display
ç down/to decrease
í to take a call
to dial
to redial
118
è for next menu
j for next display
æ up/to increase
4 Telephone:
Press button
5 Menu systems:
Press button
Page
ÿ for previous menu
Operating control system
3 Selecting the submenu or setting the volume:
Press button
Item
118
118
At a glance
Center console
왔 Center console
Upper part
Item
Page
Item
Page
1 Central locking switch
105
7 Selects the Airbrake mode
2 Hazard warning flasher
on/off switch
111
8 Selects the manual shift
program mode
179
3 Central unlocking switch
105
9 Audio system
4 Air temperature controls for
center and side air vents
192
120,
145
a Automatic climate control
186
5 Air volume controls for center
and side air vents
193
6 Selects the shift program
mode
175
b Engine start button
89
48
31
At a glance
Center console
Lower part
Item
1 Exterior rear view mirror
adjustment
2 Remote trunk opening switch
32
Page
44
102
3 Tow-away alarm off button
94
4 ESP® switch
85
5 Passenger front air bag off
indicator lamp
70
6 Gear selector lever for
automatic transmission
171
7 Parking brake
49,
55
At a glance
Overhead control panel
왔 Overhead control panel
Item
Page
1 Left reading lamp on/off
112
2 Temperature sensor for
automatic climate control
186
3 Right reading lamp on/off
112
4 Interior lighting control
112
5 Hands-free microphone for
Tele Aid (emergency call
system) and telephone
(see separate operating
instructions)
209
6 Interior rear view mirror
44,
182
7 Garage door opener
221
8 Tele Aid (emergency call
system) button
214
33
At a glance
Control panel on the door sill
Item
1 Door handle
101
2 Switches for opening/closing
windows
199
3 Switch for seat adjustment
34
Page
41
35
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking
Getting started
Unlocking
The “Getting started” section provides an
overview of the vehicle’s most basic functions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners
should pay special attention to the information given here.
If you are already familiar with the basic
functions described here, the “Controls in
detail” section will provide you with further
information. The corresponding page
references are located at the end of each
segment.
SmartKey with remote control
5 Door handle
1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Unlock button for trunk
3 ΠUnlock button
4 Â Panic button (컄 page 80)
왘
Press unlock button Πon the
SmartKey.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
i The electro-hydraulic brake system is
activated.
38
Getting started
Unlocking
Warning!
G
Always stand to the rear of the door before
opening it, otherwise the opening action
may cause injury. Outside temperature may
affect door opening speed.
! Ensure sufficient side- and overhead
clearance prior to opening the doors, see “Main
dimensions” (컄 page 387).
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
unsupervised access to a vehicle could
result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
왘
Press the front part of the door
handle 5.
The door swings outwards and
upwards automatically.
Warning!
G
Only Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren
722 Edition:
Because of the carbon fiber the footwell
could be slippery when wet. Be careful when
entering the vehicle with wet shoe soles,
you could slip on it.
왘
Enter the vehicle and insert the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
For more information, see “Locking and
unlocking” (컄 page 98).
39
Getting started
Unlocking
Starter switch positions
Warning!
i When you switch on the ignition, the
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
unsupervised access to a vehicle could
result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
40
indicator and warning lamps (except high beam
headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instrument
cluster come on. The indicator and warning
lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator
lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if activated)
should go out when the engine is running. This
indicates that the respective systems are
operational.
Starter switch
0 For removing SmartKey
1 Power supply for some consumers
2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position. All lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator
lamp and turn signal indicator lamps
unless activated) in the instrument
cluster come on. If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to come on when the
ignition is switched on, have it checked
and replaced if necessary. If a lamp in
the instrument cluster remains on after
starting the engine or comes on while
driving, see “Lamps in instrument cluster” (컄 page 300).
! If the SmartKey is left in the starter switch
position 0 for an extended period of time, it can
no longer be turned in the starter switch.
앫
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch and reinsert.
If the SmartKey can still not be turned in the
starter switch, the starter battery may not be
sufficiently charged.
앫
Have the starter battery checked and
charged if necessary (컄 page 368). Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
To prevent accelerated battery discharge and a
possible dead battery, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch when the engine is
not in operation.
Getting started
Adjusting
왔 Adjusting
Warning!
G
All seat, steering wheel, and rear view mirror
adjustments, as well as fastening of seat
belts, must be done before the vehicle is put
into motion.
Warning!
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can
correctly fasten your seat belt (컄 page 45).
Observe the following points:
앫
Adjust the seat to a comfortable seating
position that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The position should be as far to the rear as possible, consistent with ability to properly
operate controls.
앫
Adjust the seat until a comfortable
steering wheel position is reached with
your arms slightly bent at the elbow.
앫
Never place hands under the seat or
near any moving parts while a seat is
being adjusted.
Seats
Warning!
G
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
back in an excessively reclined position as
this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries. The seat back and seat belts
provide the best restraint when the wearer
is in a nearly upright position and belts are
properly positioned on the body.
G
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle.
Even with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch or the vehicle, the seats can
be operated. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
unsupervised access to a vehicle could
result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Failure to do so could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
41
Getting started
Adjusting
The seat adjustment switch is located on
the door sill.
Seat fore and aft adjustment
왘
Slide the switch forwards or backwards
in the direction of arrow 1.
! When moving the seat, make sure that there
are no items in the footwell or behind the seat.
Otherwise you could damage the seat.
Seat height
왘
1 Seat fore and aft adjustment
2 Seat height
3 Seat angle
42
Slide the switch up or down in the
direction of arrow 2.
Seat angle
왘
Slide the switch up or down in the
direction of arrow 3.
Steering wheel
Warning!
G
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while
driving could cause the driver to lose control
of the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle.
Even with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch or the vehicle, the steering
wheel can be adjusted. Therefore, do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
unsupervised access to a vehicle could
result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Getting started
Adjusting
The stalk for steering wheel adjustment is
located on the lower left of the steering
column.
Adjusting steering column in or out
왘
Move stalk forward or back in the
direction of arrow 1 until a comfortable steering wheel position is reached
with your arms slightly bent at the
elbow.
Adjusting steering column up or down
왘
1 Adjusting steering column, in or out
2 Adjusting steering column, up or down
Press the lever up or down in the direction of arrow 2. Make sure that you
can move your legs freely and that you
can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly.
Mirrors
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a
good view of the road and traffic
conditions.
Warning!
G
In case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may
escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass
breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles
(incident light) could blind you. As a result,
you may not be able to observe traffic conditions and could cause an accident.
43
Getting started
Adjusting
! Electrolyte drops coming into contact with
the vehicle paint finish can be completely removed only while in the liquid state and by
applying plenty of water.
The buttons are located on the lower part
of the center console.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
Press button 1 for the driver’s side
exterior rear view mirror or button 2
for passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror.
왘
Push adjustment button 3 up, down,
left, or right according to the desired
setting.
Interior rear view mirror
왘
Manually adjust the rear-view mirror.
For more information, see “Rear view mirrors” (컄 page 182).
i At low ambient temperatures, the exterior
rear view mirrors will be heated automatically.
Exterior rear view mirrors
Warning!
G
Exercise care when using the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
44
1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
button
2 Passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror button
3 Adjustment button
For more information, see “Rear view mirrors” (컄 page 182).
Getting started
Driving
왔 Driving
Warning!
G
Make sure that absolutely no objects are obstructing the pedal’s range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obstacles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
the footwell, make sure the pedals still have
sufficient clearance.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers, the objects could get caught between
the pedals. You could then no longer brake
or accelerate. This could lead to accidents
or injury.
Fastening the seat belts
Warning!
G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure your passenger is
properly restrained.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and
position your seat belt greatly increases
your risk of injuries and their likely severity
in an accident. You and your passenger
should always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are wearing your
seat belt. The air bags can only provide the
protection they were designed to afford if
the occupants are using their seat belts
(컄 page 71).
Warning!
G
Children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant, or toddler restraint, or booster
seat recommended for the size and weight
of the child. For additional information, see
“Children in the vehicle” (컄 page 75).
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle
and/or the child is not properly secured in
the child restraint.
45
Getting started
Driving
Warning!
G
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly
restrained with a separate seat belt. Never
use a seat belt for more than one person at
a time.
Warning!
G
Read and observe the additional warning notices printed in the “Safety and Security”
(컄 page 64) and (컄 page 71).
왘
With a smooth motion pull the belt
from seat belt holder 1.
왘
Place the shoulder portion of the belt
across the top of your shoulder and the
lap portion across your hips.
왘
Push latch plate 2 into buckle 3 until
it clicks.
왘
If necessary, tighten the lap portion to
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion
up.
G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and the
belt is properly positioned on the body.
46
Warning!
Proper use of seat belts
1 Seat belt holder
2 Latch plate
3 Buckle
4 Release button
앫
Do not twist the seat belt when
fastening.
앫
Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder
portion is located as close as possible
to the middle of the shoulder (it should
not touch the neck). Never pass the
shoulder portion of the seat belt under
your arm.
앫
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips (over hip joint) and not
across the abdomen.
Getting started
Driving
앫
Starting the engine
Place the seat backrest in a nearly upright position.
Warning!
앫
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time.
Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They
could tear.
Warning!
앫
Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another object at the same
time. When using a seat belt to secure
infant or toddler restraints or children
in booster seats, always follow the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in
the door or in the seat adjustment mechanism. This could damage the seat belt.
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
unconsciousness and possible death.
앫
Check your seat belt during travel to
make sure that it is properly
positioned.
앫
Make sure that the seat belt is always
fitted snugly. Take special care of this
when wearing loose clothing.
G
Never attempt to make modifications to
seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the seat belts.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash, they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Damaged seat belts or seat belts that were
highly stressed in an accident must be
replaced. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
G
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one
window fully open.
47
Getting started
Driving
Warning!
G
Make sure the cover of the start button is
closed after starting the engine. Otherwise
you could be injured on the open cover in an
accident or during driving maneuvers.
For information on turning off the engine,
see “Turning off the engine” (컄 page 56).
Gearshift pattern
P Park position with gear selector lever
lock
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position
For more information, see “Automatic
transmission” (컄 page 169).
1 Cover
2 Start button
왘
Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to park position P.
왘
Do not depress the accelerator.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
Lift up cover 1.
왘
Press start button 2 once.
The engine starts.
왘
48
Close cover 1.
Getting started
Driving
Starting difficulties
왘
Parking brake
If the engine does not start as described,
carry out the following steps:
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 and repeat starting
procedure (컄 page 48).
왘
Remember that extended starting
attempts can drain the battery.
If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts, there could be a
malfunction in the engine electronics or in
the fuel supply system.
왘
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Pull lever 2 upwards slightly, press
release button 1 and move the lever
down to the stop.
The warning lamp ; (USA only)
or 3 (Canada only) in the
instrument cluster goes out.
1 Release button
2 Parking brake lever
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children
could release the parking brake, which
could result in an accident and/or personal
serious injury.
49
Getting started
Driving
Driving off
Warning!
왘
Depress the brake pedal.
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.
The gear selector lever lock is released.
왘
G
Place the gear selector lever in drive
position D or reverse gear R.
Warning!
G
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of park position P or neutral N if the
engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward
or in reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only
shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on
the brake pedal.
! In order to avoid damage to the
transmission:
앫
Wait for the gear selection process to complete before setting the vehicle in motion.
앫
Place the gear selector lever in reverse
gear R or park position P only when the vehicle is stopped.
왘
Release the brake pedal.
왘
Carefully depress the accelerator
pedal.
! If you hear a warning signal and the message Release parking brake
appears in the multifunction display when driving
off, you have forgotten to release the parking
brake.
Release the parking brake (컄 page 49).
50
After a cold start, the transmission engages at a higher revolution. This allows the
catalytic converter to reach its operating
temperature earlier.
! Do not run cold engine at high engine speed.
Running a cold engine at high engine speed may
shorten the service life of the engine.
! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator
pedal and applying the brakes reduces engine
performance and causes premature brake and
drivetrain wear.
i Once the vehicle is in motion, the automatic
central locking system engages.
You can deactivate the automatic locking using
the control system (컄 page 139).
You can open a locked door from the inside.
Open door only when conditions are safe to do
so.
Getting started
Driving
Switching on headlamps
High beam
Low beam headlamps
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
Turn signals
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
The exterior lamp switch is located on the
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
Combination switch
Exterior lamp switch
1 Off
2 Low beam headlamps on
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B.
The low beam headlamps come on.
1 High beam
2 High beam flasher
왘
Push combination switch in direction of
arrow 1.
The high beam headlamps and high
beam headlamp indicator lamp A in
the instrument cluster come on
(컄 page 29).
For more information on headlamps, see
“Lighting” (컄 page 106).
Combination switch
1 Turn signals, right
2 Turn signals, left
왘
Press the combination switch up 1 or
down 2.
The corresponding turn signal indicator
lamp L or K in the instrument
cluster flashes (컄 page 29).
The combination switch resets automatically after major directional changes.
51
Getting started
Driving
i To signal minor directional changes, such as
! Do not operate the windshield wipers when
changing lanes, press combination switch to
point of resistance only and release. The corresponding turn signals will flash three times.
the windshield is dry. Dust that accumulates on
a windshield might scratch the glass and/or
damage the wiper blades when wiping occurs on
a dry windshield. If it is necessary to operate the
wipers in dry weather conditions, always operate
the windshield wipers with windshield washer
fluid (컄 page 53).
Windshield wipers
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
! If anything blocks the windshield wipers
(leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off
immediately.
앫
앫
Combination switch
1 Single wipe
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
2 Switching on windshield wipers
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
52
For safety reasons, stop the vehicle in a safe
location, remove the SmartKey from starter
switch before attempting to remove any
blockage.
The hood must be opened (컄 page 250) before folding the wiper arms away from the
windshield. You could otherwise damage the
hood and/or the wiper arm.
앫
Remove the blockage.
앫
Turn the windshield wipers on again.
If windshield wipers fail to function at all in
switch position I,
앫
set the combination switch to the next
highest wiper speed
앫
have the windshield wipers checked at the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Switching on windshield wipers
왘
Turn the combination switch in direction of arrow 2 to the desired position,
depending on the intensity of the rain.
0 Windshield wipers off
I
Intermittent wiping
II Normal wiper speed
III Fast wiper speed
Getting started
Driving
Intermittent wiping
i Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the
Single wipe
! Do not leave windshield wipers in
vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is
opened. This protects persons getting into or out
of the vehicle from being sprayed.
왘
intermittent setting when the vehicle is taken to
an automatic car wash or during windshield
cleaning. Wipers will operate in the presence of
water sprayed on the windshield, and wipers
may be damaged as a result.
Intermittent wiping will be continued when
앫
the surface of the rain sensor or optical effects
may cause the windshield wipers to wipe in an
undesired fashion. This could then damage the
windshield wiper blades or scratch the windows.
You should therefore switch off the windshield
wipers when weather conditions are dry.
The intermittent wiping interval is dependent on the wetness of the windshield.
왘
Turn the combination switch in direction of arrow 2 to position I.
After the initial wipe, pauses between
wipes are controlled by the rain sensor.
앫
The windshield wipers wipe one time
without washer fluid.
all doors are closed and the gear selector
lever is in drive position D or reverse gear R
or
! If you have set intermittent wiping, dirt on
the wiper setting is changed using the combination switch
Press combination switch briefly in
direction of arrow 1 to the resistance
point.
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
왘
Press combination switch in direction
of arrow 1 past the resistance point.
The windshield wipers operate with
washer fluid.
i To prevent smears on the windshield or
noisy/chattering wiper blades, wipe with windshield washer fluid every now and then even
when it is raining.
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Windshield washer system
and headlamp cleaning system”
(컄 page 257).
53
Getting started
Driving
Problems while driving
The coolant temperature is
above 248°F (120°C)
The engine runs erratically and misfires
The coolant is too hot and is no longer
cooling the engine.
In case of accident
If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:
왘
Do not start the engine under any
circumstances.
왘
Notify local fire and/or police
authorities.
앫
An ignition cable may be damaged.
앫
The engine electronics may not be
operating properly.
앫
Unburned gasoline may have entered
the catalytic converter and damaged it.
왘
Give very little gas.
왘
왘
Have the problem repaired by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
If no damage can be determined on the
54
왘
Stop the vehicle as soon as possible in
a safe location and turn off the engine.
Allow engine and coolant to cool off.
왘
Check the coolant level and add
coolant if necessary (컄 page 255).
If the extent of the damage cannot be
determined:
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
앫
major assemblies
앫
fuel system
앫
engine mount:
왘
Start the engine in the usual manner.
Getting started
Parking and locking
왔 Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive.
You have properly stopped and parked
your vehicle. End your drive as follows.
Warning!
G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
system. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle.
Warning!
G
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the vehicle drivetrain as a result of vehicle movement, before turning off the
engine and leaving the vehicle always:
앫
Keep right foot on brake pedal.
앫
Pull the parking brake lever up as many
notches as possible.
앫
Move the gear selector lever to park
position P.
앫
Slowly release brake pedal.
앫
When parked on an incline, turn front
wheels towards the road curb.
앫
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 and remove.
앫
Take the SmartKey with you and lock
vehicle when leaving.
Parking brake
Warning!
G
Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle
is in motion can cause the rear wheels to
lock up. You could lose control of the vehicle
and cause an accident. In addition, the
vehicle’s brake lights do not light up when
the parking brake is engaged.
1 Parking brake lever
55
Getting started
Parking and locking
왘
Pull parking brake lever 1 up as many
notches as possible.
When the engine is running, the
warning lamp ; (USA only)
or 3 (Canada only) in the
instrument cluster comes on.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children
could release the parking brake and/or
move the gear selector lever from park
position P, either of which could result in an
accident and/or serious personal injury.
Warning!
G
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear selector lever not fully engaged in park
position P is dangerous. Also, when parked
on an incline, park position P alone may not
prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly
hitting people or objects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to park position P (컄 page 48).
Turning off the engine
왘
Place the gear selector lever in
position P.
i Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting automatic transmission to park
position P.
When parked on an incline, turn front wheels
towards the road curb.
왘
When parked on an incline, turn front wheels
towards the road curb.
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 and remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch.
The immobilizer is activated.
Switching off headlamps
i The SmartKey can only be removed from the
왘
starter switch with the gear selector lever in park
position P.
Turn the exterior lamp switch
to M (컄 page 51).
For more information on headlamps, see
“Lighting” (컄 page 106).
Releasing seat belts
왘
Press the seat belt release button
(컄 page 46).
Allow the retractor to completely
rewind the seat belt by guiding the
latch plate.
56
Getting started
Parking and locking
! Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so that
the seat belt and/or latch plate cannot get
caught or pinched in the door or in the seat
mechanism. This can damage the seat belt and
impair the effectiveness of the seat belt, and/or
cause damage to the door and/or door trim
panel. Such damage is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Damaged seat belts must be replaced. Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Locking
Warning!
G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the door
openings when closing the doors. Be especially careful when small children are
around.
Before closing doors, make sure there is no
possibility of someone getting caught in a
door during closing.
G
i If you hear a warning signal you have forgot-
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
unsupervised access to a vehicle could
result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
In addition the message $ Turn off lamps
appears in the multifunction display.
Warning!
Warning!
G
Only Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren
722 Edition:
Because of the carbon fiber the footwell
could be slippery when wet. Be careful when
exiting the vehicle with wet shoe soles, you
could slip on it.
왘
ten to switch off the headlamps before opening
the driver’s door.
Switch off the headlamps.
왘
Press the lock button ‹ on the
SmartKey (컄 page 38).
With the hood, trunk and all doors
closed, all turn signal lamps flash three
times. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
For more information, see “Locking and
unlocking” (컄 page 98).
Exit the vehicle and close all doors.
57
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving safety systems
Performance enhancement system
Anti-theft systems
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most important facts about the restraint systems
of the vehicle.
The restraint systems are
앫
Seat belts (컄 page 71)
앫
Child restraints (컄 page 76)
Additional protection potential provided by
앫
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
with
Air bag system components with
앫
Passenger front air bag off indicator
lamp (컄 page 70)
앫
Passenger seat with Occupant Classification System (OCS) (컄 page 67)
Although independent systems, their
protective functions work in conjunction
with each other.
i For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint
systems for infants and children, see “Children
in the vehicle” (컄 page 75).
The SRS system conducts a self-test when
the ignition is switched on and in regular
intervals while the engine is running. This
facilitates detection of malfunctions. The
1 indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on when the ignition is
switched on and goes out no later than a
few seconds after the engine has been
started.
The SRS components are in operational
readiness if the 1 indicator lamp is not
lit when the engine is running.
앫
Air bags (컄 page 62)
앫
Air bag control unit
(with crash sensors)
앫
Emergency Tensioning Device
(ETD) for seat belts (컄 page 74)
앫
fails to go out after approximately
4 seconds after the engine was started
앫
Seat belt force limiter (컄 page 74)
앫
does not come on at all
앫
comes on after the engine was started
or while driving
A malfunction in the system has been
detected if the 1 indicator lamp:
For more information, see the “Practical
hints” section (컄 page 310).
60
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Modifications to or work improperly conducted on restraint systems (such as seat
belts and anchors, emergency tensioning
devices, seat belt force limiters or air bags)
or their wiring, as well as tampering with
interconnected electronic systems, can lead
to the restraint systems no longer functioning as intended.
Air bags or emergency tensioning devices,
for example, could deploy inadvertently or
fail to deploy in accidents although the
deceleration threshold for air bag deployment is exceeded. Therefore, never modify
the restraint systems. Do not tamper with
electronic components or their software.
Warning!
G
In the event that the 1 indicator lamp
comes on during driving or does not come
on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a
malfunction. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
not deploy when needed in an accident,
which could result in serious personal or
fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly
and unnecessarily which could also result in
injury.
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system
to accommodate a person with disabilities,
contact your local authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) for details.
In addition, improper repair work on the SRS
creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment. Work on the SRS must therefore only
be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
61
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Air bags
Warning!
Warning!
G
Air bags are designed to reduce the potential of injury and fatality in certain frontal
impacts (front air bags, knee air bags) or
side impacts (head-thorax air bags).
However, no system available today can
totally eliminate injuries and fatalities.
The deployment of the air bags temporarily
releases a small amount of dust from the air
bags. This dust, however, is neither injurious
to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in
the vehicle. The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for people with
asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid
this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
62
G
앫
Adjust the driver’s seat as far as possible rearward, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance
from the center of the driver’s breastbone to the center of the air bag cover
on the steering wheel must be at least
10 inches (25 cm) or more. You should
be able to accomplish this by a combination of adjustments to the seat and
steering wheel. If you have any problems, please see an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
Do not lean your head or chest close to
the steering wheel or dashboard.
앫
Keep hands on the outside of steering
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms
inside the rim can increase the risk and
potential severity of hand/arm injury
when driver’s front air bag inflates.
To reduce the risk of injury when the front
air bags inflate, it is very important for the
driver and passenger to always be in a properly seated position and to wear their seat
belts.
For maximum protection in the event of a
collision always be in normal seated position
with your back against the backrest. Fasten
your seat belt and make sure that it is properly positioned on your body (컄 page 45).
Since the air bag inflates with considerable
speed and force, a proper seating and hands
on steering wheel position will help to keep
you at a safe distance from the air bag.
Occupants who are unbelted, out of position
or too close to the air bag can be seriously
injured or killed by an air bag as it inflates
with great force in the blink of an eye:
앫
Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
position with your back against the seat
backrest.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫
Adjust the passenger seat as far as possible rearward from the dashboard when
the seat is occupied.
앫
Occupants, especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their
heads in the area of the door where the
head-thorax air bag inflates. This could
result in serious injuries or death should
the air bag be deployed. Always sit as
upright as possible, properly use the
seat belts and an appropriately sized infant, or toddler restraint, or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of
the child.
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in severe injuries to you or other
occupants.
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that
you make the buyer aware of this safety
information. Be sure to give the buyer this
Operator’s Manual.
Warning!
G
There is a possibility of a head-thorax air bag
related injury if occupants, especially children, are not properly seated or restrained
when next to a head-thorax air bag which
needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in
order to do its job.
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
follow these guidelines:
(1) Occupants, especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their
heads in the area of the door where the
head-thorax air bag inflates. This could
result in serious injuries or death should
the head-thorax air bag be deployed.
(2) Always sit as upright as possible, properly use the seat belts, and for children
12 years old or under, use an appropriately sized infant, or toddler restraint, or
booster seat recommended for the size
and weight of the child.
(3) Always wear seat belts properly.
If you believe that, even with the use of
these guidelines, it would be safer for your
passenger seat occupants to have the passenger head-thorax air bag deactivated,
then deactivation can be accomplished
upon your written request to do so at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center at an
additional cost.
Please contact your local authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer
Assistance Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100 for details.
63
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
i Air bags are designed to activate only in cer- Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
tain frontal impacts (front air bags, knee air
bags) and side impacts (head-thorax air bags)
which exceed preset thresholds. Only during
these types of impacts will they provide their
supplemental protection.
The driver and passenger should always wear
their seat belts. Otherwise it is not possible for
the air bags to provide their supplemental
protection.
In cases of other types of impacts and impacts
below air bag deployment thresholds, air bags
will not deploy. The driver and passenger will
then be protected to the extent possible by a
properly fastened seat belt. A properly fastened
seat belt is also needed to provide the best possible protection in a rollover.
We caution you not to rely on the presence of the
air bags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt.
It is important to your safety and that of your passenger that you replace deployed air bags and
repair any malfunctioning air bags to ensure that
the vehicle will continue to provide supplemental
crash protection for occupants.
64
emergency tensioning device and air
bag
Warning!
앫
No modifications of any kind may be
made to any components or wiring of
the SRS. This includes changing or
removing any component or part of the
SRS, the installation of additional trim
material, badges, etc. over the steering
wheel hub, passenger front air bag cover, outboard sides of the front seat
backrests, door trim panels, or door trim
panels, and installation of additional
electrical/electronic equipment on or
near SRS components and wiring. Keep
area between air bags and occupants
free from objects (e.g. packages,
purses, umbrellas, etc.).
앫
Air bag system components will be hot
after an air bag has inflated. Do not
touch.
앫
Never place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
G
앫
Damaged seat belts or seat belts that
were highly stressed in an accident
must be replaced and their anchoring
points must also be checked. Only use
seat belts installed or supplied by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
Air bags and Emergency Tensioning
Devices (ETDs) are designed to function
on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or
ETD that was activated must be
replaced.
앫
Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges.
They could tear.
앫
Do not make any modification that could
change the effectiveness of the seat
belts.
앫
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this
may severely weaken them. In a crash,
they may not be able to provide
adequate protection.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫
앫
앫
In addition, improper repair work on the
SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS
inoperative or causing unintended air
bag deployment. Work on the SRS must
therefore only be performed by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
For your protection and the protection
of others, when scrapping the air bag
unit or emergency tensioning device,
our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available
from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Given the considerable deployment
speed, required inflation volume, and
the textile structure of the air bags,
there is the possibility of abrasions or
other, potentially more serious injuries
resulting from air bag deployment.
When you sell your vehicle, we strongly
urge you to give notice to the subsequent
owner that it is equipped with an SRS by
alerting them to the applicable section in
the Operator’s Manual.
Front air bags
i The front air bags in this vehicle have been
designed to inflate in two stages. This allows
the air bag to have different rates of inflation that
are based on the rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as assessed by the air bag control unit.
On the passenger side, the front air bag
deployment is additionally influenced by the
passenger’s weight category as identified by the
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
(컄 page 67).
1 Driver air bag
2 Passenger air bag
Driver and passenger air bags are
deployed:
앫
in the event of certain frontal impacts
앫
if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
앫
independently of the head-thorax air
bags
The lighter the passenger side occupant, the
higher the vehicle deceleration rate required for
the second stage inflation of the air bag.
The air bags will not deploy in impacts
which do not exceed the system’s
deployment thresholds. You will then be
protected by the fastened seat belts.
65
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The passenger air bag will only be deployed if:
앫
the system, based on the OCS weight
sensor readings, senses that the passenger seat is occupied
앫
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp in the lower part of the center
console is not lit (컄 page 70)
앫
the impact exceeds a preset
deployment threshold
Knee air bags
Head-thorax air bags
1 Knee air bag, driver’s side
2 Knee air bag, passenger side
1 Head-thorax air bag
The knee air bags are located on the lower
instrument panel. They are designed to operate together with the front air bags in
certain frontal impacts exceeding a preset
threshold. The knee air bags operate best
in conjunction with a properly positioned
and fastened seat belts and when the footwell is kept clear of objects.
66
The head-thorax air bags are deployed:
앫
in impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold
앫
on the impacted side of the vehicle
앫
independently of the front air bags
The head-thorax air bags are not deployed
in impacts which do not exceed the
system’s deployment threshold.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Occupant Classification System
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
automatically turns the passenger front air
bag and passenger-side knee air bag on or
off based on the classified occupant
weight category determined by weight
sensor readings from the passenger seat.
i The system does not deactivate the
head-thorax air bag and the emergency tensioning device.
Occupants must sit properly belted in a
position that is as upright as possible with
their back against the seat backrest and
feet on the floor to be correctly classified.
If the occupant’s weight is transferred to
another object in the vehicle (e.g. by
leaning on armrests), the OCS may not be
able to properly approximate the
occupant’s weight category.
i If the seat needs to be serviced in any way,
G
take the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Warning!
Only seat accessories approved by
Mercedes-Benz may be used.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp illuminates when an adult or someone
larger than a small individual is in the passenger seat, have the passenger re-position
himself or herself in the seat until the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
goes out.
Both driver and the passenger should
always use the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp (컄 page 70) as an indication of whether or not the passenger is
properly positioned.
For information on air bag display
messages, see (컄 page 319).
In the event of a collision, the air bag control
unit will not allow passenger front air bag or
passenger knee air bag deployment when
the OCS classified the passenger seat occupant as being up to or less than the weight
of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard
child restraint or if the passenger seat is
sensed as being empty.
컄컄
67
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄
When the OCS senses that the passenger
seat occupant is classified as being up to or
less than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child
restraint, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp will illuminate when the engine is
started and remain illuminated, indicating
that the passenger front air bag and passenger knee air bag are deactivated.
When the OCS senses that the passenger
seat is classified as being empty, the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
will illuminate when the engine is started
and remain illuminated, indicating that the
passenger front air bag and the passenger
knee air bag are deactivated.
When the OCS senses that the passenger
seat occupant is classified as being heavier
than the weight of a typical 12-month-old
child seated in a standard child restraint or
as being a small individual (such as a young
teenager or a small adult), the PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp will illuminate
for approximately 6 seconds when the
engine is started and then, depending on
occupant weight sensor readings from the
seat, remain illuminated or go out. With the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
illuminated, the passenger front air bag and
the passenger knee air bag are deactivated.
With the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp out, the passenger front air bag and
the passenger knee air bag are activated.
When the OCS senses that the passenger
seat occupant is classified as an adult or
someone larger than a small individual, the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds
when the engine is started and then go out,
indicating that the passenger front air bag
68
and the passenger knee air bag are
activated.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is illuminated, the passenger front air
bag and the passenger knee air bag are
deactivated and will not be deployed.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is not illuminated, the passenger front
air bag and the passenger knee air bag are
activated and will be deployed:
앫
in the event of certain frontal impacts
앫
if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
앫
independently of the head-thorax air
bags
If the passenger front air bag and the passenger knee air bag are deployed, the rate of
inflation will be influenced by:
앫
the rate of relevant vehicle deceleration
as assessed by the air bag control unit
앫
passenger’s weight category as identified by the Occupant Classification
System (OCS)
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
앫
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the passenger
front air bag and/or the passenger knee
air bag inflate in a collision which could
occur under some circumstances, even
with the air bag technology installed in
your vehicle.
앫
If you install a rear-facing child restraint
on the passenger seat, make sure that
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is illuminated, indicating that the
passenger front air bag and the passenger knee air bag are deactivated. Should
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp not illuminate or go out while the
restraint is installed, please check installation. Periodically check the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp while driving to make sure the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is illuminated. If the PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp goes out or
Children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or child restraint recommended
for the size and weight of the child.
The infant or child restraint must be properly
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt fully in
accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag. Note the following
important information:
앫
Your vehicle is equipped with air bag
technology designed to turn off the passenger front air bag and the passenger
knee air bag in your vehicle when the
system senses the weight of a typical
12-month-old child or less along with
the weight of a standard appropriate
child restraint on the passenger seat.
remains out, do not transport a child on
the passenger seat until the system has
been repaired. A child in a rear-facing
child restraint on the passenger seat will
be seriously injured or even killed if the
passenger front air bag and/or the
passenger knee air bag inflate.
앫
If you place a child in a forward-facing
child restraint on the passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible,
use the proper child restraint recommended for the age, size and weight of
the child, and secure child restraint with
the vehicle’s seat belt according to the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
For children larger than the typical
12-month-old child, the passenger front
air bag and the passenger knee air bag
may or may not be activated
(컄 page 68).
69
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
i Deployment of the driver front air bag does
not mean that the passenger front air bag also
should have deployed.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is located in lower part of the center
console.
앫
that the seat was empty or occupied by the
weight up to or less than that of a typical
12-month-old child seated in a standard
child restraint – both instances where the
system suppresses deployment of the
passenger front air bag even though the
impact met the criteria and was of sufficient
severity to deploy the driver front air bag
that the seat was occupied by a small individual (such as a young teenager or a small
adult) or a child weighing more than the
weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a
standard child restraint – instances where
the system may suppress deployment of the
passenger front air bag even though the
impact met the criteria and was of sufficient
severity to deploy the driver front air bag
70
G
If the 1 indicator lamp and the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
are lit at the same time, there is a malfunction in the Occupant Classification System.
The passenger front air bag and the passenger knee air bag will be deactivated in this
case.
The Occupant Classification System (컄 page 67)
may have determined:
앫
Warning!
In order to ensure proper operation of the
air bag system and OCS:
1 Passenger front air bag off indicator
lamp
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp 1 will be illuminated, except with
the SmartKey removed or in starter switch
position 0.
앫
Have the system checked as soon as
possible by qualified technicians.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
앫
Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
position with your back against the seat
backrest.
앫
Do not lean on the armrests or lift yourself from the seat by using the handle
over the door as this may cause the OCS
to be unable to correctly approximate
the occupant weight category.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫
앫
Only have the seat repaired or replaced
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Read and observe all warnings in this
chapter.
Self-test Occupant Classification
System
After turning the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 1 or 2, the PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp located in the
center console illuminates. If an adult occupant is properly sitting on the passenger
seat and the system senses the occupant
as being an adult, the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp will illuminate and
go out after approximately 6 seconds.
If the seat is not occupied and the system
senses the passenger seat as being empty,
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp will illuminate and not go out.
Warning!
G
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp should not illuminate, the system is
not functioning. You must contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before seating
any child on the passenger seat.
For more information, see the “Practical
hints” section (컄 page 312).
Warning!
G
Never place anything between seat
cushion and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it
reduces the effectiveness of the Occupant
Classification System. The bottom of the
child seat must make full contact with the
passenger seat cushion. An incorrectly
mounted child seat could cause injuries to
the child in case of an accident, instead of
increasing protection for the child.
Seat belts
The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in all
50 states, the District of Columbia, the
U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces.
Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
occupants should have their seat belts fastened when ever the vehicle is in motion.
For information on fastening seat belts,
see “Fastening the seat belts” (컄 page 45).
i For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in
the vehicle” (컄 page 75).
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of child seats.
71
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure your passenger is
properly restrained.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passenger should
always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are wearing your
seat belt. The air bags can only provide the
protection they were designed to afford if
the occupants are using their seat belts
(컄 page 71).
72
Warning!
G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and the
belt is properly positioned on the body.
Warning!
G
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly
restrained with a separate seat belt. Never
use a seat belt for more than one person at
a time.
Warning!
G
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced
and their anchoring points must also be
checked.
Only use seat belts which have been
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Do not make any modifications to the seat
belts. This can lead to unintended activation
of the ETDs or to their failure to activate
when necessary.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash, they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Have all work carried out only by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
앫
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
앫
앫
Seat belts can only work when used
properly. Never wear seat belts in any
other way than as described in this
section, as that could result in serious
injuries in case of an accident.
Each occupant should wear their seat
belt at all times, because seat belts help
reduce the likelihood of and potential
severity of injuries in accidents, including rollovers. The integrated restraint
system includes SRS (driver air bag,
passenger air bag, knee air bags,
head-thorax air bags) and ETD (seat belt
emergency tensioning device). The system is designed to enhance the protection offered to properly belted
occupants in certain frontal (front air
bags, knee air bags and ETD) and side
(head-thorax air bags and ETD) impacts
which exceed preset deployment
thresholds.
앫
앫
앫
Never wear the shoulder belt under your
arm, against your neck or off your shoulder. In a frontal crash, your body would
move too far forward. That would increase the chance of head and neck injuries. The belt would also apply too
much force to the ribs or abdomen,
which could severely injure internal
organs such as your liver or spleen.
Never wear belts over rigid or breakable
objects in or on your clothing, such as
eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., as these
might cause injuries.
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the belt is positioned across your
abdomen, it could cause serious personal injuries in a crash.
앫
Belts should not be worn twisted. In a
crash, you wouldn’t have the full width
of the belt to manage impact forces. The
twisted belt against your body could
cause injuries.
앫
Pregnant women should also always use
a lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
should be positioned as low as possible
on the hips to avoid any possible
pressure on the abdomen.
앫
Never place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
앫
When using a seat belt to secure infant
or toddler restraints or children in
booster seats, always follow the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat
belt around a person and another person or other objects.
73
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Enhanced seat belt reminder system
When the engine is started, the seat belt
telltale < will always illuminate
for 6 seconds to remind you and your
passenger to fasten your seat belts.
If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened
when the engine is started, an additional
warning chime will also sound for a maximum of 6 seconds or until the driver’s seat
belt is fastened.
If after these 6 seconds, the driver’s or the
passenger’s seat belt (with the passenger
seat occupied) are not fastened with all
doors closed,
앫
the seat belt telltale < remains illuminated for as long as either the
driver’s or passenger’s seat belt is not
fastened.
74
앫
and if the vehicle speed once exceeds
15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt
telltale < starts flashing and a
warning chime sounds with increasing
intensity for a maximum of 60 seconds
or until the driver’s and passenger’s
seat belts are fastened.
If the driver’s or the passenger’s seat
belt remain unfastened after
60 seconds, the warning chime stops
sounding. The seat belt telltale <
stops flashing but continues to be
illuminated.
The seat belt telltale < will only go out
if both the driver’s and the passenger’s
seat belt (with the passenger seat
occupied) are fastened, or the vehicle is
standing still and a door is opened.
For more information, see the “Practical
hints” section (컄 page 308).
Emergency tensioning device (ETD),
seat belt force limiter
The seat belts are equipped with
emergency tensioning devices and belt
force limiters.
The ETD is designed to activate in the
following cases:
앫
in frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding the system deployment threshold
앫
if the restraint systems are operational
and functioning correctly, see 1 indicator lamp (컄 page 60)
앫
in certain vehicle rollovers if the
system determines an additional
degree of protection
i The ETDs will only activate if the seat belts
are fastened (latch plate properly inserted into
buckle).
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
When activated, emergency tensioning
devices remove slack from the belts in
such a way that the seat belts fit more
snugly against the body. Belt force limiters
reduce the force exerted by the seat belts
on occupants during a crash.
Warning!
G
Children in the vehicle
If an infant or child is traveling with you in
the vehicle:
왘
왘
An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that
was activated must be replaced.
When disposing of the emergency tensioning device, our safety instructions must be
followed. These are available at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Secure the child using an infant or child
restraint appropriate to the age and
size of the child.
Make sure the infant or child is properly secured at all times while the vehicle
is in motion.
Infant and child restraint seats and
information on choosing an appropriate
restraint system can be obtained from any
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restraint system. The children could
앫
injure themselves on parts of the vehicle
앫
be seriously or fatally injured through
excessive exposure to extreme heat or
cold
Do not expose the child restraint system to
direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s
metal parts, for example, could become very
hot, and the child could be burned on these
parts.
If children open a door, they could
앫
injure other persons
앫
get out of the car and injure themselves
or be injured by following traffic
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
passenger compartment unless they are
firmly secured in place.
For more information, please refer to the
“Useful features” section (컄 page 206)
through (컄 page 207).
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo
increases a child’s risk of injury in the event
of
앫
strong braking maneuvers
앫
sudden changes of direction
앫
an accident
75
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Infant and child restraint systems
We recommend all infants and children be
properly restrained at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
The passenger lap-shoulder belt has a
special seat belt retractor for secure
fastening of child restraints.
To fasten a child restraint follow child
restraint instructions for mounting. Then
pull the shoulder belt out completely and
let it retract. During seat belt retraction, a
ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate
that the special seat belt retractor is activated. The belt is now locked. Push down
on child restraint to take up any slack.
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and
let seat belt retract completely.
The seat belt can again be used in the
usual manner.
Warning!
G
Never release the seat belt buckle while the
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat
belt retractor will be deactivated.
The use of infant or child restraints is required by law in all 50 states, the District of
Columbia, the U.S. territories, and all
Canadian provinces.
Infants and small children should be
seated in an appropriate infant or child
restraint system and properly secured in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions for the child restraint that complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards 213 and 225 and
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 210.2.
A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of compliance with these standards can be found on the instruction label
on the restraint and in the instruction
manual provided with the restraint.
76
When using any infant, or toddler restraint,
or booster seat, be sure to carefully read
and follow all manufacturer’s instructions
for installation and use.
Please read and observe warning labels
affixed to inside of the vehicle and to infant
or child restraints.
The infant or child restraint are applicable
only to the standard passenger seat. Any
individualization of this seat may restrict
correct fitment of the infant or child
restraint.
Warning!
G
Children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or child restraint recommended
for the size and weight of the child.
The infant or child restraint must be properly
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt fully
in accordance with the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Occupants, especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their heads
in the area of the door where the
head-thorax air bag inflates. This could
result in serious personal injuries or death
should the head-thorax air bag be triggered.
Always sit nearly upright, properly use the
seat belt and use an appropriately sized infant or toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag. Note the following
important information when you place a
child in the passenger seat:
앫
Your vehicle is equipped with air bag
technology designed to turn off the passenger front air bag and the passenger
knee air bag in your vehicle when the
OCS senses the weight of a typical
12-month-old child or less along with
the weight of a standard appropriate
child restraint on the passenger seat.
앫
앫
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the passenger
front air bag inflates in a collision which
could occur under some circumstances,
even with the air bag technology
installed in your vehicle.
If you install a rear-facing child restraint
on the passenger seat, make sure that
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is illuminated, indicating that the
passenger front air bag and the passenger knee air bag are deactivated. Should
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp not illuminate or go out while the
restraint is installed, please check installation. Periodically check the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
while driving to make sure the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is
illuminated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lamp goes out or remains
out, do not transport a child on the passenger seat until the system has been
repaired. A child in a rear-facing child
restraint on the passenger seat will be
seriously injured or even killed if the
passenger front air bag and/or the
passenger knee air bag inflate.
앫
If you place a child in a forward-facing
child restraint on the passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible,
use the proper child restraint recommended for the age, size and weight of
the child, and secure child restraint with
the vehicle’s seat belt according to the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
For children larger than the typical
12-month-old child, the passenger front
air bag may or may not be activated
(컄 page 68).
77
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Infants and small children should never
share a seat belt with another occupant.
During an accident, they could be crushed
between the occupant and seat belt.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle
and/or the child is not properly secured in
the child restraint.
Warning!
G
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts.
Position the shoulder belt across chest and
shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat
may be necessary to achieve proper belt
positioning for children over 41 lb until they
reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits
properly without a booster.
When the child restraint is not in use,
remove it from the vehicle or secure it with
the seat belt to prevent the child restraint
from becoming a projectile in the event of
an accident.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system. Unsupervised
children in a child restraint system may use
vehicle equipment and may cause an
accident and/or serious personal injury.
78
Installation of infant and child restraint
systems
This vehicle is equipped with a tether anchorage for a top tether strap behind the
passenger seat.
1 Cover of anchorage ring
왘
To have better access to the anchorage
ring, move the passenger seat forward
(컄 page 42).
왘
Remove cover 1 in direction of the
arrow from anchorage ring 3.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
왘
Guide tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
왘
Make sure the tether strap is not
twisted.
2 Hook
3 Anchorage ring
왘
왘
Move the passenger seat as far as
possible rearward.
Once the top tether anchorage hook is
attached, the child restraint itself can be
secured.
왘
Properly secure the child restraint using the passenger seat lap/shoulder
belt (컄 page 76) and tether anchorage
for top tether strap, fully in accordance
with the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
왘
Tighten the top tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
왘
Reinstall cover 1 after removing the
tether strap.
Securely fasten hook 2, which is part
of the tether strap, to anchorage
ring 3.
i For safety, make sure the hook has attached
to the ring beyond the safety catch, as
illustrated.
79
Safety and Security
Panic alarm
i USA only:
Activating
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
왘
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
1 Â button
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
80
Press and hold button 1 for at least
1 second.
An audible alarm and flashing exterior
lamps will operate briefly.
Deactivating
왘
Press button 1 again.
or
왘
Insert the SmartKey in starter switch.
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
왔 Driving safety systems
In this section you will find information on
the following driving safety systems:
Warning!
G
ABS
앫
ABS (Antilock Brake System)
BAS (Brake Assist System)
The following factors increase the risk of
accidents:
Warning!
앫
앫
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
앫
Excessive speed, especially in turns
앫
Electro-hydraulic brake system
앫
Wet and slippery road surfaces
앫
Following another vehicle too closely
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
the ABS and significantly reduces braking
effectiveness.
The ABS, BAS, ESP®, and the electro-hydraulic brake system cannot reduce this
risk.
Always adjust your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
G
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
the brake pressure so that the wheels do
not lock during braking. This allows you to
maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
i In winter operation, the maximum effective- The ABS is functional above a speed of ap-
ness of the ABS, the BAS, the ESP®, and the
electro-hydraulic brake system is only achieved
with winter tires (컄 page 290) or snow chains as
required.
proximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
of road surface conditions.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will
respond even to light brake pressure.
The - indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on (컄 page 29) when you
switch on the ignition. It goes out when the
engine is running.
81
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Braking
If the ABS activates during braking, the
ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument cluster dial flashes. Because of
the electro-hydraulic brake system, you
will not feel any pulsation in the brake
pedal.
왘
Keep firm and steady pressure on the
brake pedal.
Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
namely braking power and the ability to
steer the vehicle.
The ABS/ESP® warning lamp v flashes
whenever the ABS is activated which can
be an indication of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take
extra care while driving.
Emergency brake maneuver
왘
Keep continuous, full pressure on the
brake pedal.
Warning!
G
When the ABS is malfunctioning, the BAS
and the ESP® are also switched off. The basic driving and braking functions are still
available.
When the ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels
may lock during hard braking, reducing
steering capability and extending the
braking distance.
82
Warning!
G
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction. The
ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, following another vehicle too closely,
or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
For more information, see the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 302).
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
BAS
Warning!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
emergency situations. If you apply the
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically
provides full brake boost, thereby potentially reducing the braking distance.
왘
Apply continuous full braking pressure
until the emergency braking situation is
over.
The ABS will prevent the wheels from
locking.
When you release the brake pedal the
brakes function again as normal. The BAS
is then deactivated.
Warning!
G
If the BAS is malfunctioning, the brake system is still functioning normally, but without
the additional brake boost available that
BAS would normally provide in an emergency braking maneuver. Therefore, the braking
distance may increase.
G
BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes
and tires or the traction. The BAS cannot
prevent accidents, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
ESP®
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is
operational as soon as the engine is running and monitors the vehicle’s traction
(force of adhesive friction between the
tires and the road surface) and handling.
The ESP® recognizes when a wheel is
spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By
applying brakes to the appropriate wheel
and by limiting the engine output, the ESP®
works to stabilize the vehicle. The ESP® is
especially useful while driving off and on
wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP®
also stabilizes the vehicle during braking
and steering maneuvers.
The ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster (컄 page 29) flashes
when the ESP® is engaged.
The ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the
instrument (컄 page 28) cluster comes on
when you switch on the ignition. It goes out
when the engine is running.
83
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Warning!
G
Never switch off the ESP® when you see the
ABS/ESP® warning lamp v flashing in
the instrument cluster. In this case proceed
as follows:
앫
While driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible.
앫
While driving, ease up on the
accelerator.
앫
Adapt your speed and driving style to
the prevailing road conditions.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
The ESP® cannot prevent accidents
resulting from excessive speed.
84
Warning!
G
The ESP® cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase the traction afforded. The ESP®
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP® equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
! Because the ESP® operates automatically,
the engine must be shut off (SmartKey in starter
switch position 0 or 1) when
앫
the parking brake is being tested on a brake
test dynamometer
앫
the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised
Active braking action through the ESP® may
otherwise seriously damage the brake system
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
The ESP® will only function properly if you use
wheels of the recommended tire size
(컄 page 381).
For more information, see the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 300).
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Switching off the ESP®
Electronic traction system
Warning!
The electronic traction system is a component of ESP®.
Warning!
The electronic traction system improves
the vehicle’s ability to utilize available traction, especially under slippery road conditions by applying the brakes to a spinning
wheel.
When you switch off the ESP®, the electronic traction system is still enabled.
Warning!
G
If you are driving too fast, the electronic
traction system cannot reduce the risk of an
accident.
The electronic traction system cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting
on the vehicle.
G
The ESP® should not be switched off during
normal driving other than in the circumstances described below. Disabling of the
system will reduce vehicle stability in
standard driving maneuvers.
To improve the vehicle’s traction, turn off
the ESP® in driving situations where it
would be advantageous to have the drive
wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for
better grip such as:
앫
when driving with snow chains
앫
in deep snow
앫
in sand or gravel
G
Switch on the ESP® immediately if the
aforementioned circumstances do not apply
anymore. Otherwise the ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle when it is starting to skid or
a wheel is spinning.
When you switch off the ESP®
앫
the ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle
앫
the engine output is not limited, which
allows the drive wheels to spin and
thus cut into surfaces for better grip
앫
the electronic traction system will still
apply the brakes to a spinning wheel
앫
the ESP® continues to operate when
you are braking
i When the ESP® is switched off and one or
more drive wheels are spinning, the ABS/ESP®
warning lamp v in the instrument cluster
flashes. However, the ESP® will then not
stabilize the vehicle.
85
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
The switch is located on the lower part of
the center console.
Warning!
G
When the ABS/ESP® warning lamp v is
illuminated continuously, the ESP® is
switched off or is not operational due to a
malfunction. Vehicle stability in standard
driving maneuvers reduces.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP®.
1 ESP® switch
왘
Press ESP® switch 1.
The ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in
the instrument cluster comes on.
The ESP® is deactivated.
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period with the ESP® switched off. This
may cause serious damage to the drivetrain
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Switching on the ESP®
왘
Press ESP® switch 1.
The ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in
the instrument cluster goes out.
You are now again in normal driving
mode with the ESP® switched on.
86
Electro-hydraulic brake system
The electro-hydraulic brake system combines a hydraulic brake circuit with electronically controlled brake servo
assistance. You have increased braking
safety and improved braking comfort.
Warning!
G
Never ignore a brake malfunction indicated
in the speedometer display, for example by
the ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only)
indicator lamp. Refer to the “Practical hints”
section (컄 page 303). Also read and observe the messages in the instrument
cluster multifunction display (컄 page 329).
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Warning!
G
A tow bar must be used if circumstances do
not permit the use of the recommended
towing methods and the vehicle requires
towing with all four wheels on the ground.
Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is only permissible for distances
up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more information, see “Towing the vehicle”
(컄 page 370).
The electro-hydraulic brake system requires
electrical power to operate.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply
or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. In such a case, the
red brake warning lamp (컄 page 303)
comes on and warning messages
(컄 page 329) appear in the multifunction
display while driving. To brake, the driver
must then apply significantly greater brake
pedal pressure and depress the pedal much
further to obtain the expected braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the
brake pedal. Stopping distance is increased!
If there is a malfunction in the electro-hydraulic brake system, we recommend that
the vehicle be transported with all wheels
off the ground using flatbed or appropriate
wheel lift/dolly equipment.
The electro-hydraulic brake system is
automatically activated when you
앫
unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey
앫
open the driver’s or passenger door
앫
turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 1
앫
depress the brake pedal
앫
release the parking brake
i If the electro-hydraulic brake system is activated as the brake pedal is first depressed, you
may feel a reduced pedal resistance and longer
pedal travel than normal. When releasing the
pedal, you may also feel the brake pedal pulsate
and you may hear a sound which is caused by the
activation of the electro-hydraulic brake system
pump. This is normal and not an indication of a
malfunction. Pedal travel returns to normal when
you release the brake pedal and the sound soon
ceases.
If you experience the above while driving and the
red brake warning lamp (컄 page 303) illuminates and/or warning messages appear in the
multifunction display (컄 page 329), the brake
system is malfunctioning. Follow the instructions
of the warning message(s) and have the brake
system checked immediately.
87
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Warning!
G
Have brake pad replacement and other work
on the electro-hydraulic brake system carried out by qualified technicians only. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for further information. The electro-hydraulic brake system must be deactivated prior
to working on the system. High pressure is
intermittently built up in the system as part
of its automatic self-test. In addition, the
system is automatically activated when the
vehicle is unlocked by remote control, when
the driver or passenger door is opened,
when the SmartKey in the starter switch is
turned to position 1, when the brake pedal
is depressed or when the parking brake is
released. Failure to deactivate the system
prior to maintenance will cause brake pistons to extend and brake fluid to leak, which
may result in injuries (contusions and acid
burns). Extended brake pistons may also
cause injury.
88
The electro-hydraulic brake servo assistance switches off automatically
앫
approximately 2 minutes after you
turned the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 or removed the
SmartKey
앫
approximately 20 seconds after you
locked the vehicle from the outside
Notes on driving with the
electro-hydraulic brake system
앫
앫
Following extended periods of only minor loads to your brake system, you
should occasionally apply the brakes
when traveling at high speeds. This improves the grip of the brake pads and
prevents possible brake noise.
After driving on wet or snow-covered
roads, you should apply your brakes
firmly before parking your vehicle. This
produces heat which serves to dry the
brake disks.
Warning!
G
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking
maneuvers.
앫
On long and steep grades, shift to a
lower gear (gear range 1, 2, or 3) to
prevent the brakes from overheating
and to reduce brake wear.
앫
After hard braking, it is advisable to
drive on for some time so that the air
stream will cool down the brakes
faster.
앫
Only Mercedes-Benz approved components (e.g. brake pads) should be
installed on your vehicle. Brake pads
not approved by Mercedes-Benz may
impair the safety of your vehicle.
Safety and Security
Performance enhancement system
왔 Performance enhancement system
Airbrake
Warning!
G
The Airbrake enhances the vehicle’s driving stability. It adapts the aerodynamics of
the vehicle to the driving conditions according to the speed and the mode set.
The following factors increase the risk of
accidents:
앫
Excessive speed, especially in turns
This is achieved using a moveable spoiler.
앫
Wet and slippery road surfaces
The Airbrake is located at the rear edge of
the trunk lid.
앫
Following another vehicle too closely
Warning!
G
i In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the Airbrake is only achieved with winter
tires (M+S tires) or snow chains as required.
The Airbrake cannot reduce this risk.
Always adjust your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
When operating the Airbrake, make sure
there is no danger of anyone being harmed
by the Airbrake operation (i.e. raising and
lowering of flap). Be especially careful when
small children are around.
89
Safety and Security
Performance enhancement system
The Airbrake switch is on the upper part of
the center console.
Test mode
Manual mode
The test mode allows you to check that the
Airbrake is functioning correctly.
In this mode, the Airbrake is set to an angle
of 30° (Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren
722 Edition: 35°). The driver downforce
mode enhances stability while reducing
agility.
This mode can only be activated when the
vehicle is at standstill.
왘
Slide Airbrake switch 4 to
position 3.
The Airbrake swivels upwards to an
angle of 60°.
왘
Airbrake modes
1 Manual
2 Automatic
3 Test
4 Airbrake switch
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
The system runs a self-test to ensure
correct operation of the Airbrake.
Release the Airbrake switch.
The Airbrake returns to its initial
position.
왘
Slide the Airbrake switch 4 to
position 1.
The Airbrake swivels upwards to an angle of 30° (Mercedes-Benz SLR
McLaren 722 Edition: 35°) and stays in
this position.
i In manual mode, the Airbrake automatic
function is activated during hard braking, see
“Automatic mode” (컄 page 91).
! Before deactivating manual mode, check
the Airbrake for any objects which may have become lodged, e.g. branches or leaves, and
remove them.
Otherwise the Airbrake can no longer function
correctly.
90
Safety and Security
Performance enhancement system
Automatic mode
Rapid braking
This mode should be used for normal driving conditions.
During hard braking at a speed of more
than 60 mph (95 km/h), the Airbrake automatically swivels up to an angle of 60°.
왘
Slide the Airbrake switch 4 to
position 2.
With the ignition switched on, the
Airbrake swivels upwards to an angle
of 5° and then returns to its initial
position.
Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren:
When the vehicle exceeds a speed of
60 mph (95 km/h), the Airbrake wing
swivels up to an angle of 10°.
This allows you to achieve the best possible braking performance in an emergency.
Warning!
G
Hard braking activates the Airbrake which
may block the view through the interior rear
view mirror. In this case, monitor the traffic
behind you through the exterior rear view
mirrors.
Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren
722 Edition:
When the vehicle exceeds a speed of
75 mph (120 km/h), the Airbrake wing
swivels up to an angle of 15°.
91
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer
Anti-theft alarm system
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized
persons from starting your vehicle.
Once the alarm system has been armed, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered when
someone opens
Activating
The alarm system will also be triggered
when
앫
someone attempts to raise the vehicle
앫
someone opens a door from the inside
if the vehicle was locked with the
SmartKey
앫
someone opens the trunk with the
emergency release button
앫
a door
앫
the trunk
앫
the hood
Deactivating
앫
a storage compartment in the rear
왘
i The alarm will stay on, even if the activating
앫
the storage compartment under the
armrest
element (a door, for example) is immediately
closed.
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
i In case the engine cannot be started (yet the
vehicle’s battery is charged), the system is not
operational. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA), or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
92
If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds,
a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system (컄 page 214)
provided Tele Aid service was subscribed to and
properly activated, and that necessary cellular
service and GPS coverage are available.
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Arming the alarm system
Disarming the alarm system
Canceling the alarm
왘
왘
Unlock your vehicle with the SmartKey.
To cancel the alarm:
The turn signal lamps flash once to
indicate that the alarm system is
disarmed.
왘
Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey.
The turn signal lamps flash three times
to indicate that the alarm system is
activated. The indicator lamp in the
central locking switch (컄 page 105) begins to flash after arming the alarm
system.
i The alarm system will rearm automatically
after approximately 40 seconds if neither a door
nor the trunk lid was opened.
Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.
or
왘
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three
times, one of the following elements may not be
properly closed:
앫
a door
앫
the trunk
Close the respective element and lock the
vehicle again.
93
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Tow-away alarm
Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual
and audible alarm will be triggered when
someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
i The tow-away protection alarm is triggered,
for example, if the vehicle is lifted on one side.
If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds,
a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system (컄 page 221)
provided Tele Aid service was subscribed to and
properly activated, and that necessary cellular
service and GPS coverage are available.
Disarming tow-away alarm
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm,
switch off the tow-away alarm feature
before towing the vehicle, or when parking
on a surface subject to movement, such as
a ferry or auto train.
왘
Switch off the ignition and remove the
SmartKey.
i You cannot disarm the tow-away alarm while
the ignition is switched on.
왘
Press button 1.
Indicator lamp 2 in button 1 comes
on briefly.
The button is located on the lower part of
the center console.
왘
Exit and lock your vehicle with the
SmartKey.
The tow-away alarm remains disarmed
until you lock your vehicle again.
Arming tow-away alarm
Canceling the alarm
왘
Lock your vehicle with the SmartKey.
To cancel the alarm:
The tow-away alarm is automatically
armed after about 30 seconds.
왘
i When you unlock your vehicle, the tow-away
protection disarms automatically. The tow-away
alarm remains disarmed until you lock the
vehicle again.
94
1 Tow-away alarm off button
2 Indicator lamp
Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.
or
왘
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
95
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Audio system
Automatic transmission
Good visibility
Automatic climate control
Power windows
Driving systems
Useful features
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
In the “Controls in detail” section you will
find detailed information on how to operate the equipment installed on your vehicle. If you are already familiar with the
basic functions of your vehicle, this section
will be of particular interest to you.
To quickly familiarize yourself with the basic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
“Getting started” section of this manual.
The corresponding page numbers are
given at the beginning of each segment.
98
SmartKey
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
SmartKeys, each with remote control and
a removable mechanical key.
The SmartKey provides an extended operating range. To prevent theft, however, it is
advisable to only unlock the vehicle when
you are in close proximity to it.
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
SmartKey with remote control
앫
the doors
앫
the trunk
앫
the fuel filler flap
1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Unlock button for trunk
3 Mechanical key locking tab
4 ΠUnlock button
5 Battery check lamp
6 Â Panic button
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible
for children to open a locked door from the
inside, which could result in an accident
and/or serious injury.
! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid
exposing the SmartKey to high levels of
electromagnetic radiation.
i USA only:
i You can also open and close the power win-
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
dows using the SmartKey, see “Summer opening
feature” (컄 page 201) and “Convenience closing feature” (컄 page 202).
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
When you unlock the vehicle, the
electro-hydraulic brake system is activated.
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Factory setting
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Global unlocking
왘
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Press button Œ.
The vehicle will lock again automatically
and rearm the anti-theft alarm system
within approximately 40 seconds of
unlocking if:
앫
neither door nor trunk is opened
앫
the SmartKey is not inserted in the
starter switch
앫
the central locking switch is not
activated
99
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Global locking
Global unlocking
왘
왘
Press button ‹.
With the trunk and all doors closed, all
turn signal lamps flash three times. The
anti-theft alarm system is armed.
Press button Πtwice.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
! If you can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey, then either the batteries
in the SmartKey are discharged, the SmartKey is
malfunctioning or the vehicle battery is drained.
앫
Check the batteries in the SmartKey
(컄 page 101) and replace them if necessary
(컄 page 357).
Press button ‹.
앫
Use the mechanical key to unlock the vehicle
(컄 page 355).
With the trunk and all doors closed, all
turn signal lamps flash three times. The
anti-theft alarm system is armed.
앫
Have the vehicle battery and the battery connections checked. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Global locking
Selective setting
왘
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogram the SmartKey so that
pressing Œ only unlocks the driver’s
door and the fuel filler flap.
왘
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 5 seconds until battery check lamp 5 flashes twice.
The SmartKey will then function as
follows:
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap
왘
Press button Πonce.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
100
Restoring to factory setting
왘
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 6 seconds until battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 98)
flashes twice.
If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact Roadside Assistance or an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Unlocking and opening the trunk
Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key
Opening the doors
You can unlock the trunk separately.
If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key,
you should do the following:
Opening from the outside
A minimum height clearance of
5.5 ft (1.65 m) is required to open the
trunk lid.
왘
Press and hold button Š until the
trunk lid unlocks and opens slightly.
Checking the batteries
왘
Press button ‹ or Œ.
Battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 98)
comes on briefly to indicate that the
SmartKey batteries are in order.
왘
Have the SmartKey deactivated by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
mechanical key immediately to your
car insurance company.
왘
If necessary, have the trunk lock
replaced.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
will be glad to supply you with a
replacement.
For information on opening the doors from
the outside, see “Getting started”
(컄 page 38).
Opening from the inside
You can open a locked door from the inside. Open the door only if the vehicle is
stationary and when conditions are safe to
do so.
i If battery check lamp 5 does not come on
briefly during check, then the SmartKey
batteries are discharged.
Replace the batteries (컄 page 357).
You can obtain the required batteries at any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i If the batteries are checked within signal
range of the vehicle, pressing button ‹
or Πwill lock or unlock the vehicle
accordingly.
1 Inside door handle
101
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
왘
Pull on door handle 1.
Opening the trunk
The door swings outwards and upwards automatically.
Opening the trunk from the outside
! Ensure sufficient side- and overhead clearance prior to opening the doors, see “Main dimensions” (컄 page 387).
A minimum height clearance of
5.5 ft (1.65 m) is required to open the
trunk lid.
i If the vehicle has previously been locked
The handle is located above the rear
license plate recess.
with the SmartKey, opening a door from the
inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
The vehicle must be unlocked.
왘
Pull on handle 2 and lift the trunk lid.
! Always make sure that there is sufficient
overhead clearance.
The trunk can also be opened using
button Š on the SmartKey or from its
inside in an emergency, see “Trunk emergency release” (컄 page 104).
To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
Opening the trunk from the inside
앫
Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.
You can open the trunk from the inside if
the vehicle is stationary.
앫
Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.
A minimum height clearance of
5.5 ft (1.65 m) is required to open the
trunk lid.
The switch is located on the lower part of
the center console.
1 Trunk lock
2 Handle
102
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Closing the trunk lid
Warning!
G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the trunk
opening when closing the trunk lid. Be especially careful when small children are
around.
1 Remote trunk opening switch
왘
Press switch 1 until the trunk lid
unlocks and opens slightly.
왘
Lift the trunk lid.
! Always make sure that there is sufficient
overhead clearance.
The trunk can also be opened using
button Š on the SmartKey or from its
inside in an emergency, see “Trunk emergency release” (컄 page 104).
Make sure the trunk is closed when the engine is running and while driving. Among
other dangers, such as blocked visibility,
exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
interior. These fumes are damaging to your
health.
1 Handle
왘
Lower trunk lid by firmly pulling on
handle 1.
! Do not pull on the Airbrake. Otherwise the
Airbrake could be damaged.
i Do not place the SmartKey in the open
trunk. You may lock yourself out.
If the vehicle was previously centrally locked, the
trunk lid will lock automatically after closing it.
All turn signals will flash three times to confirm
locking.
103
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Trunk emergency release
The emergency release button is located
on the inside of the trunk lid.
With the emergency release button, the
trunk can be opened from inside the trunk.
i The emergency release button unlocks the
trunk while the vehicle is standing still or in motion.
Illumination of the emergency release
button:
앫
The button will flash for 30 minutes
after opening the trunk.
앫
The button will flash for 60 minutes
after closing the trunk.
i The emergency release button does not
open the trunk lid if the vehicle battery is discharged or disconnected.
Emergency release button
If the vehicle has previously been locked from
the outside with the SmartKey, opening the trunk
from the inside using the emergency release
button will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
왘
To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
왘
Briefly press emergency release
button.
앫
The trunk unlocks and the trunk lid
opens slightly.
Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.
앫
Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.
Push up the trunk lid to fully open.
104
Automatic locking
The doors and the trunk lock automatically
when the vehicle is set into motion.
You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
i The doors unlock automatically after an accident if the force of the impact exceeds a preset
threshold.
The vehicle locks automatically when the ignition
is switched on and the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h)
or more. You could therefore lock yourself out
when the vehicle
앫
is pushed
앫
is on a test stand
You can deactivate the automatic locking
using the control system (컄 page 139).
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Locking and unlocking from the inside
The switches are located on the upper part
of the center console.
You can lock or unlock the vehicle from inside using the central locking switches.
This can be useful, for example, if you want
to unlock the passenger door from the inside or want to lock the vehicle before
starting to drive.
Locking
왘
If all the doors are closed, the vehicle
locks.
Unlocking
왘
The central locking switch does not lock or
unlock the fuel filler flap.
You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
unsupervised access to a vehicle could
result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Press central locking switch 1.
Press central locking switch 2.
The vehicle unlocks.
i If the vehicle was previously centrally locked
Central locking switches
using the SmartKey, it will not unlock using the
central locking switch.
1 Locking
2 Unlocking
If the vehicle was previously locked with the
central locking switch
앫
while in the global remote control mode, the
complete vehicle is unlocked when a door is
opened from the inside
앫
while in the selective remote control mode,
only the door opened from the inside is
unlocked
105
Controls in detail
Lighting
For information on how to switch on the
headlamps and use the turn signals, see
“Switching on headlamps” (컄 page 51).
i If you drive in countries where vehicles drive
Exterior lamp switch
The exterior lamp switch is located on the
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
on the other side of the road than the country
where the vehicle is registered, you must have
the headlamps modified for symmetrical low
beams. Relevant information can be obtained at
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
B Low beam headlamps or high beam
headlamps when the combination
switch is pushed forward. The tail
lamps, license plate lamps, side
marker lamps, parking lamps and
instrument panel lamps also come
on.
ˆ Standing lamps, right
(turn left one stop)
‚ Standing lamps, left
(turn left two stops)
C Indicator lamp for parking lamps
M Off
Daytime running lamp mode
(컄 page 108)
U Automatic headlamp mode
Daytime running lamp mode
(컄 page 108)
C Parking lamps (also tail lamps,
license plate lamps, side marker
lamps, instrument panel lamps)
106
‡ Indicator lamp for front fog lamps
† Indicator lamp for rear fog lamp
i If you hear a warning signal you have forgotten to switch off the headlamps before opening
the driver’s door.
In addition the message $ Turn off lamps
appears in the multifunction display.
Switch off the headlamps.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Manual headlamp mode
The low beam headlamps and the parking
lamps can be switched on and off with the
exterior lamp switch.
Warning!
If the exterior lamp switch is set to U,
앫
Automatic headlamp mode
The following lamps switch on and off
automatically depending on the brightness
of the ambient light:
앫
Low beam headlamps
앫
Tail and parking lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
G
앫
the headlamps may switch off unexpectedly when the system senses bright
ambient light, for example light from
oncoming traffic.
the headlamps will not be automatically
switched on under foggy conditions.
To minimize risk to you and to others,
activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp
switch to B when driving or when traffic
and/or ambient lighting conditions require
you to do so.
In low ambient lighting conditions, only
switch from position U to B with the
vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Switching from U to B will briefly
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
may result in an accident.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for
the operation of the vehicle’s lights at all
times.
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position U.
With the SmartKey in starter switch
position 1, only the parking lamps and
side marker lamps will switch on and
off automatically.
When the engine is running, the low
beam headlamps, the tail and parking
lamps, the license plate lamps, and the
side marker lamps will switch on and
off automatically.
i USA only:
With the automatic headlamp mode activated
you can switch on the high beam headlamps in
low ambient lighting conditions.
107
Controls in detail
Lighting
Daytime running lamp mode
Canada only:
When the engine is running, and you
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position M or U.
The daytime running lamp mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.
앫
When the engine is running, the low
beam headlamps are switched on.
i With the exterior lamp switch in
turn the exterior lamp switch to
position C, the parking lamps and
side marker switch on additionally.
앫
turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B, the manual headlamp
mode has priority over the daytime
running lamp mode.
In low ambient light conditions, the
following lamps will switch on
additionally:
앫
Tail and parking lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
For nighttime driving you should turn the
exterior lamp switch to position B to
permit activation of the high beam headlamps.
i With the daytime running lamp mode activated and the exterior lamp switch in position M
you can not switch on the high beam headlamps.
108
position M or U you can not switch on the
high beam headlamps.
The high beam flasher is available at all times.
For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp
switch to position B to permit activation of
the high beam headlamps.
When the engine is running, and you shift
from a driving position to neutral N or park
position P, the low beam headlamps will
switch off with a three-minute delay.
The corresponding exterior lamps
switch on (컄 page 106).
Controls in detail
Lighting
USA only:
By default, the daytime running lamp mode
is deactivated. Activate the daytime
running lamp mode using the control
system, see “Setting daytime running lamp
mode (USA only)” (컄 page 135).
When the engine is running, and you turn
the exterior lamp switch to position C
or B, the manual headlamp mode has
priority over the daytime running lamp
mode.
The corresponding exterior lamps switch
on (컄 page 106).
Locator lighting and night security
illumination
The locator lighting and the night security
illumination are described in the “Control
system” section, see “Setting locator lighting” (컄 page 135) and “Setting night security illumination” (컄 page 136).
Fog lamps
Warning!
Front fog lamps
G
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
only switch from position U to B with
the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Switching from U to B will briefly
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
may result in an accident.
왘
Switch on the low beam headlamps
(컄 page 106).
왘
Pull out the exterior lamp switch to first
stop.
The front fog lamps switch on.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
exterior lamp switch comes on.
왘
Push in the exterior lamp switch.
The front fog lamps switch off.
i Fog lamps will operate with the parking
lamps and/or the low beam headlamps on. Fog
lamps should only be used in conjunction with
low beam headlamps. Consult your State or
Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding allowable lamp operation.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
exterior lamp switch goes out.
i Fog lamps cannot be switched on with the
exterior lamp switch in position U. For
switching on the fog lamps, turn the exterior
lamp switch to position B first.
109
Controls in detail
Lighting
Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only)
왘
Switch on the low beam headlamps
(컄 page 106).
왘
Combination switch
High beam
왘
Pull out the exterior lamp switch to
second stop.
USA only: Turn the exterior lamp switch
to position B or U
(컄 page 106).
왘
The front fog lamps and rear fog lamp
switch on.
Canada only: Turn the exterior lamp
switch to position B (컄 page 106).
왘
Push the combination switch in
direction of arrow 1 to switch on the
high beam.
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
exterior lamp switch comes on.
왘
The high beam headlamp indicator
lamp A in the instrument cluster
comes on (컄 page 29).
Push in the exterior lamp switch to first
stop.
The rear fog lamp switches off.
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
exterior lamp switch goes out.
1 High beam
2 High beam flasher
왘
The front fog lamps remain lit.
Pull the combination switch in direction
of arrow 2 to its original position to
switch off the high beam.
The high beam headlamp indicator
lamp A in the instrument cluster
goes out.
High beam flasher
왘
110
Pull the combination switch briefly in
direction of arrow 2.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher can be
switched on at all times, even with the
SmartKey removed from the starter
switch.
The hazard warning flasher switches on
automatically when an air bag deploys.
The hazard warning flasher switch is
located on the upper part of the center
console.
Switching on hazard warning flasher
Switching off hazard warning flasher
왘
Press hazard warning flasher
switch 1.
왘
All turn signals are flashing.
i If the hazard warning flasher has been
i With the hazard warning flasher activated
and the combination switch set for either left or
right turn, only the respective turn signals will
operate when the ignition is switched on.
Press hazard warning flasher switch 1
again.
activated automatically, press hazard warning
flasher switch 1 once to switch it off.
1 Hazard warning flasher switch
111
Controls in detail
Lighting
Interior lighting
The controls are located in the overhead
control panel.
Automatic control
Activating
i The interior lighting is factory-set to
왘
automatic mode.
Deactivating
왘
Slide switch 4 to the right.
The interior lighting and the entry/exit
lamps remain switched off in darkness,
even when you
1 Left-hand reading lamp on/off
2 Right-hand reading lamp on/off
3 Interior lighting on/off
4 Automatic control on/off
! An interior lamp switched on manually does
not go out automatically.
Leaving an interior lamp switch in the ON position for extended periods of time with the engine
turned off could result in a discharged battery.
112
앫
unlock the vehicle
앫
open a door
앫
remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
Slide switch 4 to the left.
Interior lamps switches on in darkness
when you
앫
unlock the vehicle
앫
open a door
앫
remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
In addition, the entry/exit lamps in the
door come on when you open a door.
The interior lighting switches off automatically following a preset time delay.
For more information, see “Setting interior lighting delayed switch-off”
(컄 page 137).
i If a door remains open, the interior lamps
switch off automatically after approximately
5 minutes.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Manual control
Courtesy lighting
Trunk lamp
Switching interior lighting on
For better orientation in the dark, courtesy
lamps will illuminate the interior of your
vehicle.
The trunk lamp switches on if the trunk is
opened.
왘
Press switch 3.
The interior lighting switches on.
When you open a door:
Switching interior lighting off
앫
왘
If the SmartKey is in starter switch
position 1:
Press switch 3 again.
The interior lighting switches off.
앫
the driver’s and passenger’s footwells
i The center console is lit from the interior
The reading lamps are integrated into the
interior rear view mirror.
rear view mirror.
Press reading lamp switch 1 or 2 to
switch on the desired reading lamp.
왘
Press reading lamp switch 1 or 2
again to switch off the respective
reading lamp.
i The setting selected for the interior lighting
is used for the trunk lighting as well.
the center console
Reading lamps
왘
If you leave the trunk open for an extended
period of time, the trunk lamp will switch
off automatically after approximately
10 minutes.
113
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
For a full view illustration of the instrument
cluster, see “Instrument cluster”
(컄 page 28).
Opening a door will activate the instrument
cluster only for about 30 seconds.
Adjusting instrument cluster
illumination
You can change the instrument cluster
settings in the Instrument cluster submenu
of the control system (컄 page 132).
Use the reset button 1 to adjust the illumination brightness for the instrument
cluster and the switches on the center
console.
Warning!
G
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction
display is inoperative.
1 Reset button
The instrument cluster is activated when
you
앫
open a door
앫
switch on the ignition
앫
press the reset button 1
앫
switch on exterior lamps
114
As a result, you will not be able to see information about your driving conditions, such
as speed or outside temperature, warning/indicator lamps, malfunction/warning
messages or the failure of any systems.
Driving characteristics may be impaired.
If you must continue to drive, do so with
added caution. Visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
i The instrument cluster illumination is
dimmed or brightened to suit ambient light
conditions.
To brighten illumination
왘
Turn the reset button 1 clockwise.
The instrument cluster illumination will
brighten.
To dim illumination
왘
Turn the reset button 1 counterclockwise.
The instrument cluster illumination will
dim.
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
! Excessive coolant temperature triggers the
Coolant temperature gauge
Warning!
G
앫
Driving when your engine is overheated
can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously
burned.
앫
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns which can occur
just by opening the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it.
coolant temperature warning lamp (컄 page 306)
and a warning in the multifunction display
(컄 page 335).
The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C). Doing so
may cause serious engine damage which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
i During severe operating conditions, e.g.
stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may
rise close to 248°F (120°C).
Resetting trip odometer
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the standard display in
the multifunction display (컄 page 117).
왘
Press button k or j until the
trip odometer appears in the right
multifunction display.
왘
Press and hold the reset button 1
(컄 page 114) until the trip odometer is
reset.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from
other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of
the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle
until the engine has cooled down.
115
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Tachometer
The red marking on the tachometer
(컄 page 29) denotes excessive engine
speed.
! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds, as
it may result in serious engine damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply
is interrupted if the engine is operated
within the red marking.
Outside temperature indicator
Warning!
G
The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
The outside temperature is displayed in
the left or right multifunction display
(컄 page 117), depending on the setting for
the standard display (컄 page 132).
116
The temperature sensor is located in the
front bumper area. Due to its location, the
sensor can be affected by road or engine
heat during idling or slow driving. Therefore, the accuracy of the displayed temperature can only be verified by comparison to
a thermometer placed next the sensor, not
by comparison to external displays, e.g.
bank signs, etc.
When moving the vehicle into colder ambient temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
garage), you will notice a delay before the
lower temperature is displayed.
A delay also occurs when ambient temperatures rise. This prevents inaccurate temperature indications caused by heat
radiated from the engine during idling or
slow driving.
Controls in detail
Control system
왔 Control system
The control system is activated as soon as
the SmartKey in the starter switch is
turned to position 1. The control system
enables you to
앫
call up information about your vehicle
앫
change vehicle settings
For example, you can use the control system to find out when your vehicle is next
due for service, to set the language for
messages in the instrument cluster
display, and much more.
Warning!
G
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving.
For your safety and the safety of others, selecting features through the multifunction
steering wheel should only be done by the
driver when traffic and road conditions
permit it to be done safely.
Multifunction display
The multifunction display consists of the
display fields in the speedometer and the
tachometer. In its default state, the left
display field shows the outside temperature and main odometer, while the trip
odometer and the clock appears in the
right display field. This default setting is
referred to as the standard display.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
The control system relays information to
the multifunction display.
Standard display
1 Main odometer
2 Outside temperature (컄 page 132)
3 Current gear selector lever
position/gear range
4 Trip odometer
5 Automatic transmission shift program
mode
6 Clock
117
Controls in detail
Control system
Multifunction steering wheel
The displays in the multifunction display
and the settings in the control system are
controlled by the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel (컄 page 30).
1 Left multifunction display in the
speedometer
2 Right multifunction display in the
tachometer
Operating the control system
3 Selecting the submenu or setting the
volume:
Press button
æ up/to increase
ç down/to decrease
4 Telephone:
Press button
í to take a call
to dial
to redial
ì to end a call
to reject an incoming call
118
5 Menu systems:
Press button
è for next menu
ÿ for previous menu
6 Moving within a menu:
Press button
j for next display
k for previous display
Controls in detail
Control system
Depending on the selected menu, pressing
the buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel will alter what appears in the
multifunction display.
The information available in the multifunction display is arranged in menus, each
containing a number of functions or
submenus.
The individual functions are then found
within the relevant menu (radio or CD operations under AUDIO, for example). These
functions serve to call up relevant information or to customize the settings for your
vehicle.
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the
functions within each menu, as being
arranged in a circular pattern.
앫
앫
If you press button è or ÿ
repeatedly, you will pass through each
menu one after the other.
If you press button k or j
repeatedly, you will pass through each
function display, one after the other, in
the current menu.
In the Settings menu, instead of functions
you will find a number of submenus for
calling up and changing settings. For
instructions on using these submenus, see
“Settings menu” (컄 page 129).
The number of menus available in the system depends on which optional equipment
is installed in your vehicle.
The menus are described on the following
pages.
119
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus
120
This is what you will see when you scroll
through the menus.
The table on the next page provides an
overview of the individual menus.
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus, submenus and functions
Menu 1
Menu 2
Menu 3
Menu 4
Standard display 722 Edition
AUDIO
Vehicle status
Settings
message memory2
(컄 page 122)
(컄 page 126) (컄 page 128)
Commands/submenus
1
1
2
(컄 page 123)
Menu 5
(컄 page 129)
Menu 6
Menu 7
Trip computer
Telephone
(컄 page 139)
(컄 page 141)
Digital speedome- Engine oil temter/Outside tem- perature
perature
Selecting
Calling up vehicle
Resetting to facradio station malfunction, warn- tory settings
ing and system status messages
stored in memory
Fuel consumption Loading
statistics since start phone book
Calling up mainte- Vehicle supply
nance service
voltage
display
Operating the
CD player
Instrument cluster submenu
Fuel consumption
statistics since the
last reset
Time submenu
Resetting fuel consumption statistics
Checking tire
RACETIMER
inflation pressure
Overall analysis
Lighting submenu Distance to empty
Lap analysis
Vehicle submenu
Searching for
name in
phone book
Only Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren 722 Edition.
The Vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored.
i The headings used in the menus table are
designed to facilitate navigation within the system and are not necessarily identical to those
shown in the control system displays. The first
function displayed in each menu will automatically show you which part of the system
you are in.
121
Controls in detail
Control system
Standard display menu
The left multifunction display shows the
outside temperature and main odometer,
while the trip odometer and the clock appears in the right multifunction display.
This is the standard display.
왘
You can modify the standard display menu.
Instead of outside temperature 2, you
can choose the digital speedometer to be
displayed in the left multifunction display
by changing the setting in the Select display function of the Inst. cluster submenu (컄 page 132).
왘
Standard display
1 Main odometer
2 Outside temperature
3 Current gear selector lever
position/gear range
4 Trip odometer
5 Automatic transmission shift program
mode
6 Clock
122
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the standard display in
the multifunction display.
Press button k or j to select
the functions in the standard display
menu.
The following functions are available:
Function
Page
Calling up digital speedometer or 122
outside temperature
Calling up maintenance service
display
292
Checking tire inflation pressure
268
Display digital speedometer or outside
temperature
i If you have selected the digital speedometer
for the standard display (컄 page 132), select the
outside temperature display here.
왘
Press button k or j until the
digital speedometer or the outside
temperature appears in the right multifunction display.
Controls in detail
Control system
722 Edition menu1
i If the engine reaches the overspeed range
The main screen of the 722 Edition menu
shows you the gear currently engaged as
well as the engine oil temperature.
and you are driving in the manual shift
program MAN, the menu will be shown in red. In
addition, you will see up next to gear
indicator 2 as a reminder to upshift.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the 722 Edition menu.
Use buttons k or j to select the following functions in the 722 Edition menu:
Function
Page
Vehicle supply voltage
123
RACETIMER
124
Overall analysis
126
Lap analysis
126
Vehicle supply voltage
1 Engine oil temperature
2 Gear indicator
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the 722 Edition menu.
왘
Press button j repeatedly until you
see the vehicle supply voltage.
i The engine oil temperature symbol flashes if
the engine oil temperature has not yet reached
80°C. During this time, avoid driving at full
engine speed.
1 Vehicle supply voltage
2 Gear indicator
1
Only Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren 722 Edition.
123
Controls in detail
Control system
Starting the RACETIMER
RACETIMER
Warning!
The RACETIMER feature is only for use on
roads and in conditions where high speed
driving is permitted. Racing on public roads
is prohibited under all circumstances and
the driver is and must always remain
responsible for following posted speed
limits.
The RACETIMER allows you to time and
save driving stretches in hours, minutes
and seconds.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the 722 Edition menu.
왘
Press button j repeatedly until you
see the RACETIMER.
124
왘
G
Press button æ.
The timer starts.
Displaying intermediate time
1 Lap
2 RACETIMER
3 Gear indicator
왘
The intermediate time is shown for
5 seconds.
i You can start the RACETIMER when the
engine is running or the starter switch is in
position 2 (컄 page 40).
i While the RACETIMER is being displayed,
you cannot adjust the volume using
buttons æ or ç.
Press button ç while the timer is
running.
Stopping the RACETIMER
왘
Press button æ.
The timer stops.
i When you stop the vehicle and turn the
SmartKey to position 1 (컄 page 40), the RACETIMER stops timing. Timing is resumed when you
switch the ignition back on (컄 page 40) or
restart the engine (컄 page 47) and then press
the æ button.
Controls in detail
Control system
Saving lap time and starting a new lap
Deleting all laps
i You can save up to nine laps.
i It is not possible to delete a single saved lap.
왘
왘
Press button ç while the timer is
running.
The intermediate time will be shown for
5 seconds.
왘
Press button ç within the next
5 seconds.
The intermediate time shown will be
saved as a lap time.
The RACETIMER begins timing the new
lap. The new lap begins to be timed as
soon as the intermediate time is called
up.
Press button æ while the timer is
running.
The timer stops.
1 Best lap time
2 Lap number
3 RACETIMER
4 Gear indicator
Resetting current lap
왘
Press button æ while the timer is
running.
The timer stops.
왘
왘
Press the reset button twice
(컄 page 29).
왘
Press button æ.
The timer starts. The saved laps are
deleted.
i When you switch off the engine, the
RACETIMER will be reset to“0” after 30 seconds.
All laps are deleted.
Press button ç.
The lap time is reset to “0”.
125
Controls in detail
Control system
Overall analysis
Lap analysis
i These functions are only available if you
i These functions are only available if you
have saved at least one lap and have stopped the
RACETIMER.
have saved at least two laps and have stopped
the RACETIMER.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the 722 Edition menu.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the 722 Edition menu.
왘
Press button j repeatedly until you
see the overall analysis.
왘
Press button j repeatedly until you
see the lap analysis.
1 Overall analysis of RACETIMER
2 Overall driving time
3 Maximum speed
4 Average speed
5 Overall distance driven
1 Lap number
2 Lap time
3 Maximum speed
4 Average speed during lap
5 Lap length
왘
Press button j or k to see other
lap analyses.
i Each lap is shown in its own submenu. The
fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol 1.
126
AUDIO menu
The functions in the AUDIO menu operate
the audio equipment which you currently
have turned on.
If no audio equipment is currently turned
on, the message AUDIO OFF appears in the
multifunction display.
The following functions are available:
Function
Page
Selecting radio station
127
Operating CD player
127
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting radio station
왘
왘
Turn on the radio (컄 page 148).
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the currently tuned station in the right multifunction display.
왘
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired station is found.
The type of search depends on the
setting for the station tuning
(컄 page 138):
앫
Memory: the next stored station is
selected (SP)
앫
Station search
Operating the CD player
왘
Turn on the radio and select the
CD player (컄 page 158).
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the settings for the CD currently
being played are shown in the right
multifunction display.
i You can only store new stations using the
1 Station frequency
2 Wave band setting
3 Setting for station selection using
memory
corresponding feature on the radio
(컄 page 153).
You can also operate the radio in the usual
manner.
1 Current track
2 Current CD (for CD changer)
왘
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired track is selected.
127
Controls in detail
Control system
Vehicle status message memory menu
Use the vehicle status message memory
menu to scan malfunction and warning
messages that may be stored in the
system. Such messages appear in the
multifunction display and are based on
conditions or system status the vehicle’s
system has recorded.
The vehicle status message memory menu
only appears if there are any messages
stored.
Warning!
G
Malfunction and warning messages are only
indicated for certain systems and are intentionally not very detailed. The malfunction
and warning messages are simply a reminder with respect to the operation of certain
systems and do not replace the owner’s
and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain
the vehicle’s operating safety by having all
required maintenance and safety checks
128
performed on the vehicle and by bringing
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center to address the malfunction and
warning messages (컄 page 314).
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the vehicle status message
memory appears in the right multifunction display.
If the vehicle status message memory
menu does not appear, no messages
have been stored.
If conditions have occurred causing status
messages to be recorded, the number of
messages appears in the right multifunction display:
1 Number of recorded status messages
왘
Press button k or j.
The stored messages will now be
displayed in the order in which they
have occurred. For malfunction and
warning messages, see “Vehicle status
messages in the multifunction display”
(컄 page 314).
Should the vehicle’s system record any
conditions while driving, the number of
messages will reappear in the multifunction display when the SmartKey in the
starter switch is turned to position 0 or
removed from the starter switch.
i The vehicle status message memory will be
cleared when you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2. You will then only
see high-priority messages (컄 page 314).
Controls in detail
Control system
Resetting to factory settings
Settings menu
In the Settings menu there are two
functions:
앫
앫
The function Press reset button for
3 seconds with which you can reset
most the settings to those set at the
factory.
You can reset the functions of most submenus to the factory settings.
For safety, the Light circuit Headlamp
mode submenu in the Lighting menu can
be reset with the vehicle at standstill only.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the Settings... menu appears in
the multifunction display.
왘
Press the reset button in the instrument cluster (컄 page 114) for approximately 3 seconds.
A collection of submenus with which
you can make individual settings for
your vehicle.
왘
Press the reset button again.
The functions of most the submenus
will reset to factory settings.
i The settings you have changed will not be reset unless you confirm the action by pressing the
reset button a second time. After approximately
5 seconds, the Settings... menu reappears
in the multifunction display.
The following settings and submenus are
available:
Function
Page
Resetting to factory settings
129
Submenus in the Settings menu 130
Instrument cluster submenu
132
Time submenu
133
Lighting submenu
134
Vehicle submenu
138
In the right multifunction display you
will see the request to press the reset
button again to confirm.
129
Controls in detail
Control system
Submenus in the Settings menu
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the Settings... menu appears in
the multifunction display.
왘
Press button j.
In the right multifunction display you
see the collection of submenus.
130
왘
Press button ç.
The selection marker moves to the next
submenu.
왘
Scroll down with button ç, scroll up
with button æ.
왘
With the selection marker on the desired submenu, use button j to
access the individual functions within
that submenu.
왘
Once within the submenu use button
j to move to the next function or
button k to move to the previous
function within that submenu.
왘
Use button æ or ç to change the
settings of the respective function.
Controls in detail
Control system
The table below shows what settings can
be changed within the various menus.
Detailed instructions on making individual
settings can be found on the following
pages.
Instrument cluster
Time
Lighting
Vehicle
(컄 page 132)
(컄 page 133)
(컄 page 134)
(컄 page 138)
Selecting digital speedometer
display mode
Setting time (hours)
Setting daytime running lamp
mode (USA only)
Setting station selection mode
(radio)
Selecting standard display
Setting time (minutes)
Setting locator lighting
Setting automatic locking
Selecting language
Setting night security illumination (Headlamps delayed
switch-off)
Setting interior lighting delayed
switch-off
131
Controls in detail
Control system
Instrument cluster submenu
Access the Inst. cluster submenu via
the Settings menu. Use the Inst. cluster submenu to change the instrument
cluster display settings.
Selecting the digital speedometer
display
왘
Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Inst. cluster
submenu.
왘
Function
Page
Selecting the speedometer
display
132
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left
multifunction display:
Digital speedometer.
Selecting the standard display
132
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Selecting the language
133
The following functions are available:
Selecting the standard display
왘
Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Inst. cluster
submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left
multifunction display: Select display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
왘
Press button æ or ç to set the
speedometer units to Kilometers or
Miles.
Press button æ or ç to select
the desired setting.
The selected display appears in the left
multifunction display.
The option not selected will appear in
the right multifunction display when
scrolling through the standard display
(컄 page 122).
132
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting the language
Available languages:
Time submenu
왘
앫
German
앫
English
Access the Time submenu via the Settings
menu. Use the Time submenu to change
the time settings.
앫
French
앫
Italian
앫
Spanish
Function
Page
앫
Dutch
Setting time (hours)
134
앫
Swedish
Setting time (minutes)
134
앫
Danish
앫
Turkish
앫
Portuguese
왘
Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Inst. cluster
submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left
multifunction display: Language.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
The following functions are available:
Press button æ or ç to select
the language to be used for the multifunction display messages.
133
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting time (hours)
Setting time (minutes)
Lighting submenu
왘
Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Time submenu.
왘
Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Time submenu.
Access the Lighting submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Lighting sub-
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until this message appears in the left
multifunction display: Set time Hour.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until this message appears in the left
multifunction display: Set time
Minute(s).
menu to change the lamp and lighting
settings on your vehicle.
The selection marker is on the hour
setting.
왘
Press button æ or ç to set the
hour.
134
The selection marker is on the minute
setting.
왘
Press button æ or ç to set the
minutes.
The following functions are available:
Function
Page
Setting daytime running lamp
mode (USA only)
135
Setting locator lighting
135
Setting night security illumination (Headlamps delayed
switch-off)
136
Setting interior lighting delayed
switch-off
137
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting daytime running lamp mode
(USA only)
i This function is not available in countries
where the daytime running lamp mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.
왘
왘
Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Lighting submenu.
With daytime running lamp mode activated
and the exterior lamp switch in
position M or U, the low beam
headlamps are switched on when the
engine is running.
In low ambient light conditions the
following lamps will switch on additionally:
앫
Parking lamps
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left
multifunction display: Light circuit
Headlamp mode.
앫
Tail lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
For more information on the daytime
running lamp mode, see “Daytime running
lamp mode” (컄 page 108).
Setting locator lighting
With the locator lighting feature activated
and the exterior lamp switch in
position U, the following lamps will
switch on during darkness when the
vehicle is unlocked with the SmartKey:
앫
Parking lamps
앫
Tail lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
앫
Front fog lamps
The locator lighting switches off when the
driver’s door is opened.
If you do not open a door after unlocking
i If you turn the exterior lamp switch to anoth- the vehicle with the SmartKey the lamps
er position, the corresponding lamp(s) will
switch on.
왘
Press button æ or ç to select
manual operation (Manual) or daytime
running lamp mode (Constant)
activated.
For safety reasons, resetting the Lighting submenu to factory settings (컄 page 129) will not
reset the daytime running lamp mode.
will switch off automatically after approximately 40 seconds.
The following message appears in the right multifunction display: Cannot be fully reset to
factory settings when driving.
135
Controls in detail
Control system
왘
Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Lighting
submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left
multifunction display:
Locator lighting.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press button æ or ç to switch
the locator lighting function On.
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position U when exiting the vehicle
(컄 page 106).
The locator lighting feature is
activated.
136
Setting night security illumination
(Headlamps delayed switch-off)
Use this function to set whether you would
like the exterior lamps to remain on for
15 seconds during darkness after exiting
the vehicle and closing the doors.
왘
Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Lighting submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left
multifunction display:
Headlamps delayed switch-off.
With the delayed shut-off feature activated
and the exterior lamp switch in
position U before the engine is turned
off, the following lamps will switch on
when the engine is turned off:
앫
Parking lamps
앫
Tail lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
앫
Front fog lamps
If after turning off the engine you do not
open a door or do not close an opened
door, the lamps will automatically switch
off after 60 seconds.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press button æ or ç to switch
the headlamps delayed shut-off feature
On or Off.
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position U before turning off the
engine (컄 page 106).
The headlamps delayed switch-off
feature is activated.
Controls in detail
Control system
You can temporarily deactivate the
delayed switch-off feature:
Setting interior lighting delayed
switch-off
왘
Use this function to set whether or not the
interior lighting to remain lit during darkness for approximately 10 seconds after
the SmartKey is removed from the starter
switch.
왘
Before leaving the vehicle turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0.
Then turn it to position 2 and back
to 0.
The delayed switch-off feature is deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as you
reinsert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
왘
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left
multifunction display: Int. lighting
delayed switch-off.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Lighting
submenu.
왘
Press button æ or ç to switch
the function On or Off.
137
Controls in detail
Control system
Vehicle submenu
Setting radio station selection mode
Access the Vehicle submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu
to make general vehicle settings.
Use the Press button in audio mode
function to select the manual or memory
station selection mode for the radio
(컄 page 127).
The following functions are available:
Function
Page
Setting station selection mode
(radio)
138
Setting automatic locking
139
왘
Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Vehicle submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left
multifunction display: Press button in
audio mode.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
138
왘
Press button æ or ç to select
the desired station selection mode.
You can select:
앫
Memory, selects next stored station
앫
Station search, selects next
receivable station
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting automatic locking
Use this function to activate or deactivate
the automatic central locking. With the
automatic central locking system
activated, the vehicle is centrally locked at
vehicle speeds of approximately
9 mph (15 km/h).
Fuel consumption statistics since start
Trip computer menu
Use the trip computer menu to call up
statistical data on your vehicle.
The following information is available:
Function
Page
왘
Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Vehicle submenu.
Fuel consumption statistics since 139
start
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see the following message in
the left multifunction display:
Automatic door lock.
Fuel consumption statistics since 140
last reset
Resetting fuel consumption
statistics
140
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Distance to empty
140
i The last function called up will reappear the
next time you enter the trip computer menu.
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
trip computer menu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see the following message in
the left multifunction display: From
start.
1 Distance driven since start
2 Average speed since start
3 Time elapsed since start
4 Average fuel consumption since start
i All statistics stored since the last engine
왘
Press button æ or ç to switch
Automatic door lock On or Off.
start will be reset approximately 4 hours after
the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to
position 0 or removed from the starter switch.
Resetting will not occur if you turn the SmartKey
back to position 1 or 2 within this time period.
139
Controls in detail
Control system
Fuel consumption since last reset
Resetting fuel consumption statistics
Distance to empty
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
trip computer menu.
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
trip computer menu.
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
trip computer menu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see the following message in
the left multifunction display:
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see the reading that you want
to reset in the left multifunction
display.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left
multifunction display: Range.
왘
Press and hold the reset button in the
instrument cluster (컄 page 114) until
the value is reset to 0.
From reset.
i The fuel consumption statistics reset auto-
The calculated remaining driving range
based on the current fuel tank level appears in the right multifunction display.
Your driving style will affect the
accuracy of the calculated range.
matically to 0 when either of the following values
is exceeded:
1 Distance driven since last reset
2 Average speed since last reset
3 Time elapsed since last reset
4 Average fuel consumption since last
reset
앫
distance covered: 100000 miles
앫
time elapsed: 10000 hours
i If only very little fuel is left in the tank, a
vehicle at the fuel pump is shown instead of the
range.
140
Controls in detail
Control system
TEL menu
Warning!
G
A driver’s attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a telephone call. If you choose to use the telephone while driving, please use the
hands-free device and only use the telephone when weather, road, and traffic conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a mobile telephone while driving a
vehicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second.
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury.
You can use the functions in the TEL menu
to operate your telephone, provided it is
connected to a hands-free system and
switched on.
왘
Switch on the telephone and the radio.
왘
Press button ÿ or è on the
steering wheel repeatedly until you see
the TEL menu in the left multifunction
display.
Which messages will appear in the right
multifunction display field depends on
whether your telephone is switched on or
off:
앫
If the telephone is off, the message in
the multifunction display is: TEL OFF.
앫
If the telephone is on:
The telephone will then search for a
network. During this time the right
multifunction display is empty.
As soon as the telephone has found a
network, READY is indicated in the right
multifunction display.
1 Signal strength
This standby message indicates that your
telephone is ready for use and you can
operate it using the control system.
141
Controls in detail
Control system
You may carry out the following functions:
Function
Page
Answering a call
142
Ending a call
142
Dialling a number from the
phone book
143
Redialing
144
Answering a call
Ending a call
When your telephone is ready to receive
calls, you can answer a call at any time. In
the right multifunction display you will then
see the message, or if available, the caller
ID (name and number):
왘
왘
Press button í.
You have answered the call. In the right
multifunction display you see the
length of the call.
142
Press button ì.
You have ended the call. In the right
multifunction display you will again see
the standby message.
Controls in detail
Control system
Dialing a number from the phone book
왘
If your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you may select and dial a number from the
phone book at any time.
왘
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the TEL menu in the left
multifunction display.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
right multifunction display.
앫
If the connection is successful and this
feature is supported by your network
provider, the name of the party (if
stored in your phone book) you are
calling and the duration of the call will
appear in the multifunction display.
앫
If no connection is made, the control
system stores the dialed number in the
redial memory.
The stored names are displayed in
ascending or descending alphabetical
order.
In the right multifunction display you
will see the standby message.
i If you press and hold j or k for longer than 1 second, the system scrolls rapidly
through the list of names until you release the
button again.
Press button j or k.
Cancel the quick search mode by pressing ì.
The control system reads the phone
book which is stored in the telephone.
This may take several minutes. In the
right multifunction display you will see
this message Please wait.
왘
Press button í.
The system dials the selected phone
number.
When the message Please wait disappears, the phone book has been
loaded.
143
Controls in detail
Control system
Redialing
The control system stores the most recently dialed phone numbers. This eliminates
the need to search through your entire
phone book.
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the TEL menu in the left
multifunction display.
In the right multifunction display you
will see the standby message.
144
왘
Press button í.
In the right multifunction display you
see the first number in the redial
memory.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
right multifunction display.
왘
Press button í.
The control system dials the selected
phone number.
Controls in detail
Audio system
왔 Audio system
Audio and telephone, operation
Operating safety
These instructions are intended to help
you become familiar with your
Mercedes-Benz audio system. They contain useful tips and a detailed description
of the user functions.
Warning!
G
In order to avoid distraction which could
lead to an accident, the driver should enter
system settings with the vehicle at a standstill and operate the system only when road
and traffic conditions permit. Always pay full
attention to traffic conditions first before
operating system controls while driving.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your car is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
14 m) every second.
Warning!
Location of the audio system
G
The audio system control panel is located
behind a cover in the upper part of the center console.
Any alterations made to electronic components can cause malfunctions.
The radio, amplifier, CD changer and
telephone are interconnected. When one of
the components is not operational or has
not been removed/replaced properly, the
function of other components may be impaired.
This condition might seriously impair the
operating safety of your vehicle.
We recommend that you have any service
work on electronic components carried out
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
1 Cover
왘
Briefly press on the lower part of
cover 1.
The cover opens automatically.
145
Controls in detail
Audio system
Operating and display elements
146
Controls in detail
Audio system
Item
Page
Item
Page
1 CD mode selector
158
5 Alpha-numeric keypad
2 Manual tuning
(radio)
151
Band selection,
station buttons (radio)
151
CD selection (CD)
160
Telephone number entry,
retrieving speed dialing
memory (telephone)
163
Fast forward/reverse
(cassette, CD)
Speed dialing memory
(telephone)
3 Radio mode selector
4 Display panel
Cassette compartment
behind display panel
156, 160
165
151
Page
9 Function keys
6 Scanning
(radio, cassette, CD)
153,
156,
160
7 Function button
152
8 Light-emitting diode
Item
a Cassette eject
155
b Cassette mode selector
154
c Telephone mode selector
162
d Seek tuning (radio)
152
Track search (cassette, CD)
155,
160
Speed dialing memory
(telephone)
165
e On/off
148
Volume
148
147
Controls in detail
Audio system
Button and soft key operation
In these instructions, the alpha-numeric
keypad (right side of radio panel) and the
function buttons (left side of radio panel)
are referred to as “buttons”. The four keys
below the display panel are referred to as
“soft keys”.
! Do not press directly on the display face.
Otherwise the display will be damaged.
Operation
Adjusting the volume
왘
Switching on/off
Switching on:
왘
Turn SmartKey in starter switch to
position 1 or 2.
or
왘
Turn control knob a.
The volume will increase or decrease
depending on the direction turned.
i The volume setting can be selected
separately for the telephone and audio system.
Adjusting audio functions
Press control knob a.
Press the AUD key to call up the bass,
i If the radio is switched on without the Smart- treble, balance and fader functions in the
Key in the starter switch, it will automatically
switch off again after approximately 30 minutes.
Switching off:
왘
Remove SmartKey from starter switch.
or
왘
148
Press control knob a.
various operating modes. Settings for bass
and treble are stored separately for the AM
and FM frequency bands, cassette mode
and CD mode.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Bass
Treble
Fader
왘
왘
i Your vehicle may or may not have the fader
왘
Regardless of operating mode, press
the AUD key repeatedly until BASS
appears on the display.
Press + or - key to increase or
decrease level.
or
왘
왘
Regardless of operating mode, press
the AUD key repeatedly until TREBLE
appears on the display.
function, depending on the vehicle equipment
and model.
왘
Regardless of operating mode, press
the AUD key repeatedly until FADER
appears on the display.
왘
Press F or R key to shift sound accordingly to the front or rear speakers.
Press + or - key to increase or
decrease level.
or
Press both + and - keys simultaneously
to reset the Bass to its center (flat)
level.
왘
Press both + and - keys simultaneously
to reset the Treble to its center (flat)
level.
or
왘
Press both F and R keys simultaneously
to reset the Fader to its center level.
149
Controls in detail
Audio system
Balance
왘
Regardless of operating mode, press
the AUD key repeatedly until BALANCE
appears on the display.
Returning audio functions to factory
settings
Press L or R key to shift sound accordingly to the left or right speakers.
or
왘
Press both L and R keys simultaneously
to reset the Balance to its center level.
150
왘
Regardless of operating mode, press
the AUD key.
The sound settings menu appears on
the display.
왘
왘
Audio system sound selection (EXT)*
왘
Press the EXT key.
왘
Press one of the function keys.
Regardless of operating mode, press
and hold AUD key longer than
2 seconds. RESET will appear in the
display.
All settings for bass, treble and balance
are returned to the center level and the
volume is set to a predefined level.
Controls in detail
Audio system
You can select from among the
following settings:
Radio operation
앫
DRV: The tone level is set to the
Selecting radio mode
Driver position; sound is directed
toward the passengers.
왘
Press b button.
왘
You can now receive radio stations
over the analog FM, AM or WB station
frequencies.
앫
SP: The tone level is set for Speech,
optimizing the sound for the spoken
word.
앫
앫
AMB: The tone level is set for
Analog station frequencies
Ambience, producing a
three-dimensional sound.
Selecting the band
OFF: The audio system sound
selection is turned off.
Telephone muting
The radio will switch to telephone mode
when a call is incoming. The current audio
source is muted.
왘
Press FM, AM or WB key repeatedly
until desired band has been selected.
The FM, AM and WB frequency bands
are called up one after the other.
The frequency band currently selected
appears in the upper left-hand corner
of the display.
Selecting a station
The following options are available for
selecting a station:
You can select from among FM, AM or WB
frequency bands.
앫
Direct frequency band input
(컄 page 152)
Weather band (컄 page 154).
앫
Manual tuning (컄 page 152)
i FM frequency band:
앫
Automatic seek tuning (컄 page 152)
FM
87.7......107.9 MHz
앫
Scan tuning (컄 page 153)
AM frequency band:
MW (medium wave) 530......1710 KHz
앫
Preset buttons (컄 page 153)
앫
Automatic station memory (Autostore)
(컄 page 153)
151
Controls in detail
Audio system
Direct frequency input
Manual tuning
Automatic seek tuning
왘
Select the desired frequency band.
왘
Select the desired frequency band.
왘
Select the desired frequency band.
왘
Press “ button.
왘
왘
Press either the f or e button.
왘
Enter desired frequency using
buttons 4 to M.
Press and hold either the d or
c button until the desired
frequency is reached.
i You can only enter frequencies within the
respective waveband.
If a button is not pressed within 4 seconds, the
radio will return to the station last tuned to.
152
Step-by-step station tuning takes place
in ascending or descending order of
frequency. The first three tuning steps
will take place without muting. Afterwards, the radio will be muted and
high-speed tuning will take place until
the button is released.
The radio will tune to the next higher or
next lower receivable frequency.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Scan tuning
Manual station memory (Presets)
Automatic station memory (Autostore)
앫
Starting scan tuning
You can store ten AM and ten FM stations.
왘
앫
The Autostore memory function provides
an additional memory level. The station
memory for manually stored stations is not
overwritten.
Select desired frequency band.
Storing stations
왘
Tune in the desired station.
왘
Press and hold desired station
button 4 to M until a brief
signal tone is heard.
앫
Calling up Autostore memory level
왘
Briefly press the AS key.
AS is highlighted in the display.
왘
The radio finds the ten stations with
the strongest signals. These
stations are stored on the station
buttons 4 to M in order of
signal strength.
Press 2 button.
SC will appear in the display. The ra-
dio briefly tunes in all receivable
stations on the band selected. The
first scan cycle will tune in only the
stations with a strong signal. The
second scan cycle will tune in every
receivable station.
앫
The frequency is stored on the
selected station button.
The frequency band and station
button number are shown in the upper left-hand corner of the display.
Ending scan tuning
왘
Press 2 button or d, c,
f or e button.
SC disappears from the display.
앫
Retrieving a station from memory
왘
Press desired station button 4
to M.
앫
Retrieving a station from memory
왘
앫
Press desired station button 4
to M.
Leaving the Autostore memory level
왘
Press the AS key.
The highlighted AS in the display
disappears.
153
Controls in detail
Audio system
Weather band
Cassette operation
왘
Playing cassettes
왘
왘
왘
Select the desired weather band
station with buttons 4 to 7.
If a station cannot be tuned in, a scan
is automatically started.
왘
Press f or e button. The next
receivable weather band station is
tuned in.
154
! Do not press directly on the display face.
Otherwise the display will be damaged.
The display panel folds down and the
cassette compartment becomes
accessible.
Press the WB key.
The weather band station last selected
is tuned in.
Press 3 button.
Fold display panel back up and press
gently on the display panel frame to
lock it in place.
왘
Insert cassette into the cassette compartment until it engages and tap it
gently.
The cassette will be pulled in automatically. The system switches to cassette
mode. Side 1 will be played and SIDE 1
appears in the display. Side 1 is the
side of the cassette which is facing upward. The cassette deck will automatically detect the type of tape.
or
왘
If a cassette is already in the
mechanism, press j button.
Controls in detail
Audio system
i A warning signal will sound after 20 seconds
Cassette eject
if the display panel is left in the down position.
Fold display panel back up. If the display panel is
not closed, a warning signal will sound and the
radio will be muted.
왘
Track selection
Press eject button 3.
왘
Fold display panel back up and press
gently on the display panel frame to
lock it.
Otherwise the display will be damaged.
i The cassette will not be ejected when the
Press the TRK key.
The current track will be displayed as
SIDE 1 or SIDE 2.
You can switch sides at any time.
The side will be changed automatically
at the end of the tape.
Track search forward
The display folds down and the cassette is ejected. The system will switch
back to radio mode automatically.
! Do not press directly on the display face.
왘
Track search
system is switched off or switched to another
operating mode.
왘
Press f button.
SEEK FWD will appear in the display.
Track search will run the tape forward
to the start of the next track and switch
to Play.
i The beginning of a track can only be found if
there is pause of at least 4 seconds between
tracks.
155
Controls in detail
Audio system
Track search backward
Scanning
Fast forward/reverse
왘
앫
앫
Press e button.
Starting scan
Starting cassette fast forward mode
SEEK RWD will appear in the display.
Track search will run the tape backward to the start of the track currently
playing and switch to Play.
Stopping track search
왘
왘
Press d, c, f or
e button.
왘
Press 2 button.
SC will appear in the display.
The cassette will switch over to Play.
Each track on the cassette will be
played briefly in ascending order.
앫
FORWARD will appear in the display.
앫
Starting cassette fast reverse mode
왘
Stopping scan
왘
Press 2, d, c, f or
e button.
The system will switch to Play.
Press d button.
Press c button.
REWIND will appear in the display.
The cassette will automatically switch over
to the play mode at the end or beginning of
the tape.
앫
Stopping the cassette fast
forward/reverse mode
왘
Press d, c, f or
e button.
The cassette will switch over to the
play mode.
156
Controls in detail
Audio system
Dolby NR1 (noise reduction system)
Switching on
왘
Press the SB key.
To enable optimum sound reproduction of
cassettes recorded using Dolby B NR, the
Dolby NR system should be switched on.
SB is highlighted in the display.
i The Dolby NR function should be switched
Switching off
If the system does not detect a sound
signal, the cassette will automatically
fast forward to the next sound signal.
off when playing cassettes not recorded with
Dolby B NR.
왘
Skipping blank sections (skip blank)
Switching on the skip blank function
왘
Press the NR key.
NR is highlighted in the display.
Press the NR key.
The highlighted NR in the display
disappears.
Switching off the skip blank function
왘
Press the SB key.
The highlighted SB in the display
disappears.
1
DOLBY and the double-D symbol Ù are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
The Dolby noise reduction system is manufactured
under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
157
Controls in detail
Audio system
CD changer operation
General notes
Should excessively high temperatures occur while in CD mode, CD TEMP HIGH will
appear in the display and the CD will be
muted. The unit will then switch back to
the last operating mode used until the temperature has decreased to a safe operating
level.
Should excessively low temperatures
occur while in CD mode, CD TEMP LOW will
appear in the display, but the CD will
continue to play.
Handle CDs carefully to prevent interference during playback. Avoid fingerprints
and dust on CDs. Do not write on CDs or
apply any labels or other material to them.
158
Only use original CDs. Using copied CDs
may create problems during playback.
Clean CDs from time to time with a commercially available cleaning cloth. Do not
use solvents, anti-static sprays, etc. for
cleaning. Replace the CD in its case after
use. Protect CDs from heat and direct
sunlight.
i Use of CDs which do not meet this standard
may cause damage to the CD changer. Do not
play single-CDs (80 mm) with an adapter.
Your CD drive has been designed to play CDs
which correspond to the IEC 60908 standard.
If you insert thicker data carriers, e.g. ones that
have data on both sides (one side with DVD data,
the other side with audio data), they cannot be
ejected and will damage the drive.
Warning!
Only use CDs, which bear the label shown
and that conform to the compact disc
digital audio standard (IEC 60908). You
can therefore only use CDs with a
maximum thickness of 1.3 mm.
G
The CD changer is a Class 1 laser product.
There is a danger of invisible laser radiation
if the cover is opened or damaged.
Do not remove the cover. The CD changer
does not contain any parts which can be serviced by the user. For safety reasons, have
any service work which may be necessary
performed only by qualified personnel.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Operational readiness of CD changer
Loading/unloading a CD magazine
i CDs which have been inserted improperly or
are unreadable will not be played.
The CD changer is located in the trunk on
the left side.
You do not need to place CDs in all six CD trays.
The lowest tray is magazine slot number 1 and
the highest tray is magazine slot number 6.
왘
Push magazine into CD changer 2 in
direction of arrow and close sliding
door.
Playing CDs
1 CD changer
The CD changer can be operated from the
front control panel of the radio. A loaded
magazine must be installed to play CDs.
1 CD
2 CD changer
3 CD tray
4 CD magazine
왘
Slide changer door to the right and
press eject button g.
왘
Press i button.
CD will appear in the display.
The last CD listened to will then start playing at the point where it was switched off.
After the last track on a CD has finished,
the next CD is automatically played.
The CD magazine 4 will be ejected.
왘
Remove CD magazine and pull
CD tray 3 fully out.
왘
Place CD 1 in recess of CD tray, label
side up.
왘
Push CD tray into CD magazine in
direction of arrow.
159
Controls in detail
Audio system
Selecting CDs
Skipping tracks forward/backward
앫
Press f button.
The next track will be played.
왘
CD and the magazine slot number of the
selected CD appear in the display. The
number of the current track is
displayed after TRACK.
i The relative time of the track is shown on the
display during the search.
Press e button.
Scanning
If the track has been playing for
more than 10 seconds, it will revert
to the start of that track. If it has
been playing for less than
10 seconds, it will revert to the
preceding track.
앫
Starting scan
왘
Pressing the f or e button repeatedly will result in multiple tracks being
skipped.
If there is no CD in the selected magazine slot, NO CD appears on the display
with the corresponding slot number.
Each track on the current CD will be
played for approximately 8 seconds
in ascending order.
160
Fast forward
왘
Press and hold d button until
desired point has been reached.
Press 2 button.
SC appears in the display.
Fast forward/reverse
앫
Press and hold c button until
desired point has been reached.
Skipping tracks backward
왘
You can select from among the CDs in
the CD magazine using buttons 4
to 6.
Fast reverse
왘
Skipping tracks forward
왘
앫
앫
앫
Ending scan
왘
Press 2, d, c, f or
e button.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Random play
Repeat
The random play function (RDM) plays the
tracks on the current CD in random order.
The repeat function (RPT) repeats the current track.
앫
앫
Switching on random play
Track and time display
Switching on repeat
왘
왘
왘
Press the RDM key.
RDM is highlighted in the display.
앫
Switching off random play
왘
Press the RDM key.
The highlighted RDM in the display
disappears.
앫
왘
Press the T key.
Press the RPT key.
The total number of tracks and the total
playing time of the CD appear in the
display.
The highlighted RPT in the display
disappears.
The CD main menu appears again after
8 seconds.
Switching off repeat
왘
The number of the track being played
and the elapsed playing time appear in
the display.
Press the RPT key.
RPT is highlighted in the display.
Press the T key.
i The random play and repeat function cannot
be used simultaneously.
161
Controls in detail
Audio system
Telephone operation
Warning!
G
Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
attention to the road must always be
his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a
telephone call.
If you choose to use the telephone1 while
driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when road,
weather and traffic conditions permit. Some
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
mobile telephone while driving a vehicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second.
1
Observe all legal requirements.
162
Various car telephone functions and operating steps for the car telephone can be
performed and displayed via the audio
system.
Further operating instructions not covered
here can be found in the operating
instructions for the multifunction steering
wheel and the telephone.
Switching on the telephone
왘
왘
The telephone is unlocked. If you have
entered the wrong code, you must repeat the entering procedure with the
correct code.
Switching off the telephone
왘
Press h button.
If you have programmed an unlock
code for the telephone, you must enter
the code now.
왘
Enter the code using buttons 4
to M.
왘
If necessary, correct number entered
with the CLR key. Press key briefly to
delete the last digit entered; press key
and hold to delete the complete
number.
Press the OK key after entering correct
code.
Press h button repeatedly until
PHONE OFF appears in the display.
The receiving symbol in the display
disappears.
Adjusting the volume
왘
Turn control knob a during telephone operation.
The volume increases or decreases depending on the direction in which the
knob is turned.
i The volume can be adjusted separately for
the telephone and radio.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Placing a call
Entering a telephone number and
starting the dialing process
Phone book
The numbers stored in the phone book can
be called up either by name or number.
Searching and calling up phone book
entries by name
Calling up the phone book
왘
왘
Enter the desired telephone number
using buttons 4 to M.
The number can have up to 32 digits,
but only 13 of these are visible on the
display.
If necessary, correct number entered with
the CLR key.
왘
Press key briefly to delete the last digit
entered.
왘
Press key and hold to delete the
complete number.
왘
After correct telephone number has
been entered, press the SND key.
Press the ABC key.
The current name is highlighted on the
display.
왘
Press d, c, f or
e button.
왘
The stored entries are selected according to the alphabetical order of the
initial letter.
Switching between name search and
number search
왘
Press the ABC key.
or
The name search is called up.
왘
Press the NUM key.
The number search is called up.
Press either the f or e button.
The stored entries are selected in
increments of four.
or
왘
Press either the d or c button.
컄컄
or
163
Controls in detail
Audio system
컄컄왘
Press the desired numerical key 2
to 9.
Searching and selecting phone book
entries by number
The stored entries are selected according to the alphabetical order of the initial letters (e.g. for B -Brown, press
button 2 twice).
i Several characters and symbols cannot be
shown on the display for technical reasons. They
have been replaced with spaces.
왘
Once you have selected a number,
press the SND key.
Repeat dialing
왘
Press the NUM key.
The current number is marked in the
display.
왘
Press either the d or c button.
The stored entries are selected
according to numerical order.
or
왘
Press either the f or e button.
The stored entries are selected in
increments of 5 (e.g. Entry M5, Entry
M10, etc.).
164
Starting dialing process
If the number dialed is busy, you can again
place calls to the last ten telephone
numbers dialed using the repeat dialing
function.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Manual repeat dialing (redial)
Automatic repeat dialing (redial)
Speed dialing
If a call cannot be connected, press
the SND key.
왘
A maximum of two digits can be entered.
REDIAL will appear in the display and repeated attempts to place the call will be
made for the next 4 minutes.
왘
Press the SND key.
The last number dialed is shown in the
display.
왘
Select the desired telephone number
using d, c, f or
e button.
The abbreviation L and the number of
the entry are shown in the top line of
the display.
왘
When you have selected a number,
press the SND key.
The call will be made.
Selecting numbers directly from the
directory
왘
Enter previously selected 3-digit
(1-999) number of the entry using
number keys 4 to M.
왘
Press the RCL key.
The telephone number stored under
that entry will be dialed.
왘
Press the SND key.
The call will be made.
Input desired entry number using
number keys 4 to M.
If necessary, correct the last number
entered with the CLR key.
왘
Press the SND key.
The telephone number stored under
that entry will be dialed. The number, L
and the full entry number will be shown
in the display.
Quick-dialing
왘
Press one of the desired number
buttons 4 to M longer than
1 second.
The telephone number saved under
that number will be dialed.
! Please be aware that button 4 might already be reserved for an emergency call number.
165
Controls in detail
Audio system
Emergency calls “911”
The following describes how to dial a “911”
emergency call using the audio system
head unit when a Mercedes-Benz specified
mobile phone is inserted in the phone
cradle. Unless otherwise specified, the descriptions refer to the audio system head
unit.
Consult the separate telephone operating
instructions that came with your mobile
phone for information on how to place a
“911” emergency call on the mobile
phone.
Warning!
G
The “911” emergency call system is a public
service. Using it without due cause is a
criminal offense.
166
The following conditions must be met for a
“911” emergency call:
Placing a “911” emergency call using
audio head unit with the phone locked
앫
Telephone must be switched on.
왘
앫
The corresponding mobile communications network must be available.
i Emergency calls may not be possible with all
CODE? appears in the audio display.
왘
telephone networks or if certain network services and/or telephone functions are active. Check
with your local service providers.
If you cannot make an emergency call, you
will have to initiate rescue measures
yourself.
Press h button to switch to
telephone operation.
Press button 4 on the audio head
unit until 911 appears in the audio
display.
911 appears in the audio display while
the telephone establishes the connection.
왘
Wait until the emergency call center
answers, then describe the emergency.
Controls in detail
Audio system
Placing a “911” emergency call using
audio head unit with the phone
unlocked
왘
Press h button to switch to
telephone operation.
왘
Enter 911 using the number keypad on
the audio head unit.
왘
Press the SND key for dialing to begin.
The telephone establishes the
connection.
왘
Wait until the emergency call center
answers, then describe the emergency.
Accepting an incoming call
Accepting an incoming call in telephone
mode
With an incoming call, a ringing tone can
be heard and the caller’s telephone number, or the name under which this telephone number has been saved in the
telephone book, appears on the display. If
the caller’s number is not transmitted,
CALL will appear in the display.
왘
Press the SND key to accept call.
Accepting an incoming call in cassette,
CD or radio mode
If the telephone is activated in the background (receiving symbol S visible on display), the audio source is muted when a
call is received. The ringing tone is heard
and the caller’s telephone number or the
name under which this telephone number
has been saved in the telephone book appears on the display. If the caller’s number
is not transmitted, CALL appears in the
display.
왘
Press the SND key to accept the call.
167
Controls in detail
Audio system
Muting a call
Call waiting
It is possible to mute a call; the caller is
then no longer able to hear you.
If you receive another call during an
already active call, you can accept the
second call and switch between the two.
Mute on
왘
Press the MUT key.
Accepting a second call
왘
Mute off
왘
Press the SND key.
You are connected with the second
caller, the first call is muted.
Press the MUT key.
Terminating a call
Switching between the calls
왘
왘
Press the END key.
The current call is terminated.
Press the SND key.
Terminating the second call
왘
Press the END key.
The current call will be terminated. You
are connected with the muted call
again.
168
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
왔 Automatic transmission
For information on driving with an automatic transmission, see the “Getting
started” section (컄 page 47).
Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear
shifting process to your individual driving
style by continually adjusting the shift
points up or down. These shift point adjustments are performed based on current
operating and driving conditions.
If the operating conditions change, the
automatic transmission reacts by
adjusting its gear shift program.
i During the brief warm-up, transmission upshifting is delayed. This allows the catalytic converter to heat up more quickly to operating
temperature.
Warning!
G
Make sure that absolutely no objects are obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obstacles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
the footwell, make sure that the pedals still
have sufficient clearance.
Gear selector lever
The gear selector lever is located on the
lower part of the center console.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
the objects could get caught between the
pedals. You could then no longer brake or
accelerate. This could lead to accidents and
injury.
Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission
P Park position
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position
i The current gear selector lever position P,
R, N or D appears in the right multifunction
display (컄 page 117).
169
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Warning!
G
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector
lever out of park position P or neutral N if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed.
If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward
or reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only
shift into gear when the engine is idling
normally and when your right foot is firmly
on the brake pedal.
Shifting procedure
The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, depending on:
앫
the gear selector lever drive position D
(컄 page 171) with gear ranges
(컄 page 174)
앫
the selected shift program
(C/MAN/S) (컄 page 175)
앫
the position of the accelerator pedal
(컄 page 173)
앫
the vehicle speed
The current gear selector lever position
(P/R/N/D), the gear range (1/2/3/4) and
the shift program (C/M/S) are shown in the
standard display (컄 page 117).
170
! Allow engine to warm up under low load use.
Do not place full load on the engine until the
operating temperature has been reached
(컄 page 307).
Shift into park position P or reverse gear R only
when the vehicle is stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended
period when driving off on slippery road
surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
When the gear selector lever is in drive
position D, you can influence transmission
shifting by:
앫
limiting the gear range
앫
changing gears manually
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gear selector lever positions
Effect
ì Park position
Gear selector lever position
when the vehicle is parked. Place
gear selector lever in park
position P only when vehicle is
stopped. The park position is not
intended to serve as a brake
when the vehicle is parked.
Rather, the driver should always
set the parking brake in addition
to placing the gear selector lever
in park position P to secure the
vehicle.
The SmartKey can only be
removed from the starter switch
with the gear selector lever in
park position P. With the
SmartKey removed, the gear
selector lever is locked in park
position P.
Effect
í Reverse gear
Place gear selector lever in
position R only when vehicle is
stopped.
Effect
ë Neutral
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive axle. When
the brakes are released, the
vehicle can be moved freely
(pushed or towed).
To avoid damage to the transmission, never engage N while
driving.
If the ESP® is deactivated or
malfunctioning:
Move gear selector lever to
neutral N only if the vehicle is in
danger of skidding, e.g. on icy
roads.
ê Drive position
The transmission shifts
automatically. All five forward
gears are available.
171
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
! Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other
reason with gear selector lever in neutral N can
result in transmission damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning!
G
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear
selector lever not fully engaged in park
position P is dangerous. Also, park
position P alone is not intended to or capable of preventing your vehicle from moving,
possibly hitting people or objects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to park position P (컄 page 55).
When parked on an incline, turn the front
wheels towards the road curb.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where
combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
172
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children
could move the gear selector lever from
park position P, which could result in an
accident and/or serious personal injury.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Driving tips
Accelerator position
Your driving style influences the
transmission’s shifting behavior:
i Kickdown in manual shift program MAN is
Maneuvering
not possible.
When you maneuver in tight areas,
e.g. when pulling into a parking space:
In kickdown operation, it is not possible to
change gear with the steering wheel gear shift
buttons.
왘
Control the vehicle speed by gradually
releasing the brakes.
Less throttle
Earlier upshifting
Stopping
왘
Accelerate gently.
More throttle
Later upshifting
When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights:
왘
Never abruptly step on the accelerator.
Kickdown
Use kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
왘
Press the accelerator past the point of
resistance.
Depending on the engine speed the
transmission shifts into a lower gear.
왘
왘
Leave the transmission in gear.
왘
Hold the vehicle with the brake.
When you stop longer with the engine
idling and/or on a hill:
왘
Set the parking brake.
왘
Move the gear selector lever to park
position P.
Working on the vehicle
Warning!
G
When working on the vehicle, set the
parking brake and move gear selector lever
to position P. Otherwise the vehicle could
roll away.
Ease on the accelerator when you have
reached the desired speed.
The transmission shifts up again.
173
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gear ranges
With the gear selector lever in drive
position D and driving in shift program C
or S, you can select a gear range for the
automatic transmission to operate within.
Gear selector lever (컄 page 175):
You can limit the gear range by pressing
the gear selector lever to the left (D-), and
reverse the gear range limit by pressing
the gear selector lever to the right (D+).
Steering wheel gearshift buttons/paddles
(컄 page 177):
You can limit the gear range by pressing
the left gearshift button or pulling the left
gearshift paddle, and reverse the gear
range limit by pressing the right gearshift
button or pulling the right gearshift paddle.
174
The selected gear range appears in the
right multifunction display (컄 page 117).
i If, when driving in shift program C and S the
maximum engine speed for the gear range has
been reached, the transmission shifts up automatically, even if the gear range is restricted. In
shift program MAN the transmission will not
shift up automatically.
Effect
é The transmission shifts through
fourth gear only.
è The transmission shifts through
third gear only.
With this selection you can use the
braking effect of the engine.
Effect
ç The transmission shifts through
second gear only.
Allows the use of engine’s braking
power when driving:
앫
on steep downgrades
앫
in mountainous regions
앫
under extreme operating
conditions
æ The transmission operates in the
first gear only.
For maximum use of engine’s
braking effect on very steep or
lengthy downgrades.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Shift program mode selector switch
왘
Turn the program mode selector switch
to the desired setting.
The letter of the desired shift program
appears in the right multifunction
display.
Select C for comfort driving:
앫
1 Program mode selector switch
C Comfort
앫
Traction and driving stability are
improved on icy roads.
앫
Upshifts occur earlier even when
you give more gas. The engine then
operates at lower rpms and the
wheels are less likely to spin.
For comfort driving
MAN Manual
For manual gear shifting
(컄 page 179)
S Sport
For standard driving
The selected shift program appears in the
right multifunction display (컄 page 117).
! Never change the program when the gear
selector lever is out of park position P. This could
result in a change of driving characteristics for
which you may not be prepared.
The vehicle starts out in second
gear for gentler starts. This does
not apply if full throttle is applied or
gear range 1 is selected.
Gear selector lever one-touch
gearshifting
With the gear selector lever in drive position D and driving in shift program C or S,
you can limit or extend the gear range.
With the MAN shift program activated, you
can use the gear selector lever to manually
shift the gears.
i For information on using the gear selector
lever in shift program MAN, see “Manual shift
program” (컄 page 179).
! Allow engine to warm up under low load use.
Do not place full load on the engine until the
operating temperature has been reached.
Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only
when the vehicle is stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended
period when driving off on slippery road
surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
The following instructions describe operation of the gear selector lever when driving
in the shift program C or S.
175
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Limiting gear range
Warning!
G
Extending gear range
Shifting into optimal gear range
왘
왘
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the right in the D+ direction.
The transmission will shift to the next
higher gear as permitted by the shift
program. This action simultaneously
extends the gear range of the
transmission.
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
i If you press on the accelerator when the en왘
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the left in the D- direction.
gine has reached its rpm limit, the transmission
will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected.
The transmission will shift to the next
lower gear as permitted by the shift
program. This action simultaneously
limits the gear range of the transmission (컄 page 174).
Canceling gear range limit
i To avoid overrevving the engine when downshifting, the transmission will not shift to a lower
gear if the engine’s max. speed would be
exceeded.
176
왘
Press and hold the gear selector lever
in the D+ direction until D reappears in
the right multifunction display.
The transmission will shift from the current gear range directly to gear
range D.
Press and hold the gear selector lever
in the D- direction.
The transmission will automatically select the gear range suited for optimal
acceleration and deceleration. This
may involve shifting down one or more
gears.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Steering wheel gearshift control
one-touch gearshifting
The steering wheel gearshift buttons/paddles are located on the left and right side
of the steering wheel.
With the gear selector lever in drive position D and driving in shift program C or S,
you can limit or extend the gear range.
With the MAN shift program activated, you
can use the steering wheel gearshift control to manually shift the gears.
i For information on using the steering wheel
gearshift control in shift program MAN, see
“Manual shift program” (컄 page 179).
Steering wheel gearshift paddles (only
Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren 722 Edition)
! Allow engine to warm up under low load use.
Steering wheel gearshift buttons
Do not place full load on the engine until the
operating temperature has been reached.
1 Left shift button: limiting gear range or
downshift (in shift program MAN)
2 Right shift button: extending gear
range or upshift (in shift program MAN)
Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only
when the vehicle is stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended
period when driving off on slippery road
surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
1 Left shift paddle: limiting gear range or
downshift (in shift program MAN)
2 Right shift paddle: extending gear
range or upshift (in shift program MAN)
i You cannot shift with the steering wheel
gearshift buttons/paddles when the gear selector lever is in position P, N or R.
The following instructions describe operation of the gear selector lever when driving
in the shift program C or S.
177
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Limiting gear range
Warning!
G
Extending gear range
Shifting into optimal gear range
왘
왘
Briefly press right shift button 2 or
pull right shift paddle 2.
The transmission will shift to the next
higher gear as permitted by the shift
program. This action simultaneously
extends the gear range of the
transmission.
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
i If you press on the accelerator when the en왘
Briefly press left shift button 1 or pull
left shift paddle 1.
gine has reached its rpm limit, the transmission
will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected.
The transmission will shift to the next
lower gear as permitted by the shift
program. This action simultaneously
limits the gear range of the transmission (컄 page 174).
Canceling gear range limit
i To avoid overrevving the engine when downshifting, the transmission will not shift to a lower
gear if the engine’s max. speed would be
exceeded.
178
왘
Press and hold right shift button 2
until D reappears in the right multifunction display.
The transmission will shift from the
current gear range directly to gear
range D.
Press and hold left shift button 1 or
pull and hold left shift paddle 1.
The transmission will automatically select the gear range suited for optimal
acceleration and deceleration. This
may involve shifting down one or more
gears.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Manual shift program
In addition to the shift program C or S,
your vehicle is equipped with the
MAN shift program.
In the manual shift program MAN,
system-controlled automatic gearshifting
is switched off and you need to change the
gears by manually upshifting or downshifting using the steering wheel gearshift buttons/paddles (컄 page 177) or the gear
selector lever (컄 page 175).
! Allow engine to warm up under low load use.
Do not place full load on the engine until the
operating temperature has been reached.
Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only
when the vehicle is stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended
period when driving off on slippery road
surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Activating manual shift program
왘
Selecting manual shift program mode
Turn program mode selector switch 1
(컄 page 175) to the MAN setting.
The transmission switches to the
manual program mode M. The letter M
appears in the right multifunction display and the lamp in program mode selector switch 3 (컄 page 179) comes
on. Automatic shifting is switched off.
The gear range is not limited.
You can change the gears manually when
the gear selector lever is in drive
position D. You can upshift or downshift
through the gears in succession.
3 Program mode selector switch for the
manual shift program
I Sport
For sporty driving
II Super Sport
For very sporty driving
III Race
For racing-like driving1
The individual shifting programs differ with
regard to spontaneity, response time, and
shifting smoothness.
i Using the kickdown when driving in shift
program MAN is not possible.
1
Please always drive carefully and obey applicable
speed limits.
179
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
왘
Turn program selector switch 3 to the
desired setting (I, II or III).
i The currently selected manual shift program
(I, II or III) does not appear in the right multifunction display. The current setting is indicated only
on the program mode selector switch 3.
Downshifting
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
왘
Briefly press left shift button 1 or pull
the left shift paddle 1 (컄 page 177).
or
왘
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the left in the D- direction.
The transmission shifts to the next
lower gear.
180
Upshifting
If the red gearshift indicator lamp >
comes on in the speedometer display
(컄 page 29), shift to the next higher gear.
The fuel supply will otherwise be interrupted to prevent the engine from overrevving.
! In the manual program mode M, the transmission will not upshift, even if the engine has
reached its overrevving range. Shift up to the
next gear before the engine has reached its overrevving range. Make absolutely certain that the
engine speed does not reach the red marking on
the tachometer (컄 page 28). Otherwise the engine could be damaged which is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren 722 Edition:
If you have selected the 722 Edition menu
(컄 page 123) and up appears in the right
multifunction display in addition to the red
gearshift indicator lamp >, shift to the
next higher gear. The fuel supply will otherwise be interrupted to prevent the engine
from overrevving.
i When you brake or stop, the transmission
shifts down to a gear from which you can easily
accelerate or take off.
왘
Briefly press right shift button 2 or
pull the right shift paddle 2
(컄 page 177).
or
왘
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the right in the D+ direction.
The transmission shifts to the next
higher gear.
Deactivating manual gearshift program
왘
Turn program mode selector switch 1
(컄 page 175) to the shift program C
or S.
The selected gearshift program appears in the right multifunction display.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Emergency operation
(Limp-Home Mode)
If vehicle acceleration becomes less responsive or sluggish or the transmission
no longer shifts, the transmission is most
likely operating in limp-home (emergency
operation) mode. In this mode only second
gear and reverse gear can be activated.
왘
Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
왘
Move gear selector lever to park
position P.
왘
Turn off the engine.
왘
Wait at least 10 seconds before
restarting.
왘
Restart the engine.
왘
Move gear selector lever to drive
position D (for second gear) or
position R.
왘
Have the transmission checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
181
Controls in detail
Good visibility
For information on the windshield wipers,
see “Switching on windshield wipers”
(컄 page 52).
Headlamp cleaning system
The button is located on the left side of the
dashboard.
i The headlamps will automatically be
Rear view mirrors
cleaned when you have
앫
switched on the headlamps
and
앫
operated the windshield wipers with windshield washer fluid fifteen times
When you switch off the ignition, the counter
resets.
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Windshield washer system
and headlamp cleaning system”
(컄 page 257).
For more information on setting the rear
view mirrors, see “Mirrors” (컄 page 43).
Auto-dimming mirror
The reflection brightness of the interior
rear view mirror will respond automatically
to glare when
앫
the ignition is switched on
and
앫
incoming light from headlamps falls on
the sensor in the interior rear view
mirror
The rear view mirror will not react if
1 Headlamp washer button
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
Press button 1.
The headlamps are cleaned with a
high-pressure water jet.
182
앫
reverse gear R is engaged
앫
the interior lighting is turned on
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Warning!
G
The auto-dimming function does not react if
incoming light is not aimed directly at
sensors in the interior rear view mirror.
Glare can endanger you and/or others.
Warning!
G
In case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may
escape from the mirror housing if the mirror
glass breaks.
Warning!
G
Exercise care when using the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your
interior rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
Sun visors
The sun visors protect you from sun glare
while driving.
Warning!
G
Do not use the driver’s side vanity mirror
while driving.
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare
can endanger you and/or others.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not
allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
! Electrolyte drops coming into contact with
the vehicle paint finish can be completely
removed only while in the liquid state and by
applying plenty of water.
183
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Glare through the windshield
Vanity mirror
왘
Make sure the sun visor is properly
engaged in mounting 3.
왘
Swing respective sun visor down.
왘
왘
Swing the respective sun visor down.
Flip up vanity mirror cover 1 to access
the vanity mirror.
왘
When you do not experience glare
anymore, swing the sun visor up.
Vanity mirror lamp 2 comes on.
왘
After using the vanity mirror, flip down
vanity mirror cover 1.
왘
Swing the sun visor up.
Glare through a door window
1 Vanity mirror cover
2 Vanity mirror lamp
3 Mounting
4 Holder for gas cards
왘
Swing respective sun visor down.
왘
Disengage the sun visor from
mounting 3.
i When the sun visor is disengaged from
mounting 3, vanity mirror lamp 2 switches
off.
왘
Pivot the sun visor to the side.
! To avoid damage to vanity mirror cover 1,
make sure it is closed before pivoting the sun
visor to the side.
184
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Rear window defroster
The rear window defroster uses a large
amount of power. To keep the battery
drain to a minimum, switch off the
defroster as soon as the rear window is
clear. The defroster is automatically
deactivated after approximately
6 to 17 minutes of operation depending on
the outside temperature.
Warning!
G
Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
removed from the rear window before
driving. Visibility could otherwise be
impaired, endangering you and/or others.
Activating
Deactivating
왘
왘
Press button F on the automatic
climate control panel (컄 page 188).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Press button F again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
! If the rear window defroster switches off too
soon and the indicator lamp starts flashing, this
means that too many electrical consumers are
operating simultaneously and there is insufficient voltage in the battery. The system responds automatically by deactivating the rear
window defroster.
As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage, the
rear window defroster automatically switches
back on automatically.
185
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
186
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Function
1 Left side air vent, adjustable
i For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders
for the center air vents to the middle position.
2 Left center air vent, adjustable
3 Air temperature controls for center
and side air vents
4 Right center air vent, adjustable
5 Right side air vent, adjustable
6 Air volume control for right side air
vent
7 Air volume control for center air
vents
8 Air volume control for left side air
vent
9 Automatic climate control panel
187
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Function
1 Air distribution, left (automatic or
manual operation)
188
6 Temperature control, right
2 Front defroster
7 Automatic climate control on/off
(entire system)
3 Air recirculation
8 Residual heat/ventilation
4 Rear window defroster (컄 page 185)
9 Air volume control (automatic or
manual operation)
5 Air distribution, right (automatic or
manual operation)
Automatic climate control panel
Function
a AC cooling on/off
b Temperature control, left
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
The automatic climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. You can
operate the climate control system in either the automatic or manual mode. The
system cools or heats the interior depending on the selected interior temperature
and the current outside temperature.
Warning!
G
When operating the automatic climate control, the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents can be very
hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may cause burns or frostbite
to unprotected skin in the immediate area of
the air vents. Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the
body and the air vents. If necessary, use the
air distribution controls (컄 page 192) to direct the air to air vents in the vehicle interior
that are not in the immediate area of
unprotected skin.
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system.
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the ± mode is activated
(컄 page 196).
Warning!
G
i Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
may require replacement of the filter before its
scheduled interval. A clogged filter will reduce
the air volume to the interior.
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior
before driving off. The automatic climate control
will then adjust the interior temperature to the
set value much faster.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield free of snow and debris.
Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following
pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you
and/or others.
189
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Deactivating the automatic climate
control system
Warning!
G
When the automatic climate control system
is switched off, the outside air supply and
circulation are also switched off. Only
choose this setting for a short time. Otherwise the windows could fog up, impairing
visibility and endangering you and/or
others.
i Under certain circumstances, e.g. when the
fuel system is too hot and needs to be cooled,
the cooling switches on again automatically. The
red lamp on the ± button the automatic
climate control panel flashes.
After cooling the fuel system sufficiently, the air
conditioning switches off again and the red lamp
stops flashing.
Air distribution and air volume can be
adjusted automatically by the automatic
climate control system. You can also adjust the settings for air distribution and air
volume manually.
Reactivating
i When operating the automatic climate
왘
control system in automatic mode, you will only
rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume
and air distribution.
왘
Press button M (컄 page 188).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
190
Press button M (컄 page 188).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
or
Deactivating
It is possible to completely deactivate the
automatic climate control system.
Operating the automatic climate
control system in automatic mode
왘
Turn one of the temperature controls
on the automatic climate control
(컄 page 188).
The indicator lamp on button M
goes out.
In automatic mode, cooling with dehumidify is
switched on. This function can be switched off if
necessary (컄 page 196).
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Air distribution in automatic mode
Air volume in automatic mode
Setting the temperature
You can separately adjust the air distribution for each side of the passenger
compartment.
The air volume settings are the same for
the entire passenger compartment.
Use temperature controls 6 and b to
separately adjust the air temperature on
each side of the passenger compartment.
You should raise or lower the temperature
setting in small increments, preferably
starting at 72°F (22°C). The automatic
climate control will adjust to the set
temperature as fast as possible.
Activating
Activating
왘
The control button is engaged.
The U symbol on the control button
comes on. Air distribution for the respective side of the passenger compartment is adjusted automatically.
Deactivating
왘
왘
Press control button 1 or 5
(컄 page 188).
Press control button 1 or 5
(컄 page 188) once more.
Press control button 9 (컄 page 188).
The control button is engaged.
The U symbol on the control button
comes on.
Deactivating
왘
Press control button 9 (컄 page 188)
once more.
The control button sticks up slightly.
The U symbol on the control button
goes out. Adjust the air volume
manually (컄 page 193).
Increasing
왘
Turn temperature control 6
and/or b (컄 page 188) slightly
clockwise.
The automatic climate control system
will correspondingly adjust the interior
air temperature.
The control button sticks up slightly.
The U symbol on the control button
goes out. Automatic air distribution for
the respective side of the passenger
compartment is switched off. Adjust
the air distribution manually
(컄 page 192).
191
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Decreasing
Turning off warm air
왘
왘
Turn temperature control 6
and/or b (컄 page 188) slightly
counterclockwise.
The automatic climate control system
will correspondingly adjust the interior
air temperature.
Adjusting the temperature for the
center and side air vents
When outside temperatures are low, you
can manually raise the air temperature for
the center and side air vents. The
controls 3 are located between the
center air vents (컄 page 187).
Turning on warm air
왘
Press the left button (red).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. Warm air will enter from the
center and side air vents.
192
Press the left button (red).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. The air from the outlets will return
to the temperature set in the system.
Adjusting air distribution
Use air distribution controls 1 and 5
(컄 page 188) to separately adjust the air
distribution on each side of the passenger
compartment. The following symbols are
found on the controls:
Turning on cooler air
왘
Symbol
Function
h
Directs air through the center and side air vents
j
V
Directs air to the windows
Press the right button (blue).
k
Directs air to the footwells
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. The air from the outlets will return
to the temperature set in the system.
왘
Press the right button (blue).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. Cooler air will enter from the
center and side air vents.
Turning off cooler air
왘
Directs air into the entire
vehicle interior
Press control button 1 or 5
(컄 page 188) until the control button
sticks up slightly and the U symbol
on the control button is out.
Automatic air distribution for the respective side of the passenger
compartment is switched off.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
왘
Turn control button to the desired
symbol.
Opening the side air vents
왘
The air distribution is adjusted according to the chosen setting.
Turn thumbwheel 6 and 8
(컄 page 187) upward.
The corresponding side air vent is
open.
i You can also turn the air distribution control
to a position between two symbols.
Closing the side air vents
Opening the center air vents
왘
Turn thumbwheel 7 (컄 page 187)
upward.
Center air vents 2 and 4
(컄 page 187) are open.
Closing the center air vents
왘
Turn thumbwheel 7 (컄 page 187)
downward.
Center air vents 2 and 4
(컄 page 187) are closed.
왘
Turn thumbwheel 6 and 8
(컄 page 187) upward.
The corresponding side air vent is
closed.
i The air vents are continuously variable.
Adjusting air volume
Use air volume control 9 (컄 page 188) for
both automatic (컄 page 190) and manual
air volume adjustment. Nine blower
speeds are available.
왘
Press control button 9 (컄 page 188).
The control button sticks up slightly.
The U symbol on the control button
goes out. Automatic air volume control
is switched off. The air volume is adjusted corresponding to the set blower
speed.
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL
If the left and right air distribution controls
as well as the airflow volume control are
set to U and there is a high need for
cooling, MAXCOOL is activated.
This provides the fastest possible cooling
of the vehicle interior.
193
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Front defroster
You can use this setting to defrost the
windshield, for example if it is iced up.
You can also defog the windshield and the
side windows.
i Keep this setting selected only until the
windshield or the side windows are clear again.
Activating
왘
Press button P (컄 page 188).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
The air conditioning switches to the
following functions automatically:
194
앫
cooling on to dehumidify
앫
maximum blower speed and
heating power
앫
air flows onto the windshield
and the front side windows
앫
the air recirculation mode is
switched off
Deactivating
Windshield fogged on the outside
왘
Press button P (컄 page 188).
i Keep this setting selected only until the
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. Defrosting is turned off.
windshield is clear again.
The previous settings are in effect
again.
i The cooling remains switched on.
왘
Switch the windshield wipers on
(컄 page 52).
If the automatic air distribution and air
volume are switched off:
왘
Turn air distribution controls 1 and 5
(컄 page 188) to position h or k.
or
왘
Press control buttons 1, 5 and 9
(컄 page 188).
The control buttons are engaged.
The U symbol on the control
buttons come on. Air distribution and
air volume are adjusted automatically.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Air recirculation mode
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside. This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the
air in the passenger compartment.
Warning!
G
Fogged windows impair visibility, endangering you and others. If the windows begin to
fog on the inside, switching off the air
recirculation mode immediately should clear
interior window fogging. If interior window
fogging persists, make sure the air
conditioning (컄 page 196) is activated, or
press button P.
Activating
Deactivating
왘
왘
Press button , (컄 page 188).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Press button , (컄 page 188).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
i The air recirculation mode is activated auto- i The manually selected air recirculation
matically
mode is deactivated automatically
앫
at high outside temperatures
앫
앫
if the concentration of carbon monoxide
(CO) and nitrogen oxide (NOX) in the outside
air increases, for example in a tunnel
after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is
below approximately 41°F (5°C)
앫
after 5 minutes if the air conditioning is
turned off
A quantity of outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes.
앫
after 30 minutes if the outside temperature
is above approximately 41°F (5°C)
If you have turned off the air conditioning
(컄 page 196) or the outside temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the air recirculation mode will
not switch on automatically.
At outside temperatures above 79°F
(26°C) the system will not automatically
switch back to outside air.
195
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Air recirculation mode with convenience closing or opening feature
Warning!
G
Never operate the windows if there is the
possibility of anyone being harmed by the
closing procedure.
In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the closing of the windows
can be immediately halted by releasing
the , button or by pressing and pulling
the respective window switch.
Activating
왘
Press and hold button ,.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The air recirculation mode is
activated. The windows will close.
Deactivating
왘
Press and hold button ,.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. The air recirculation mode is deactivated. The windows will return to their
previous position.
i A window will only return to its previous position if it has not moved to another position using the respective window switch after it was
closed with button ,.
Air conditioning
The air conditioning (cooling) function is
operational when the engine is running and
cools the vehicle interior down to the selected temperature. In addition, the cooling function dehumidifies the air in the
vehicle interior, thus preventing the
windows from fogging up.
Warning!
G
If you turn off the cooling function, the
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
conditions are warm. The windows can fog
up more quickly. Window fogging may
impair visibility and endanger you and/or
others.
i Condensation may drip out from underneath
the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication
of a malfunction.
196
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Deactivating
Activating
It is possible to deactivate the cooling
function of the automatic climate control
system. The air in the vehicle will then no
longer be cooled or dehumidified.
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the air with the air
conditioning.
왘
Press ± button (컄 page 188).
The indicator lamp on the ±
button comes on. The cooling function
switches off after a short delay.
i Under certain circumstances, e.g. when the
fuel system is too hot and needs to be cooled,
the cooling switches on again automatically. The
red lamp on the ± button the automatic
climate control panel flashes.
After cooling the fuel system sufficiently, the air
conditioning switches off again and the red lamp
stops flashing.
왘
Press ± button again (컄 page 188).
The indicator lamp on the ± button
goes out.
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
R134A. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
which are harmful to the ozone layer.
Residual heat and ventilation
With the engine switched off, it is possible
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior
for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes
use of the residual heat produced by the
engine.
i How long the system will provide heating
depends on the coolant temperature and the
selected temperature. The blower will run at low
speed regardless of the air distribution control
setting.
! If you press the ± button on the automatic climate control panel and it starts to flash,
this indicates that the air conditioning is losing
refrigerant. The compressor has turned off. The
air conditioning cannot be turned on again.
Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
197
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Activating
Deactivating
왘
왘
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 1 or 0 or remove it from the
starter switch.
Press button T (컄 page 188).
The indicator lamp on button goes out.
Press button T (컄 page 188).
The residual heat is automatically turned
off:
The indicator lamp on button comes
on.
앫
when the ignition is switched on
앫
after about 30 minutes
앫
if the battery voltage drops
앫
if the coolant temperature is too low
198
Controls in detail
Power windows
왔 Power windows
Opening and closing the windows
Warning!
The door windows are opened and closed
electrically. The switches for the windows
are located on the door sill on the driver’s
side (컄 page 34). The switch for the passenger side is located on the door sill on
the passenger side.
G
When closing the windows, make sure there
is no danger of anyone being harmed by the
closing procedure.
The closing of the windows can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or, if
switch was pulled past the resistance point
and released, by either pressing or pulling
the respective switch.
If the window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you pulled the switch past the resistance
point and released it to close the window,
the automatic reversal function will stop the
window and open it slightly.
1 Left window
2 Right window
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from starter switch, take it with
you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
unsupervised access to a vehicle could
result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
If the window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you are closing the window by pulling and
holding the switch, or by pressing and holding button ‹ on the SmartKey, or by
pressing and holding the , button on the
climate control panel, the automatic
reversal function will not operate.
i Depending on the current position, the windows may also open or close when the air recirculation button , on the control panel of the
automatic climate control (컄 page 188) is
pressed and held.
i After switching off the ignition (컄 page 40)
or removing the SmartKey from the starter
switch, the windows can be operated
앫
until you open a door
앫
for at least 5 minutes if no door was opened
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
199
Controls in detail
Power windows
Opening the windows
왘
Press switch 1 or 2 to the resistance
point.
왘
The corresponding window will move
downwards until you release the
switch.
Closing the windows
왘
Pull switch 1 or 2 to the resistance
point.
The corresponding window will move
upwards until you release the switch.
Warning!
Press switch 1 or 2 past the
resistance point and release.
Fully closing the windows
(Express-close)
왘
If the window still does not close when there is
no obstruction, then pull and hold the switch
again. The window will then close without the
obstruction sensor function.
Stopping the windows
Pull switch 1 or 2 past the
resistance point and release.
왘
The corresponding window closes
completely.
Warning!
200
Remove the obstruction, pull the switch again
past the resistance point and release.
The corresponding window opens
completely.
G
If you pull and hold the switch up when
closing the window, and upward movement
of the window is blocked by some obstruction including but not limited to arms, hands,
fingers, etc., the automatic reversal will not
operate.
! If the upward movement of the window is
blocked during the closing procedure, the
window will stop and open slightly.
Fully opening the windows
(Express-open)
G
Driver’s door only:
If within 5 seconds you again pull the switch
past the resistance point and release, the
automatic reversal will not function.
Press or pull respective switch again.
Controls in detail
Power windows
Synchronizing power windows
Summer opening feature
The power windows must be synchronized
each time
If the weather is warm, you can ventilate
the vehicle before driving off by opening
the windows.
앫
after the battery has been
disconnected
앫
if the power windows cannot be fully
opened (Express-open) or closed
(Express-close)
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
Pull the power window switches until
the windows are closed.
Hold the switches for approximately
1 second.
The power windows are synchronized.
왘
왘
Press and hold button Πuntil the
windows have reached the desired
position.
왘
Release button Πto interrupt
procedure.
Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey at
the rear quarter window.
The SmartKey must be in close
proximity to the rear quarter window.
201
Controls in detail
Power windows
왘
Convenience closing feature
When locking the vehicle, you can close
the windows.
Warning!
G
When closing the windows, make sure that
there is no danger of anyone being harmed
by the closing procedure.
If potential danger exists, release
button ‹ to stop the closing procedure.
To open, press and hold button Œ. To
continue the closing after making sure that
there is no danger of anyone being harmed
by the closing procedure, press and hold
button ‹.
202
Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey at
the rear quarter window.
The SmartKey must be in close proximity to the rear quarter window.
왘
Press and hold button ‹ until the
side windows are completely closed.
왘
Release button ‹ to interrupt
procedure.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왔 Driving systems
The driving system of your vehicle is
described on the following pages:
앫
Cruise control, with which the vehicle
can maintain a preset speed
For information on the BAS, ABS and ESP®,
see “Driving safety systems” (컄 page 81).
Cruise control
Warning!
Cruise control automatically maintains the
speed you set for your vehicle.
Use of cruise control is recommended for
driving at a constant speed for extended
periods of time. You can set or resume the
cruise control at any speed over 20 mph
(30 km/h).
The cruise control function is operated by
means of the cruise control lever.
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever on the left-hand side of the steering
column (컄 page 30).
G
The Cruise control is a convenience system
designed to assist the driver during vehicle
operation. The driver is and must always
remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed
and for safe brake operation.
Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic
and weather conditions make it advisable to
travel at a steady speed.
앫
The use of the cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe
driving at a steady speed.
앫
The use of the cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes
in tire traction can result in wheel spin
and loss of control.
앫
Deactivate the cruise control when
driving in fog.
The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
203
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왘
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The cruise control is automatically cancelled, when
The cruise control is activated.
앫
the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(30 km/h)
앫
ESP® is in operation or switched off
with the ESP® switch (컄 page 86)
앫
you move the gear selector lever to
position N while driving
i On uphill or downhill grades, the cruise
control may not be able to maintain the set
speed. Once the grade eases, the set speed will
be resumed.
Canceling the cruise control
1 Sets current or higher speed
2 Sets current or lower speed
3 Cancels the cruise control
4 Resumes at last set speed
There are several ways to cancel the cruise
control:
왘
Setting current speed
왘
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
왘
Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise
control lever.
The current speed is set.
204
Step on the brake pedal.
The cruise control is canceled. The last
speed set is stored for later use.
i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
Briefly push the cruise control lever to
position 3.
The last stored speed is canceled when you turn
off the engine.
or
왘
! However, the gear selector lever should not
be moved to neutral N while driving, except to
coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding
(e.g. on icy roads).
The cruise control is canceled. The last
speed set is stored for later use.
deactivate the cruise control. After brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), the cruise control will resume the last speed set.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a higher speed
왘
왘
Lift the cruise control lever to
position 1 and hold it up until the desired speed is reached.
Release the cruise control lever.
Fine adjustment in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments
Faster
왘
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 1.
The new speed is set.
i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
Slower
deactivate the cruise control. After brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), the cruise control will
resume the last speed set.
왘
Setting a lower speed
왘
왘
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 2.
Setting to last stored speed
(“Resume” function)
Warning!
The speed stored in memory should only be
set again if prevailing road conditions permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
differences arising from returning to preset
speed could cause an accident and/or
serious injury to you and/or others.
왘
Depress the cruise control lever to
position 2 and hold it down until the
desired speed is reached.
Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set.
G
Briefly push the cruise control lever to
position 4.
The cruise control resumes the last set
speed.
왘
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
i When you use the cruise control lever to decelerate, the transmission will automatically
downshift if the engine’s braking power does not
brake the vehicle sufficiently.
205
Controls in detail
Useful features
Map pocket in passenger footwell
Warning!
G
Do not place heavy or fragile objects, or objects having sharp edges in the map pocket.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, they could be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants.
Storage compartments
Warning!
Armrest storage compartment
G
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when storing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backs.
Do not place anything on the shelf below the
rear window.
Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy
objects.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
an accident.
206
왘
Reach into the recess and lift armrest.
The armrest opens automatically.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Center storage compartment/telephone compartment
Rear storage compartment
Parcel net in trunk
There is a net available in the trunk to
secure loads:
1 Release button
2 Cover
왘
Press release button 1.
Cover 2 opens automatically.
i The telephone (컄 page 209), the Roadside
Assistance button • (컄 page 217) and the
Information button ¡ (컄 page 218) are
located in the cover of the center storage
compartment.
왘
Pull the trunk floor net from the trunk
back wall towards the front over the
luggage.
왘
Hang the hooks of the net on the eyes
on the trunk floor.
1 Release button
2 Cover
왘
Press release button 1.
Cover 2 opens automatically.
i With the ignition switched on and cover 2
opened, the storage compartment will be
illuminated.
207
Controls in detail
Useful features
Ashtray and cigarette lighter
The ashtray and the cigarette lighter are located in the storage compartment under
the armrest.
Ashtray
Warning!
Cigarette lighter
G
Remove ashtray insert only with vehicle
standing still.
Removing ashtray insert
왘
Pull ashtray insert 2 upwards.
Replacing ashtray insert
왘
1 Cigarette lighter
2 Ashtray insert
Press the ashtray insert into the holder
until you hear it click into place.
Warning!
G
Never touch the heating element or sides of
the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
knob only.
Make sure that any children traveling with
you do not injure themselves or start a fire
with the hot cigarette lighter.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
unsupervised access to a vehicle could
result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
Push in cigarette lighter 1.
The cigarette lighter pops out automatically when hot.
208
Controls in detail
Useful features
! The lighter socket can accommodate
12V DC electrical accessories (up to a maximum
of 85 W) designed for use with the standard
“cigarette lighter” plug type. Keep in mind, however, that connecting accessories to the lighter
socket (for example extensive connecting and
disconnecting, or using plugs that do not fit properly) can damage the lighter socket. With the
socket damaged, the lighter may no longer be
able to be placed in the heating (pushed-in) position, or the lighter may pop out too early with the
lighter not hot enough.
To help avoid damaging the cigarette lighter
socket, we recommend connecting 12V DC electrical accessories designed for use with a standard “cigarette lighter” plug type to the
12 V power outlets in your vehicle whenever
possible.
Power outlet
Telephone
The power outlet is located on the left side
in the trunk.
The telephone is located in the center
storage compartment (컄 page 207).
Warning!
1 Power outlet
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
Flip up cover and insert electrical plug
(cigar lighter type).
G
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and personal
injury.
i The power outlet can be used to accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories (e.g. air
pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a maximum
of 180 W or as a battery charging point
(컄 page 368).
209
Controls in detail
Useful features
Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit, should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
G
Warning!
Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
attention to the road must always be
his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a
telephone call.
The external antenna must be approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on the installation of an approved
external antenna. Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use
of an external antenna.
telephone1
If you choose to use the
while
driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when road,
weather and traffic conditions permit. Some
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
mobile telephone while driving a vehicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second.
1
210
Observe all legal requirements.
You can take and place telephone calls
using the í and ì buttons on the
steering wheel. To carry out other telephone functions, use the control system
(컄 page 141).
See separate instruction manual for
instructions on how to operate the
telephone.
i For additional information on operating the
telephone using the audio system head unit, see
“Telephone operation” (컄 page 162).
i Standard Mercedes-Benz mobile phone
design shown, SLR phone design may vary.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Removing mobile phone from mobile
phone cradle
Inserting mobile phone in mobile phone
cradle
왘
Remove the round aerial contact cover
on the back of the mobile phone.
4 Release button
5 Engage the cell phone in mobile phone
cradle
1 Release button
2 Remove the mobile phone
왘
Press the release button 1 and remove the mobile phone in direction of
arrow 2 from the mobile phone
cradle.
왘
1 Insert the mobile phone
2 Connector contact
3 Mobile phone cradle
왘
Slide the lower end of the mobile phone
in direction of arrow 1 into connector
contact 2 on mobile phone cradle 3.
Push the top of the mobile phone in direction of arrow 5, until the lug on the
mobile phone release button 4
engages.
The battery will be charged depending
on its charge status and the position of
the SmartKey in the starter switch. The
charging process is shown in the
mobile phone display.
컄컄
211
Controls in detail
Useful features
컄컄i If you insert the mobile phone in the mobile
Making calls in private mode
phone cradle and the SmartKey is not in the
starter switch, the mobile phone will remain on
for approximately 1 minute. If you make a call
during this time, the mobile phone will be
switched off approximately 1 minute (delayed
switch-off time) after you hang up.
When you remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch, the mobile phone remains on for approximately 1 minute.
1 Release button
2 Mobile phone cradle
3 Holder
4 Remove the mobile phone and cradle
5 Mobile phone flap
왘
왘
Remove the mobile phone, together
with the mobile phone cradle 2 in direction of arrow 4, from the
holder 3.
왘
Fold the mobile phone flap 5 up.
Press the release button 1.
The mobile phone cradle 2 folds up.
212
Controls in detail
Useful features
Making calls in hands-free mode
Re-inserting mobile phone
왘
Open the mobile phone flap.
왘
Either accept the call or dial the desired
number.
왘
Close the mobile phone flap.
Hands-free mode is selected.
If you wish to change back to private
mode:
3 Engage mobile phone cradle
1 Fold the mobile phone flap down
2 Insert the mobile phone and cradle
왘
Fold the mobile phone flap 1 down.
왘
Guide the mobile phone, together with
the mobile phone cradle in direction of
arrow 2, into the holder.
왘
Push the top of the mobile phone in direction of arrow 3, until the mobile
phone cradle engages in the holder.
! To prevent any damage, the mobile phone
flap must be folded down before closing the telephone compartment.
왘
Open the mobile phone flap.
왘
Remove the mobile phone from the
holder (컄 page 212).
i For additional information on operating the
telephone using the audio system head unit, see
“Telephone operation” (컄 page 162).
For additional information on operating the telephone using the multifunction steering wheel,
see “TEL menu” (컄 page 141).
213
Controls in detail
Useful features
Tele Aid
The Tele Aid system
! The initial activation of the Tele Aid system
(Telematic Alarm Identification on
Demand)
may only be performed by completing the subscriber agreement and placing an acquaintance
call using the ¡ button. Failure to complete
either of these steps will result in a system that
is not activated.
If you have any questions regarding activation,
please call the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
Shortly after the completion of your Tele
Aid acquaintance call, you will receive a
user ID and password. By visiting
www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid”
(USA only), you will have access to account
information, remote door unlock, and
more.
214
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response:
앫
Automatic and manual emergency
앫
Roadside Assistance
앫
Information
The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the vehicle’s battery is charged,
properly connected, not damaged and
cellular and GPS coverage is available.
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can
be adjusted when using the volume control
on the audio system or on the multifunction steering wheel. To raise, turn the rotary volume control on the audio system
clockwise or press button æ on the
multifunction steering wheel. To lower,
turn the rotary volume control on the audio
system control counterclockwise or press
button ç on the multifunction steering
wheel.
왘
To activate, press the SOS button, the
Roadside Assistance button • or
the Information button ¡, depending on the type of response required.
i The SOS button is located above the inside
rear view mirror (컄 page 217).
The Roadside Assistance button •
(컄 page 217) and the Information button ¡
(컄 page 218) are located in the center storage
compartment.
! The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular network for communication and the GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites for vehicle location.
If either of these signals are unavailable, the Tele
Aid system may not function and if this occurs,
assistance must be summoned by other means.
i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, the
audio system is muted and the selected mode
(radio or CD) pauses. The mobile phone (if installed) switches off. If you must use this phone,
we recommend that you use it only with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location. Remove
the phone from the cradle and place the call. The
multifunction display in the instrument cluster is
available for use. After the Tele Aid call has ended, the optional mobile phone switches on again.
A PIN entry might be necessary.
Controls in detail
Useful features
System self-check
Initially, after switching on the ignition,
malfunctions are detected and indicated
(the indicator lamps in the SOS button, the
Roadside Assistance button • and the
Information button ¡ stay on longer
than 10 seconds or do not come on). The
message Tele Aid – inoperative
appears for approximately 10 seconds in
the multifunction display.
Warning!
G
If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in
the Roadside Assistance button, and/or in
the Information button do not come on during the system self-check, or if any of these
indicators remain illuminated continuously
in red and/or the message Tele Aid inoperative is displayed in the multifunction display after the system self-check, a
malfunction in the system has been
detected.
Emergency calls
An emergency call is initiated
automatically following an accident in
which the emergency tensioning devices
(ETDs) or air bags have deployed.
An emergency call can also be initiated
manually by opening the cover next to the
inside rear view mirror labeled SOS, then
briefly pressing the button located under
the cover.
For more information, see “Initiating an
emergency call manually” (컄 page 217).
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as expected. Have the system checked at the
nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
215
Controls in detail
Useful features
Once the emergency call is in progress, the
indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin
to flash. The message Connecting call
appears in the multifunction display. When
the connection is established, the message Call connected appears in the multifunction display. All information relevant to
the emergency, such as the location of the
vehicle (determined by the GPS satellite
location system), vehicle model, identification number and color are generated.
A voice connection between the Response
Center and the occupants of the vehicle
will be established automatically soon
after the emergency call has been initiated. The Response Center will attempt to
determine more precisely the nature of the
accident provided they can speak to an
occupant of the vehicle.
216
The Tele Aid system is available if
앫
앫
it has been activated and is operational. Activation requires a subscription
for monitoring services, connection
and cellular air time
the relevant cellular phone network
and GPS signals are available and pass
the information on to the Response
Center
i Location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from
the GPS satellite network and pass the information on to the Response Center.
Warning!
G
If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is
flashing continuously and there was no
voice connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available).
The message Call failed appears in the
multifunction display for approximately
10 seconds.
Should this occur, assistance must be
summoned by other means.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Initiating an emergency call manually
Warning!
1 Cover
2 SOS button
왘
Briefly press on cover 1.
The cover will open.
왘
G
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in a dangerous road location), please
do not wait for voice contact after you have
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
leave the vehicle and move to a safe location. The Response Center will automatically
contact local emergency officials with the
vehicle’s approximate location if they receive an automatic SOS signal and cannot
make voice contact with the vehicle
occupants.
Roadside Assistance button •
The Roadside Assistance button • is
located in the center armrest cover.
1 Roadside Assistance button •
왘
Open the center storage compartment
(컄 page 207).
왘
Press and hold the button 1 (for
longer than 2 seconds).
Press SOS button 2 briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button 2
will flash until the emergency call is
concluded.
왘
Wait for a voice connection to the
Response Center.
왘
Close cover 1 after the emergency
call is concluded.
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside
Assistance dispatcher will be initiated.
The button will flash while the call is in
progress. The message
Connecting call will appear in the
multifunction display.
컄컄
217
Controls in detail
Useful features
컄컄When
the connection is established, the
message Call connected appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system
will transmit data generating the vehicle
identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular
and GPS signals).
A voice connection between the Roadside
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants
of the vehicle will be established.
왘
Describe the nature of the need for
assistance.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to
tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such
as labor and/or towing, charges may
apply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance
Manual for more information.
These programs are only available in the
USA:
앫
Sign and Drive services: Services such
as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or
the replacement of a flat tire are
obtainable.
The Information button ¡ is located in
the center armrest cover.
i The indicator lamp in the Roadside
Assistance button • remains illuminated in
red for approximately 10 seconds during the system self-check after switching on the ignition (together with the SOS button and the Information
button ¡).
See system self-check (컄 page 215) if the indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays on
longer than approximately 10 seconds.
If the indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance
button • is illuminated continuously and
there was no voice connection to the Response
Center established, then the Tele Aid system
could not initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g.
the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The message Call failed! appears in
the multifunction display.
Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using the ì button on the multifunction
steering wheel.
218
Information button ¡
1 Information button ¡
왘
Open the center storage compartment
(컄 page 207).
왘
Press and hold the button 1 (for
longer than 2 seconds).
A call to the Customer Assistance
Center will be initiated. The button will
flash while the call is in progress. The
message Connecting call will appear
in the multifunction display.
Controls in detail
Useful features
When the connection is established, the
message Call connected appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system
will transmit data generating the vehicle
identification number, model, color and
location (subject to availability of cellular
and GPS signals).
A voice connection between the Customer
Assistance Center representative and the
occupants of the vehicle will be established. Information regarding the operation
of your vehicle, the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz
USA products and services is available to
you.
For more details concerning the Tele Aid
system, please visit www.mbusa.com and
use your ID and password (sent to you
separately) to learn more (USA only).
i The indicator lamp in the Information
button ¡ remains illuminated in red for
approximately 10 seconds during the system
self-check after switching on the ignition (together with the SOS button and the Roadside
Assistance button •).
See system self-check (컄 page 215) if the indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays on
longer than approximately 10 seconds.
! If the indicator lamps do not start flashing
after pressing one of the buttons or remain illuminated (in red) at any time, the Tele Aid system
has detected a malfunction or the service is currently not active, and may not initiate a call. Visit
your Mercedes-Benz Center and have the system checked or contact the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada) as soon as
possible.
If the indicator lamp in the Information
button ¡ is illuminated continuously and no
voice connection to the Response Center was
established, then the Tele Aid system could not
initiate an Information call (e.g. the relevant
cellular phone network is not available). The
message Call failed appears in the
multifunction display.
Information calls can be terminated using the
ì button on the multifunction steering
wheel.
219
Controls in detail
Useful features
Call priority
Remote door unlock
i The remote door unlock feature is available
If other service calls such as a Roadside
Assistance call or Information call are
active, an Emergency call is still possible.
In this case, the Emergency call will take
priority and override all other active calls.
In case you have locked your vehicle unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
and the reserve SmartKey is not handy:
if the relevant cellular phone network is
available.
왘
i The indicator lamp in the respective button
flashes until the call is concluded. Emergency
calls can only be terminated by a Response Center or Customer Assistance Center representative, whereas Roadside Assistance and
Information calls can also be terminated by
pressing button ì on the multifunction
steering wheel.
! If the indicator lamp continues to flash or
the system does not reset, contact the Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada), or Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Customer
Service at 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
You will be asked to provide your password which you provided when you
completed the subscriber agreement.
왘
Then return to your vehicle and pull the
trunk recessed handle for a minimum
of 20 seconds until the SOS button is
flashing.
The message Connecting call appears in the multifunction display.
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle via Internet using the ID and password
sent to you shortly after the completion of
your acquaintance call.
The Response Center will then unlock your
vehicle with the remote door unlocking
feature.
220
The SOS button will flash and the message
Connecting call will appear in the multifunction display to indicate receipt of the door unlock
command.
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center
specialist may attempt to establish voice contact
with the vehicle occupants.
If the trunk recessed handle was pulled for more
than 20 seconds before door unlock authorization was received by the Response Center, you
must wait 15 minutes before pulling the trunk
recessed handle again.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Stolen Vehicle Recovery services
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
왘
Report the incident to the police.
The police will issue a numbered
incident report.
왘
Pass this number on to the
Mercedes-Benz Response Center along
with your password issued to you when
you subscribed to the service.
The Response Center will then attempt
to covertly contact the vehicle’s Tele
Aid system. Once the vehicle is located, the Response Center will contact
the local law enforcement and you. The
vehicle’s location will only be provided
to law enforcement.
i When the anti-theft alarm or the tow-away
alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a call
is initiated automatically to the Response
Center. See anti-theft alarm system (컄 page 92)
and tow-away alarm (컄 page 94).
Garage door opener
The integrated remote control is capable of
operating up to three separately controlled
devices. It provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held remote controls used to operate devices such as
garage door openers, gate openers, or
other devices compatible with HomeLink®
or some other systems.
Before the integrated remote control can
be used, it must be programmed to the garage door opener, gate operator or other
device you wish to operate. See the following instructions for programming
information.
Interior rear view mirror with integrated remote control
1
Indicator lamp
2 3 4 Signal transmitter button
Needed for programming (not part of
vehicle equipment):
5
Hand-held remote control of garage door opener, gate operator
or other device
6
Hand-held remote control
button
221
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning!
G
Before programming the integrated remote
control to a garage door opener or gate
operator, make sure people and objects are
out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage. When programming
a garage door opener, the door moves up or
down. When programming a gate operator,
the gate opens or closes.
Do not use the integrated remote control
with any garage door opener that lacks
safety stop and reverse features as required
by U.S. federal safety standards (this
includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door that cannot detect an object
- signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U.S. federal safety
standards.
222
When programming a garage door opener, it
is advised to park the vehicle outside the
garage.
Do not run the engine while programming
the integrated remote control. Inhalation of
exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All
gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and
possible death.
Programming the integrated remote
control
Step 1:
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
Step 2:
왘
If you have previously programmed a
signal transmitter button and wish to
retain its programming, proceed to
step 3.
If you are programming the integrated
remote control for the first time, press
and hold the two outer signal transmitter buttons 2 and 4 and release
them only when indicator lamp 1
begins to flash after approximately
20 seconds (do not hold the button for
longer than 30 seconds). This procedure erases any previous settings for
all three channels and initializes the
memory.
If you later wish to program a second
and/or third hand-held transmitter to
the remaining two signal transmitter
buttons, do not repeat this step and
begin directly with step 3.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Step 3:
Step 5:
Rolling code programming
왘
왘
To train a garage door opener (or other
rolling code devices) with the rolling code
feature, follow these instructions after
completing the “Programming” portion
(steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second
person may make the following training
procedures quicker and easier.)
Hold the end of hand-held remote
control 5 of the device you wish to
train approximately 2 to 5 in
(5 to12 cm) away from the signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) to be
programmed, while keeping indicator
lamp 1 in view.
Step 6:
왘
Step 4:
왘
Using both hands, simultaneously
press hand-held remote control
button 6 and the desired signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not
release the buttons until step 5 is
completed.
Indicator lamp 1 will flash, first slowly
and then rapidly.
i Indicator lamp 1 flashes immediately the
first time the signal transmitter button is programmed. If this button has already been
programmed, the indicator lamp will only start
flashing after 20 seconds.
After indicator lamp 1 changes from a
slow to a rapidly flashing light, release
the hand-held remote control button
and the signal transmitter button.
Press and hold the just-trained signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) and
observe indicator lamp 1.
If the indicator lamp 1 stays on
constantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when
the respective signal transmitter
button (2, 3 or 4) is pressed and
released.
i If indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly for about
2 seconds and then turns to a constant light,
continue with programming steps 8 through 12
as your garage door opener may be equipped
with the “rolling code” feature.
Step 8:
왘
Locate “training” button on the garage
door opener motor head unit.
Exact location and color of the button
may vary by garage door opener brand.
Depending on manufacturer, the
“training” button may also be referred
to as “learn”or “smart” button. If there
is difficulty locating the transmitting
button, refer to the garage door opener
Operator’s Manual.
컄컄
Step 7:
왘
To program the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.
223
Controls in detail
Useful features
컄컄Step
왘
9:
Press the “training” button on the garage door opener motor head unit.
Step 12:
Step 4:
왘
왘
Press and hold the signal transmitter
button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release
this button until it has been successfully trained.
왘
While still holding down the signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4),
“cycle” your hand-held remote control
button 6 as follows: Press and hold
button 6 for 2 seconds, then release
it for 2 seconds, and again press and
hold it for 2 seconds. Repeat this sequence on the hand-held remote control until the frequency signal has been
learned. Upon successful training, indicator lamp 1 will flash slowly and then
rapidly after several seconds.
왘
Proceed with programming step 5 and
step 6 to complete.
The “training light” is activated.
You have 30 seconds to initiate the
following step.
Step 10:
왘
Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
hold for 2 seconds and release the
programmed signal transmitter button
(2, 3 or 4).
Step 11:
왘
Press, hold for 2 seconds and release
same signal transmitter button a
second time to complete the training
process.
i Some garage door openers (or other rolling
code equipped devices) may require you to
press, hold for 2 seconds and release the same
signal transmitter button a third time to
complete the training process.
224
Confirm the garage door operation by
pressing the programmed signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).
Step 13:
왘
To program the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.
Gate operator/Canadian programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission
which may not be long enough for the
integrated signal transmitter to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to “time-out” in the same
manner.
If you live in Canada or if you are having
difficulties programming a gate operator
(regardless of where you live) by using the
programming procedures, replace step 4
with the following:
Controls in detail
Useful features
i Upon completion of programming the inte-
Operation of integrated remote control
Programming tips
grated remote control, make sure you retain the
hand-held remote control that came with the garage door opener, gate operator or other device.
You may need it for use in other vehicles, for future programming of an integrated remote control, or simply for continued use as a hand-held
remote control to operate the respective device
in other situations.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
Select and press the appropriate integrated signal transmitter button (2,
3 or 4) to activate the remote
controlled device.
If you are having difficulty programming
the integrated remote control, here are
some helpful tips:
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
Press and hold the desired signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).
Do not release the button.
왘
Indicator lamp 1 will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the
signal transmitter button, proceed with
programming starting with step 3.
Check the frequency of the hand-held
remote control 5 (typically located on
the reverse side of the remote). The integrated remote control is compatible
with radio-frequency devices operating
between 280-390 MHz.
앫
Put a new battery in hand-held remote
control 5. This will increase the likelihood of the hand-held remote control
sending a faster and more accurate signal to the integrated remote control.
앫
While performing step 3, hold
hand-held remote control 5 at different lengths and angles from the signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) you
are programming. Attempt varying
angles at the distance of 2 to 5 in
(5 to 12 cm) away or the same angle at
varying distances.
The integrated remote control transmitter continues to send the signal as
long as the button is pressed – up to
20 seconds.
Reprogramming a single signal
transmitter button
To program a device using a signal transmitter button previously trained, follow
these steps:
앫
Erasing the integrated remote control
memory
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
Simultaneously press and hold outer
signal transmitter buttons 2 and 4,
for approximately 20 seconds, until
indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly. Do
not hold for longer than 30 seconds.
The codes of all three channels are
erased.
i If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of all
three channels.
225
Controls in detail
Useful features
앫
앫
If another hand-held remote control is
available for the same device, try the
programming steps again using that
other hand-held remote control. Make
sure new batteries are in the hand-held
remote control before beginning the
procedure.
Straighten the antenna wire from the
garage door opener assembly. This
may help improve transmitting and/or
receiving signals.
i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
i Certain types of garage door openers are in- i Canada only:
compatible with the integrated remote control. If
you should experience further difficulties with
programming the integrated remote control,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or
call Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or
Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
226
Floormats*
Warning!
G
When you are using floormats, make sure
there is enough clearance and that the
floormats are securely fastened.
Floormats must always be securely fastened
using eyelets 1 and retainer pins 2.
Before driving off, check that the floormats
are securely in place and adjust them if
necessary. A loose floormat could slip and
hinder proper functioning of the pedals.
Do not place several floormats on top of
each other as this may impair pedal
movement.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Installing
Removing
Floormats* (Only Mercedes-Benz SLR
McLaren 722 Edition)
Warning!
G
Because of the carbon fiber the footwell
could be slippery when wet. Be careful when
entering/exiting the vehicle with wet shoe
soles, you could slip on it.
Example driver’s side
왘
Pull the floormats off retainers pins.
1 Eyelet
2 Retainer pins
왘
Remove the floormat.
왘
Lay down the floormat.
왘
Press eyelets 1 onto retainers pins 2
in direction of arrow.
When you are using floormats, make sure
there is enough clearance and that the
floormats are securely fastened.
Floormats must always be securely fastened
using eyelets 1 and retainer pins 2.
Before driving off, check that the floormats
are securely in place and adjust them if
necessary. A loose floormat could slip and
hinder proper functioning of the pedals.
Do not place several floormats on top of
each other as this may impair pedal
movement.
227
Controls in detail
Useful features
! To avoid damage to the carbon fiber surface
Removing
Dust cover
please make sure your shoe soles are free of
hard particles (e.g. stones, glass) and avoid the
use of small surface heels when driving the
vehicle.
Warning!
Allow the engine to cool down completely
before slipping the dust cover on your vehicle. Otherwise you could be seriously
burned when coming into contact with the
hot exhaust system.
Installing
왘
Pull the floormats off retainers pins.
왘
Remove the floormat.
! To avoid damage to the vehicle and the dust
cover, observe the following:
앫
Use the dust cover only when the vehicle is
garaged.
앫
Cover the vehicle only when the engine has
cooled down completely.
앫
The vehicle as well as the dust cover must be
dry before slipping the dust cover on the
vehicle.
앫
Make sure the dust cover is clean and dry
before inserting it in the bag provided with
the dust cover.
Example driver’s side
1 Eyelet
2 Retainer pins
왘
Lay down the floormat.
왘
Press eyelets 1 onto retainers pins 2
in direction of arrow.
G
i Clean the dust cover according to the care
label on the inside of the dust cover.
228
Controls in detail
Useful features
Slipping dust cover on/off
왘
Place the rolled-up dust cover with its
dark grey side facing downwards on
the vehicle roof.
Make sure the FRONT label is facing
towards the front of the vehicle.
왘
Roll the side that is labelled FRONT
over the hood.
왘
Roll the rear part over the tail end of
the vehicle.
왘
On the rear right, pull down the dust
cover below the bumper.
왘
Unfold the dust cover.
왘
Pull down the dust cover on the right
side of the vehicle.
왘
On the front right, pull down the dust
cover below the bumper.
왘
On the rear left, pull down the dust
cover below the bumper.
왘
Pull down the dust cover on the left
side of the vehicle.
왘
On the front left, pull down the dust
cover below the bumper.
왘
To remove the dust cover, follow the
above steps in reverse order.
229
Controls in detail
Useful features
Roof and trunk lid racks
Warning!
G
This vehicle has not been designed to
accommodate any type of roof or trunk lid
rack. Therefore do not fit such accessories.
Otherwise the rack could fall off and this
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
! Do not use any type of roof or trunk lid rack.
Otherwise you will damage the bodywork or
paintwork of your SLR.
230
231
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Trunk
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
In the “Operation” section you will find
detailed information on operating, maintaining and caring for your vehicle.
234
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle
during the break-in period, the more satisfied you will be with its performance later
on. You should therefore observe the following for the first 1000 miles (1500 km):
앫
Do not attempt to slow the vehicle
down by shifting to a lower gear using
the gear selector lever.
앫
Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when
driving at moderate speeds (for hill
driving).
앫
Drive at varying but moderate road and
engine speeds.
앫
Do not drive faster than 150 mph
(240 km/h).
After 1000 miles (1500 km), you may gradually bring the vehicle up to full road and
engine speed.
앫
Break in new tires for the first
100 miles (160 km), therefore avoid
high-speed cornering. Do not exceed a
speed of 125 mph (200 km/h).
All of the above instructions also apply
when driving the first 1000 miles
(1500 km) after the engine or the rear
differential has been replaced.
앫
Do not drive at engine speeds above
4500 rpm.
i Always obey applicable speed limits.
앫
Try to avoid heavy load on the engine
(driving at full throttle) and driving at
high engine speeds (maximum of 2/3
of top speed of each gear) during this
break-in period.
앫
Avoid accelerating by kick-down.
앫
Change gears in good time.
Operation
Driving instructions
왔 Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel
Fuel consumption, to a great extent,
depends on driving habits and operating
conditions.
To save fuel you should:
앫
Keep tires at the recommended tire
inflation pressures.
앫
Remove unnecessary loads.
앫
Allow engine to warm up under low
load use.
앫
Avoid frequent acceleration and
deceleration.
앫
Have all maintenance work performed
at the intervals specified in the
Maintenance Booklet and as required
by the maintenance service display.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Drinking and driving
Warning!
Pedals
G
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs
and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or
drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions
and judgment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal
accident are greatly increased when you
drink or take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or
taking drugs.
Warning!
G
Make sure that absolutely no objects are obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obstacles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
the footwell, make sure that the pedals still
have sufficient clearance.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
the objects could get caught between the
pedals. You could then no longer brake or
accelerate. This could lead to accidents
and/or injury.
Fuel consumption is also increased by
driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go
traffic, on short trips and in hilly area.
235
Operation
Driving instructions
Power assistance
Warning!
G
The brake system requires electrical energy
for operation.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply
or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. In such a case, the
red brake warning lamp (컄 page 303) and
warning messages (컄 page 314) in the instrument cluster come on while driving. To
brake, the driver must then apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much further to obtain the
expected braking effect. If necessary, apply
full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes are
only applied to the front wheels. Stopping
distance is increased! If there is a malfunction in the electro-hydraulic brake system,
we recommend that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the ground using
flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly
equipment.
236
A tow bar must be used if circumstances do
not permit the use of the recommended
towing methods and the vehicle requires
towing with all four wheels on the ground.
Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is only permissible for distances
up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more information, see “Towing the vehicle”
(컄 page 370).
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle.
Brakes
Warning!
G
After driving in heavy rain for some time
without applying the brakes or through water deep enough to wet brake components,
the first braking action may be somewhat
reduced and increased pedal pressure may
be necessary to obtain expected braking
effect. Maintain a safe distance from
vehicles in front.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
cause excessive and premature wear of the
brake pads.
It can also result in the brakes overheating
thereby significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an
accident.
Operation
Driving instructions
! Because the ESP® operates automatically,
i The brake system is designed to decelerate
the engine must be shut off (SmartKey in starter
switch position 0 or 1) when
your SLR from high speeds at the best possible
rate. Depending on the applied brake force,
speed, and ambient conditions, the brake system may produce a squeak-type noise when you
apply the brakes at a moderate rate, e.g. at city
traffic. If you experience this noise, you should
occasionally test the effectiveness of the brakes
by applying above-normal braking pressure at
high speeds. Please perform this braking procedure three times. This will also enhance the grip
of the brake pads. If the noise continuous,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
the parking brake is being tested on a brake
test dynamometer
앫
the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised
Active braking action through the ESP® may
otherwise seriously damage the brake system
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after
driving on wet road surfaces (particularly
salted roads), it is advisable to brake the
vehicle with considerable force prior to
parking. The heat generated serves to dry
the brakes.
Warning!
G
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking
maneuvers.
Refer to the description of the Brake Assist
System (BAS) (컄 page 83).
If the parking brake is released and the red
brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster stays on, there is a malfunction in the
electro-hydraulic brake system
(컄 page 303) or the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is too low.
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
be the reason for low brake fluid in the
reservoir.
The brake fluid level in the reservoir may
be too low if the brake warning lamp in the
instrument cluster comes on and a warning sounds although the parking brake is
released (컄 page 303). Observe additional
messages that may appear in the
multifunction display (컄 page 330).
Have the brake system inspected
immediately. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
All checks and service work on the brake
system should be carried out by qualified
technicians only. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
237
Operation
Driving instructions
Only install brake pads and brake fluid
recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
Warning!
G
If other than recommended brake pads are
installed, or other than recommended brake
fluid is used, the braking properties of the
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
safe braking is substantially impaired. This
could result in an accident.
Be certain to read and observe the warning
notices on brake pad replacement
(컄 page 88).
! When driving down long and steep grades,
relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a
lower gear to use the engine’s braking power.
This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and
reduces brake pad wear.
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive
on for some time, rather than to park immediately, so the air stream will cool down
the brakes faster.
238
High performance driving
The rate of wear of individual brake system
components, such as brake pads or disks,
depends on your driving style and the conditions under which you operate the vehicle.
It is therefore not possible to give a generally applicable service life. High performance driving, such as driving on closed
circuit race tracks or an aggressive driving
style, will cause the brakes to wear more
quickly.
i Please contact your PLM or any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center before operating the
vehicle under such demanding operating conditions for more information.
Warning!
G
Repetitive excessive load on the brake
system may particularly cause the brake
system to overheat and can thus reduce the
braking power, or even cause brake system
components to fail due to increased wear.
You could lose control of the vehicle and
cause an accident. Installation and examination of brake system assemblies requires
specialist knowledge. Therefore, after high
performance driving, have the brake system
checked and maintained by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Operation
Driving instructions
Driving off
Parking
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after
driving off. Perform this procedure only
when the road is clear of other traffic.
Warning!
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
place full load on the engine until the
operating temperature has been reached
(컄 page 307).
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
! When driving off on a slippery surface, do
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended
period with the ESP® switched off. Doing so may
cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
To reduce the risk of personal injury or
damage to the vehicle drivetrain as a result
of vehicle movement, before turning off the
engine and leaving the vehicle always:
! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator
pedal and applying the brakes reduces engine
performance and causes premature brake and
drivetrain wear.
G
앫
Keep right foot on brake pedal.
앫
Pull the parking brake lever up as many
notches as possible.
앫
Move the gear selector lever to park
position P.
앫
Slowly release brake pedal.
앫
When parked on an incline, turn front
wheels towards the road curb.
앫
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 and remove.
앫
Take the SmartKey with you and lock
vehicle when leaving.
239
Operation
Driving instructions
Tires
Warning!
The treadwear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.
G
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred,
you should turn on the hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from
the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or tire
dealer for repairs.
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and
become visible at a tread depth of
approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which
point the tire is considered worn and
should be replaced.
240
Warning!
G
Although the applicable federal motor
vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be
worn when the treadwear indicators (TWI)
become visible at approximately 1/16 in
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not
allow your tires to wear down to that level.
As tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm),
the adhesion properties on a wet road are
sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
Have worn tires replaced in pairs (front pair
or rear pair). Otherwise the driving stability
of the vehicle will be adversely affected.
Specified tire inflation pressures must be
maintained. This applies particularly if the
tires are subjected to high loads (e.g. high
speeds, heavy loads, high ambient
temperatures).
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire or driving at high
speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
! A wheel change should only be carried out
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Otherwise there is a danger of damaging the vehicle by
jacking it up incorrectly.
For more information, see “Tires and
wheels” (컄 page 258).
Operation
Driving instructions
Hydroplaning
Depending on the depth of the water layer
on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even
at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce
vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
road and apply brakes cautiously in the
rain.
Tire traction
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or
icy road is always lower than on a dry road.
You should pay particular attention to the
condition of the road whenever the outside
temperatures are close to the freezing
point.
Warning!
G
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
will be substantially reduced. Under such
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
with extreme caution.
Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires
(컄 page 290) with a minimum tread depth
of approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four
wheels for the winter season to ensure
normal balanced handling characteristics.
On packed snow, they can reduce your
stopping distance compared to summer
tires. Stopping distance, however, is still
considerably greater than when the road is
not covered with snow or ice. Exercise
appropriate caution.
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may
cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Tire speed rating
Regardless of the tire speed rating, local
speed limits should be obeyed. Use
prudent driving speeds appropriate to
prevailing conditions.
Warning!
G
Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire
failure, causing loss of vehicle control and
possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“(Y)”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of over 186 mph (300 km/h).
i For information on tire speed rating for winter tires, see “Winter tires*” (컄 page 290).
For additional general information on tire speed
markings on tire sidewall, see “Tire speed rating”
(컄 page 276).
241
Operation
Driving instructions
Winter driving instructions
The most important rule for slippery or icy
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
system under such conditions.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
move gear selector lever to neutral
position N. Try to keep the vehicle under
control by corrective steering action.
i For information on driving with snow chains,
Road salts and chemicals can adversely
affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
force may become necessary to produce
the normal braking effect.
Depressing the brake pedal periodically
when traveling at length on salt-strewn
roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking
efficiency back to normal.
If the vehicle is parked after being driven
on salt-treated roads, the braking
efficiency should be tested as soon as
possible after driving is resumed.
Warning!
G
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe
and from around the vehicle with the engine
running. Otherwise deadly carbon monoxide
(CO) gases may enter vehicle interior
resulting in unconsciousness and death.
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
open a window slightly on the side of the
vehicle not facing the wind.
see “Snow chains” (컄 page 291).
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of control loss.
Warning!
G
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking
maneuvers.
Warning!
G
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the
freezing point do not guarantee that the
road surface is free of ice.
For more information, see “Winter driving”
(컄 page 290).
242
Operation
Driving instructions
Standing water
! Do not drive through flooded areas or water
of unknown depth. Before driving through water,
determine its depth. Never accelerate before
driving into water. The bow wave could force
water into the engine and auxiliary equipment,
thus damaging them.
If you must drive through standing water, drive
slowly to prevent water from entering the passenger compartment or the engine compartment. Water in these areas could cause damage
to electrical components or wiring of the engine
or transmission, or could result in water being ingested by the engine through the air intake causing severe internal engine damage. Any such
damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Control and operation of radio
transmitters
Passenger compartment
Warning!
G
Radio and telephone
Always fasten items being carried as
securely as possible.
Warning!
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
Please do not forget that your primary
responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely.
Only operate the radio or telephone1 if road,
weather and traffic conditions permit.
G
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second.
The trunk is the preferred place to carry
objects.
Driving abroad
1
Observe all legal requirements.
Abroad, there is an extensive
Mercedes-Benz service network at your
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas
which are not listed in the index of your
Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you
should request pertinent information from
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
243
Operation
Driving instructions
Telephones and two-way radios
Catalytic converter
Warning!
Warning!
G
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system,
possibly resulting in an accident and
personal injury.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable
telephone or a citizens band unit should
only be used inside the vehicle if they are
connected to an antenna that is installed
on the outside of the vehicle.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation
instructions regarding use of an external
antenna.
244
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with
monolithic-type catalytic converters, an
important element in conjunction with the
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial
control of the pollutants in the exhaust
emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper
operating condition by following our
recommended maintenance instructions
as outlined in your Maintenance Booklet.
! To prevent damage to the catalytic
converters, only use premium unleaded gasoline
in this vehicle.
Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation
should be repaired promptly. Otherwise excessive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic
converter, causing it to overheat and potentially
start a fire.
G
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or
operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves
can come into contact with the hot exhaust
system, as these materials could be ignited
and cause a vehicle fire.
Warning!
G
The exhaust areas on the engine hood and
between the doors and front wheels get very
hot. Avoid contact with them, otherwise
there is the risk of severe burns.
Operation
Driving instructions
Emission control
Warning!
Certain systems of the engine serve to
keep the toxic components of the exhaust
gases within permissible limits required by
law.
These systems, of course, will function
properly only when maintained strictly
according to factory specifications. Any
adjustments on the engine should,
therefore, be carried out only by qualified
Mercedes-Benz Center authorized technicians. Engine adjustments should not be
altered in any way. Moreover, the specified
service jobs must be carried out regularly
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing
requirements. For details refer to the
Maintenance Booklet.
G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
unconsciousness and possible death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one
window fully open at all times.
Coolant temperature
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant
temperature may rise close to
approximately 248°F (120°C).
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature over 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious
engine damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
245
Operation
Driving instructions
Warning!
G
앫
Driving when your engine is overheated
can cause some fluids, which may have
leaked into the engine compartment, to
catch fire. You could be seriously
burned.
앫
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns which can occur
just by opening the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
246
Operation
At the gas station
왔 At the gas station
Refueling
Warning!
i In case that the central locking system does
G
not release the fuel filler flap, or the opening
mechanism is clamping, notify Roadside Assistance or an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
It burns violently and can cause serious
personal injury.
The fuel filler flap is located on the
right-hand side of the vehicle towards the
rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with
the SmartKey automatically locks/unlocks
the fuel filler flap.
To prevent fuel vapors from escaping
into open air, fully insert filler nozzle
unit.
minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91 (average
of 96 RON/86 MON). Information on gasoline
quality can normally be found on the fuel pump.
왘
Turn off the engine before refueling.
Direct skin contact with fuels and the inhalation of fuel vapors can damage your
health.
Take off cap and set it in the recess on
the fuel filler flap.
i Only use premium unleaded gasoline with a
Never allow sparks, flame or smoking
materials near gasoline!
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish
all smoking materials.
왘
Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle
unit cuts out – do not top off or
overfill.
G
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
Warning!
왘
Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at
the point indicated by arrow.
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create
pressure in the system which could cause a
gas discharge. This could cause the gas to
spray back out when removing the fuel
pump nozzle, which could cause personal
injury.
The fuel filler flap opens.
왘
Turn fuel cap counterclockwise and
hold on to it until possible pressure is
released.
왘
Replace fuel cap by turning it clockwise
until it audibly engages.
컄컄
247
Operation
At the gas station
컄컄i Make sure to close the fuel filler flap before
Check regularly and before a long trip
locking your vehicle as the flap locking pin prevents closing after you have locked the vehicle.
왘
For normal replenishing, use water (potable water quality). For more information,
see “Coolant” (컄 page 255) and see “Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.”
(컄 page 389).
Close the fuel filler flap until you hear
the latch close shut.
i More information on gasoline can be found
in the Factory Approved Service Products
pamphlet (USA only).
Engine oil level
For more information on engine oil level,
see “Engine oil” (컄 page 253).
Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open
can cause the ú malfunction indicator lamp
(USA only) or the ± malfunction indicator
lamp (Canada only) to illuminate.
Brake fluid
For more information, see “Practical hints”
(컄 page 305).
1 Coolant
2 Engine oil
3 Brake fluid
i Opening the hood, see (컄 page 250).
248
Coolant
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or
below, have the brake system checked for brake
pad thickness and leaks immediately. Notify an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
Do not add brake fluid as this will not solve the
problem. For more information, see “Practical
hints” (컄 page 303).
Operation
At the gas station
Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system
For more information on filling up the
washer reservoir, see “Windshield washer
system and headlamp cleaning system”
(컄 page 257).
Vehicle lighting
Tire inflation pressure
Check function and cleanliness. For more
information on replacing light bulbs, see
“Replacing bulbs” (컄 page 359).
For more information on tire inflation pressure, see “Checking tire inflation pressure
manually” (컄 page 269).
For more information on exterior lamps,
see “Exterior lamp switch” (컄 page 106).
249
Operation
Engine compartment
Hood
Opening
Warning!
Warning!
G
Do not pull the release lever while the
vehicle is in motion. Otherwise the hood
could be forced open by passing air flow.
This could cause the hood to come loose
and injure you and/or others.
Warning!
Warning!
If you see flames or smoke coming from the
engine compartment, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the engine is
overheated, do not open the hood. Move
away from the vehicle and do not open the
hood until the engine has cooled. If necessary, call the fire department.
G
Warning!
The exhaust areas on the engine hood and
between the doors and front wheels get very
hot. Avoid contact with them, otherwise
there is the risk of severe burns.
250
G
G
You could be injured when the hood is open
– even when the engine is turned off.
Parts of the engine can become very hot. To
prevent burns, let the engine cool off completely before touching any components on
the vehicle. Comply with all relevant safety
precautions.
G
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running.
The radiator fan may also start at any time
automatically, even after the SmartKey has
been removed from the starter switch. Stay
clear of fan blades.
Warning!
G
The engine is equipped with a transistorized
ignition system. Because of the high voltage
it is dangerous to touch any components
(ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic socket) of the ignition system
앫
with the engine running
앫
while starting the engine
앫
if ignition is “on” and the engine is
turned manually
Operation
Engine compartment
! Make sure the windshield wipers are not
folded away from the windshield. Otherwise the
windshield wipers or the hood could be damaged.
i If it was not possible to release the hood,
pull the release lever downwards more firmly.
Make sure there is sufficient clearance before
opening the hood. A minimum clearance in front
of the vehicle of 3/4 ft (25 cm) is required.
The release lever is located in the driver’s
footwell.
왘
Pull the hood towards you to the stop. 컄컄
2 Hood latch
The hood latches are located in the upper
air intake next to the headlamp units.
왘
Pull the hood latches 2.
This completes the second stage.
1 Release lever
The hood folding mechanism is disengaged
in two stages.
왘
Pull release lever 1 downwards.
This completes the first stage.
251
Operation
Engine compartment
컄컄
왘
Closing
Warning!
G
When closing the hood, use extreme caution
not to catch hand or fingers. Be careful that
you do not close the hood on anyone.
왘
Press the front part of the hood.
The hood opens and will automatically
be held in position by gas-filled spring
struts.
Make sure the hood is securely engaged before driving. Do not continue driving if the
hood can no longer engage after an accident
for example. The hood could otherwise
come loose while the vehicle is in motion
and injure you and/or others.
Pull the hood upwards in the center,
against the resistance of the gas-filled
spring struts.
! Make sure the rollers at the rear of the hood
are engaged and the guide pins line up with the
guide holes. Otherwise the hood may be
damaged.
왘
! Make sure there is sufficient clearance before opening the hood. A minimum overhead
clearance of 6.6 ft (2.0 m) is required.
Hold the front center part of the hood
with both hands and push it backwards. After pushing the hood backwards about half-way, you will feel the
hood passing a crest and the resulting
force pulling the hood away from you.
At that point, let go of the hood and let
it fall onto the latches.
The hood should now be locked and
entirely closed.
왘
Check that the hood is properly closed.
If the hood is not properly engaged,
repeat the closing procedure.
252
Operation
Engine compartment
Engine oil
The amount of oil your engine needs will
depend on a number of factors, including
driving style. Higher oil consumption can
occur when
앫
the vehicle is new
앫
the vehicle is driven frequently at
higher engine speeds
Engine oil consumption checks should only
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
Oil consumption of the SLR is slightly
higher than other vehicles. Please check
the engine oil level frequently.
! Do not use any special lubricant additives,
as these may damage the drive assemblies.
Using special additives not approved by
Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Checking the engine oil level
When checking the oil level,
앫
the vehicle must be parked on level
ground
앫
the engine must be at normal operating
temperature (min. 80°C)
왘
Wait for at least 30 seconds with
engine still at idle.
왘
Measure engine oil level with engine
still at idle.
The oil dipstick and the cap are located on
the passenger side in the engine
compartment.
1 Oil dipstick
2 Filler cap
왘
Pull out oil dipstick 1 and wipe it off.
왘
Reinsert the oil dipstick fully into the
guide.
왘
Pull out the oil dipstick again after
3 seconds.
253
컄컄
Operation
Engine compartment
컄컄
왘
Adding engine oil
Warning!
G
The filler cap on the filler neck could be hot.
Use a rag when you unscrew the filler cap.
Otherwise you could burn yourself.
Oil dipstick
The engine oil level is correct when it is
between lower mark (min) and upper mark
(max) of the oil dipstick.
왘
Top up the engine oil if necessary.
i The filling quantity between the upper and
lower marks on the oil dipstick is approximately
2.1 US qt (2.0 l).
! Only use approved engine oils and oil filters
required for vehicles with Maintenance System.
For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Approved Service
Products pamphlet (USA only) in your vehicle
literature portfolio, or contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Using engine oils and oil filters of specification
other than those expressly required for the Maintenance System, or changing of oil and oil filter
at change intervals longer than those called for
by the Maintenance System will result in engine
or emission control system damage not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
왘
254
Using a rag, unscrew filler cap 2 from
filler neck.
Add engine oil as required. Be careful
not to overfill with oil.
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
entering the ground or water.
! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off.
It could cause damage to the engine or emission
control system not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
왘
Screw the filler cap back on filler neck.
You will find further information about engine oil in the “Technical data” section
(컄 page 391) and (컄 page 389).
Transmission fluid level
The transmission fluid level does not need
to be checked. If you notice transmission
fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,
have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
check the transmission.
Operation
Engine compartment
Coolant
앫
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check
the coolant level, the vehicle must be
parked on level ground and the engine
must be cool.
앫
The coolant expansion tank is located on
the passenger side of the engine
compartment.
Warning!
Using a rag, slowly open the cap
approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess
pressure. If opened immediately, scalding hot fluid and steam will be blown out
under pressure.
앫
Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if coolant temperature is
above 158°F (70°C). Allow engine to
cool down before removing cap. The
coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and
is under pressure.
앫
for cold coolant: reaches the upper
mark on the bracing rib of the expansion tank (arrow)
앫
for warm coolant: is approximately
0.4 in (1 cm) higher
왘
Add coolant as required.
왘
Replace and tighten cap.
For more information, see “Coolants”
(컄 page 394).
In order to avoid potentially serious burns:
Use extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system,
or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the coolant is overheated.
Continue turning the cap to the left and
remove it.
The coolant level is correct if the level
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene
glycol which may burn if it comes into
contact with hot engine parts.
G
앫
왘
1 Expansion tank
왘
Using a rag, turn cap slowly approximately one half turn to the left to
release any excess pressure.
255
Operation
Trunk
Batteries
G
Warning!
Your vehicle is equipped with two
batteries:
앫
Starter battery in the trunk
앫
Consumer battery in the trunk
Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries.
Risk of explosion.
Keep children away.
These batteries should always be sufficiently charged in order to achieve its rated service life. A flat battery must be fully
recharged. Refer to Maintenance Booklet
for battery maintenance intervals.
Fire, open flames and smoking
are prohibited when handling
batteries. Avoid creating sparks.
If you use your vehicle mostly for
short-distance trips, you will need to have
the battery charge checked more
frequently.
Battery acid is caustic. Do not
allow it to come into contact
with skin, eyes or clothing.
When replacing batteries, always use batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz. Have
this work only carried out by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
for an extended period of time, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
steps you need to observe.
256
Wear eye protection.
Rinse any acid spills immediately with clear water. Contact a
physician if necessary.
Wear suitable protective clothing, especially gloves, apron and
faceguard.
Follow the instructions in this
Operator’s Manual.
! You must not jump start the vehicle, otherwise the vehicle electrical systems could be
damaged.
For more information on battery maintenance, see “Batteries” (컄 page 367).
Operation
Trunk
Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system
Warning!
G
Fluid for the windshield washer system and
the headlamp cleaning system is supplied
from the windshield washer reservoir. It
has a capacity of approximately
7.4 US qt (7 l).
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze
on hot engine parts, because it may ignite
and burn. You could be seriously burned.
During all seasons, add MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” to
water. Premix the windshield washer fluid
in a suitable container.
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the
trunk underneath the floor on the left hand
side.
왘
Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate and water (or
commercially available premixed
windshield washer solvent/antifreeze,
depending on ambient temperatures).
! Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
where temperatures may fall below freezing
point. Failure to do so could result in damage to
the washer system/reservoir.
! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for
plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can
damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps.
왘
Turn the quick-release fasteners 1
counterclockwise and remove the
cover.
3 Cap for windshield washer reservoir
Opening washer fluid reservoir
왘
Pull up cap 3 by the tab.
Closing washer fluid reservoir
왘
1 Quick-release fasteners
2 Loop
왘
Lift up the interior floor panel by
loop 2.
Press cap 3 on to the filler neck until
it engages fully.
For more information, see “Windshield
washer system and headlamp cleaning
system” (컄 page 397).
257
Operation
Tires and wheels
For safety reasons, only use tires and rims
which have been tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz for use on SLR vehicles.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for information on tested and
recommended rims and tires for summer
and winter operation. They can also offer
advice concerning tire service and
purchase.
Warning!
G
Replace rims or tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the
original part. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for further information. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are
mounted:
앫
The wheel brakes or suspension
components can be damaged.
앫
The operating clearance of the wheels
and the tires may no longer be correct.
258
Warning!
G
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
Have worn or damaged tires replaced in
pairs (front pair or rear pair) an make sure
the tires rotate in the direction specified
(컄 page 261). Otherwise, the driving stability of the vehicle will be adversely affected,
especially when driving at high speeds.
When replacing rims, only use genuine
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
particular rim type. Failure to do so can
result in the bolts loosening and possibly an
accident.
Retreaded tires are not tested or recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous
damage cannot always be recognized on retreads. The operating safety of the vehicle
cannot be assured when such tires are used.
Important guidelines
! A wheel change should only be carried out
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Otherwise there is a danger of damaging the vehicle by
jacking it up incorrectly.
앫
For the first 100 miles (160 km) avoid
high-speed cornering. Do not exceed a
speed of 125 mph (200 km/h).1
앫
Only use sets of tires and rims of the
same type and make.
앫
Tires must be of the correct size for the
rim.
앫
Regularly check the tires and rims for
damage. Dented or bent rims can
cause tire inflation pressure loss and
damage to the tire beads.
앫
If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
inflation pressure and correct as
required.
1
Please always drive carefully and obey applicable
speed limits.
Operation
Tires and wheels
앫
앫
Do not allow your tires to wear down
too far. Adhesion properties on wet
roads are sharply reduced at tread
depths of less than 1/8 in (3 mm).
When replacing individual tires, you
should mount new tires on the front
wheels first (on vehicles with
same-sized wheels all around).
Tire care and maintenance
Warning!
Tire inspection
G
Regularly check the tires for damage. Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure
loss. As a result, you could lose control of
your vehicle.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
Have worn or damaged tires replaced in
pairs (front pair or rear pair) an make sure
the tires rotate in the direction specified
(컄 page 261). Otherwise, the driving stability of the vehicle will be adversely affected,
especially when driving at high speeds.
Regularly check your tire inflation pressure
at least once a month. For more information on checking tire inflation pressure,
see “Recommended tire inflation pressure” (컄 page 267).
Every time you check your tire inflation
pressure, you should also inspect your
tires for the following:
앫
excessive treadwear (컄 page 260)
앫
cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber
앫
bumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in
the tread or side of the tire
Replace the tire if you find any of the above
conditions.
Warning!
G
Have worn or damaged tires replaced in
pairs (front pair or rear pair) an make sure
the tires rotate in the direction specified
(컄 page 261). Otherwise, the driving stability of the vehicle will be adversely affected,
especially when driving at high speeds.
259
Operation
Tires and wheels
Life of tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including but not limited to:
앫
Driving style
앫
Tire inflation pressure
앫
Distance driven
Warning!
Recommended minimum tire tread depth:
G
Tires should be replaced after 6 years,
regardless of the remaining tread.
Tread depth
Do not allow your tires to wear down too
far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are
sharply reduced at tread depths of less
than 1/8 in (3 mm).
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and
become visible at a tread depth of
260
approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which
point the tire is considered worn and
should be replaced.
앫
Summer tires 1/8 in (3 mm)
앫
Winter tires 1/6 in (4 mm)
Warning!
G
Although the applicable federal motor safety
laws consider a tire to be worn when the
treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at
approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires to
wear down to that level. As tread depth
approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion
properties on a wet road are sharply
reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
1 TWI (Tread Wear Indicator)
The treadwear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Storing tires
! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place
with as little exposure to light as possible.
Protect tires from contact with oil, grease and
gasoline.
Cleaning tires
! Never use a round nozzle to power wash
tires. The intense jet of water can result in
damage to the tire.
Direction of rotation
Loading the vehicle
Unidirectional tires offer added advantages, such as better hydroplaning performance. To benefit, however, you must
make sure the tires rotate in the direction
specified.
Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry.
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the
intended direction of rotation (spinning) of
the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Warning!
Warning!
G
Have worn or damaged tires replaced in
pairs (front pair or rear pair) an make sure
the tires rotate in the direction specified
(컄 page 261). Otherwise, the driving stability of the vehicle will be adversely affected,
especially when driving at high speeds.
G
19" turbine-style wheels:
The wheels must be mounted corresponding
to the labelling on the inside of the rim,
where LEFT refers to the left-hand side of
the vehicle and RIGHT to the right-hand side
of the vehicle, both seen in direction of travel. When unidirectional tires are mounted,
make sure that they rotate in the direction
specified. Otherwise, the driving stability of
the vehicle will be adversely affected,
especially when driving at high speeds.
1) The Tire and Loading Information
placard can be found on the driver’s
door B-pillar. This placard tells you important information about the number
of people that can be in the vehicle and
the total weight that can be carried in
the vehicle. It also contains information
on the proper size and recommended
tire inflation pressures for the original
equipment tires on your vehicle.
261
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire and Loading Information
2) The certification label found on the
driver’s door A-pillar (컄 page 378) tells
you about the gross weight capacity of
your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel and cargo. The certification label also tells you about the
front and rear axle weight capacity,
called the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR). The GAWR is the total allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). Never exceed
the GVWR or GAWR for either the front
axle or rear axle.
Warning!
G
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit or vehicle capacity
weight as indicated on the placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
i Data shown on placard example are for
illustration purposes only. Load limit data are
specific to each vehicle and may vary from data
shown in the illustrations below. Refer to placard
on vehicle for actual data specific to your
vehicle.
1 Driver’s door B-pillar
Following is a discussion on how to work
with the information contained on the two
placards with regards to loading your
vehicle.
262
Operation
Tires and wheels
1 Load limit information on the Tire and
Loading Information placard
The placard showing the load limit information is located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
왘
Seating capacity
Steps for determining correct load limit
The seating capacity gives you important
information on the number of occupants
that can be in the vehicle. The Tire and
Loading Information placard showing the
seating capacity is located on the driver’s
door B-pillar (컄 page 262).
The following steps have been developed
as required of all manufacturers under
Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations,
Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic
and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
i Data shown on placard example are for
illustration purposes only. Seating data are
specific to each vehicle and may vary from data
shown in the illustrations below. Refer to placard
on vehicle for actual data specific to your
vehicle.
Step 1
왘
Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on
your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information placard.
Step 2
Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX
lbs.” on this placard.
왘
Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
컄컄
The combined weight of all occupants,
cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load
(if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced in that statement.
1 Seating capacity on the Tire and
Loading Information placard
263
Operation
Tires and wheels
컄컄Step
왘
3
Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.
Step 5
왘
Step 4
왘
The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs and there will
be five 150 lbs passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs).
264
Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in step 4.
Step 6 (if applicable)
왘
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle (컄 page 266).
The following table shows examples on
how to calculate total and cargo load
capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants.
The following examples use a load limit
of 1500 lbs. This is for illustration
purposes only. Make sure you are using
the actual load limit for your vehicle stated
on the vehicle’s placard (컄 page 263).
Operation
Tires and wheels
Example Combined
weight limit
of occupants
and cargo
from placard
Number of Occupants weight
occupants
(driver and
passengers)
Combined
Available cargo/luggage and trailer tongue
weight of all weight (total load limit from placard minus
occupants
combined weight of all occupants)
1
1500 lbs
1
Occupant 1: 175 lbs
175 lbs
1500 lbs - 175 lbs = 1325 lbs
2
1500 lbs
2
Occupant 1: 175 lbs
Occupant 2: 195 lbs
370 lbs
1500 lbs - 370 lbs = 1130 lbs
The higher the weight of all occupants, the
less cargo and luggage load capacity is
available.
For more information, see “Trailer tongue
load” (컄 page 266).
265
Operation
Tires and wheels
Certification label
Even after careful determination of the
combined weight of all occupants, cargo
and the trailer tongue load (if applicable)
(컄 page 266) as to not exceed the permissible load limit, you must make sure that
your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the
front or rear axle. You can obtain the
GVWR and GAWR from the certification label. The certification label can be found on
the driver’s door A-pillar, see “Technical
data” (컄 page 378).
266
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The
total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
all cargo, and the trailer tongue load
(컄 page 266) must never exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The total allowable weight that can be carried by
a single axle (front or rear).
To assure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible weight
limits (GVWR and GAWR for front and rear
axle), have the loaded vehicle (including
driver, passengers and all cargo and, if applicable, trailer fully loaded) weighed on a
suitable commercial scale.
Trailer tongue load
The tongue load of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects
the load you can carry in your vehicle. If a
trailer is towed, the tongue load must be
added to the weight of all occupants riding
and any cargo you are carrying in the
vehicle. The tongue load typically is ten
percent of the trailer weight and
everything loaded in it.
Your Mercedes-Benz has been designed
primarily to carry passengers and their
cargo. Mercedes-Benz does not recommend trailer towing with your vehicle.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Recommended tire inflation pressure
Warning!
G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being
overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
Your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and
Loading Information placard located on
the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 262).
The tire inflation pressure should be
checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires. The tires can be considered cold if the vehicle has been parked
for at least three hours or driven less than
one mile (1.6 km).
Follow recommended cold tire inflation
pressures listed on the Tire and Loading
Information placard on the driver’s door
B-pillar.
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best handling, tread life and
riding comfort.
In addition to the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver’s door B-pillar,
also consult the fuel filler flap for any additional information pertaining to special
driving situations. For more information,
see “Important notes on tire inflation
pressure” (컄 page 268).
1 Tire and Loading Information placard
with recommended cold tire inflation
pressures
The Tire and Loading Information placard
lists the recommended cold tire inflation
pressures for maximum loaded vehicle
weight. The tire inflation pressures listed
apply to the tires installed as original
equipment.
i Data shown on placard example are for illustration purposes only. Tire data are specific to
each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
the illustrations below. Refer to placard on
vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle.
267
Operation
Tires and wheels
Important notes on tire inflation
pressure
Warning!
G
If the tire inflation pressure drops
repeatedly:
앫
Check the tires for punctures from
foreign objects.
앫
Check to see whether air is leaking from
the valves or from around the rim.
Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure
are also increased while driving, depending
on the driving speed and the tire load.
If you will be driving your vehicle at high
speeds of 155 mph (250 km/h) or higher,
where it is legal and conditions allow,
consult the placard on the inside of the fuel
filler flap on how to adjust the cold tire inflation pressure. If you do not adjust the
tire inflation pressure, excessive heat can
build up and result in sudden tire failure.
268
i Driving comfort may be reduced when the
Checking tire inflation pressure
tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the value for
speeds above 155 mph (250 km/h) as specified
on the placard located on the inside of the fuel
filler flap.
Regularly check your tire inflation pressure
at least once a month.
Be sure to readjust the tire inflation
pressure for normal driving speeds. You
should wait until the tires are cold before
adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
Some vehicles may have supplemental tire
inflation pressure information for vehicle
loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition. If such information is provided, it can be found on the placard located
on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
Tire inflation pressure changes by approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of
air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire inflation pressure
where the temperature is different from
the outside temperature.
Check and adjust the tire inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. The tires
can be considered cold if the vehicle has
been parked for at least 3 hours or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
If you check the tire inflation pressure
when the tires are warm (the vehicle has
been driven for several miles or sitting less
than 3 hours), the reading will be
approximately 4 psi (0.3 bar) higher than
the cold reading. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the specified cold tire inflation pressure. Otherwise the tire will be
underinflated.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Warning!
G
Follow recommend tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being
overheated.
Checking tire inflation pressure
manually
Follow the steps below to achieve correct
tire inflation pressure:
Checking tire inflation pressure
electronically with the Tire Pressure
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
i USA only:
왘
Remove the cap from the valve on one
tire.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
왘
Firmly press a tire gauge onto the
valve.
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
왘
Read tire inflation pressure on tire
gauge and check against the recommended tire inflation pressure on the
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar
(컄 page 267). If necessary, add air to
achieve the recommended tire inflation
pressure.
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit or vehicle capacity
weight as indicated on the placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout.
i If you have overfilled the tire, release tire inflation pressure by pushing the metal stem of the
valve with e.g. a tip of a pen. Then recheck the
tire inflation pressure with the tire gauge.
왘
Install the valve cap.
왘
Repeat this procedure for each tire.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
269
Operation
Tires and wheels
The TPMS only functions on wheels that
are equipped with the proper electronic
sensors. It monitors the tire inflation pressure, as selected by the driver, in all four
tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a
decrease in tire inflation pressure in one or
more of the tires.
왘
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the current tire inflation pressures
for each tire appear in the multifunction display.
Tire pressure inquiries are made using the
multifunction display. The present inflation
pressures are displayed only after a few
minutes’ travel time.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
Press button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display
(컄 page 122).
270
i When the message Tire pressure
displayed only after driving a few
minutes appears in the multifunction display,
the individual inflation pressure values are
matched with the tires. The individual values are
displayed after a few minutes driving.
G
It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate
the TPMS on the recommended cold inflation pressure. Underinflated tires affect the
ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
might lose control over the vehicle.
Warning!
i Possible differences between the readings
of a tire inflation pressure gauge of an air hose,
e.g. gas station equipment, and the vehicle’s
control system can occur. The readings issued
by the control system are more precise.
Warning!
G
The TPMS does not indicate a warning for
wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always
adjust tire inflation pressure according to
the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar
(컄 page 267) or, if available, the supplemental tire pressure information on the
inside of the fuel filler flap.
The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due
to a sudden dramatic loss of tire inflation
pressure (e.g. tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In this case bring the vehicle to
a halt by carefully applying the brakes and
avoiding abrupt steering maneuvers.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Warning!
G
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure
label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or the tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if underinflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
i Operating radio transmission equipment
(e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in or
near the vehicle could cause the TPMS to
malfunction.
Reactivating the TPMS
The tire inflation pressure monitor must be
reactivated in the following situations:
앫
if you have changed the tire inflation
pressure
앫
if you have replaced the wheels or tires
앫
if you have installed new wheels or
tires
Warning!
G
It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate
the TPMS on the recommended cold inflation pressure. Underinflated tires affect the
ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
might lose control over the vehicle.
왘
Using the tire placard on the driver’s
door B-pillar (컄 page 267) or, if available, the inside of the fuel filler flap,
make sure the tire inflation pressure of
all four tires is correct.
컄컄
271
Operation
Tires and wheels
컄컄왘
왘
Press button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display
(컄 page 122).
Press button k or j repeatedly
until you see the current tire inflation
pressures for each tire appear in the
multifunction display or the following
message appears in the multifunction
display:
Tire pressure
displayed only
after driving
a few minutes
i If you are transporting a deflated tire and/or
additional wheel sensors in the vehicle, do not
activate the TPMS until
앫
the deflated tire and/or additional wheel
sensors are no longer in the vehicle
앫
you have inflated the tire to the correct tire
inflation pressure
272
왘
Press the reset button on the instrument cluster (컄 page 114).
If you wish to cancel activation:
왘
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
If one of the following messages
appears in the multifunction display:
Monitor current
tire pressure?
왘
Press button ç.
앫
Reactivate tire
pressure monitor
after correcting
tire pressure
앫
Please correct
the tire pressure
Press button æ.
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
Tire pressure monitor
reactivated
The TPMS will now monitor the tire inflation pressure values of all four tires.
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display field:
Tire pressure
displayed only
after driving
a few minutes
This display appears until the individual
tire inflation pressure values are
matched with the tires. The individual
values are then displayed
(컄 page 270).
왘
Check the tire inflation pressures and
correct them if necessary.
왘
Reactivate the TPMS.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Potential problems associated with
underinflated and overinflated tires
Overinflated tires
Underinflated tires
앫
adversely affect handling
characteristics
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
앫
cause uneven tire wear
앫
be more prone to damage from road
hazards
앫
adversely affect ride comfort
앫
increase stopping distance
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
Overinflated tires can:
Underinflated tires can:
앫
cause excessive and uneven tire wear
앫
adversely affect fuel economy
앫
lead to tire failure from being
overheated
앫
adversely affect handling
characteristics
Warning!
Warning!
G
G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being
overheated.
273
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire labeling
Besides tire name (sales designation) and
manufacturer name, a number of markings
can be found on a tire.
Following are some explanations for the
markings on your vehicle’s tires:
1 Uniform Quality Grading Standards
(컄 page 281)
2 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
(컄 page 279)
3 Maximum tire load (컄 page 280)
4 Maximum tire inflation pressure
(컄 page 281)
5 Manufacturer
6 Tire ply material (컄 page 283)
7 Tire size designation, load and speed
rating (컄 page 274)
8 Load identification (컄 page 278)
9 Tire name
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
For more information, see “Rims and tires”
(컄 page 381).
Tire size designation, load and speed
rating
1 Tire width
2 Aspect ratio in %
3 Radial tire code
4 Rim diameter
5 Tire load rating
6 Tire speed rating
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires is specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
274
Operation
Tires and wheels
General:
Aspect ratio
Rim diameter
Depending on the design standards used,
the tire size molded into the sidewall may
have no letter or a letter preceding the tire
size designation.
The aspect ratio 2 (컄 page 274) is the
dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width and is
expressed in percentage. The aspect ratio
is arrived at by dividing section height by
section width.
The rim diameter 4 (컄 page 274) is the
diameter of the bead seat, not the
diameter of the rim edge. Rim diameter is
indicated in inches (in).
No letter preceding the size designation
(as illustrated above): Passenger car tire
based on European design standards.
Letter “P” preceding the size designation:
Passenger car tire based on U.S. design
standards.
Letter “LT” preceding the size designation:
Light Truck tire based on U.S. design
standards.
Letter “T” preceding the size designation:
Temporary spare tires which are high
pressure compact spares designed for
temporary emergency use only.
Tire code
The tire code 3 (컄 page 274) indicates
the tire construction type. The “R” stands
for radial tire type. Letter “D” means diagonal or bias ply construction; letter “B”
means belted-bias ply construction.
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
with a speed capability above 149 mph
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18).
For additional information, see “Tire speed
rating” (컄 page 276).
Tire load rating
The tire load rating 5 (컄 page 274) is a
numerical code associated with the
maximum load a tire can support.
For example, a load rating of 91 corresponds to a maximum load of 1356 lb
(615 kg) the tire is designed to support.
See also “Maximum tire load”
(컄 page 280) where the maximum load associated with the load index is indicated in
kilograms and lb.
Tire width
The tire width 1 (컄 page 274) indicates
the nominal tire width in mm.
275
Operation
Tires and wheels
Warning!
G
The tire load rating must always be at least
half of the GAWR (컄 page 284) of your vehicle. Otherwise tire failure may be the result
which may cause an accident and/or serious injury to you or others.
Always replace rims and tires with the same
designation, manufacturer and type as
shown on the original part.
Warning!
G
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit or vehicle capacity
weight as indicated on the placard located
on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the
tires can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
276
For additional information on tire load
rating, see “Load identification”
(컄 page 278).
i Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 274) and tire
speed rating 6 (컄 page 274) are also referred
to as “service description”.
Tire speed rating
The tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 274)
indicates the approved maximum speed
for the tire.
Warning!
G
Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at speeds greater than the
maximum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire
failure, causing loss of vehicle control and
possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
i Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 274) and tire
speed rating 6 (컄 page 274) are also referred
to as “service description”.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Summer tires
Index
Speed rating
Q
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R
up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
S
up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
T
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
W
up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y
up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
(Y)
above 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR
above 149 mph (240 km/h)
앫
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any
tire with a speed capability above
149 mph (240 km/h) can include a
“ZR” in the size designation (for example: 245/40 ZR18). To determine the
maximum speed capability of the tire,
the service description for the tire must
be referred to. The service description
is comprised of the tire load rating 5
(컄 page 274) and the tire speed
rating 6 (컄 page 274).
If your tire includes “ZR” in the size
designation and no service
description 5 and 6 (컄 page 274) is
given, the tire manufacturer must be
consulted for the maximum speed
capability.
If a service description 5 and 6
(컄 page 274) is given, the speed capability is limited by the speed symbol in
the service description.
Example: 245/40 ZR18 97Y.
In this example, “97Y” is the service
description. The letter “Y” designates
the speed rating and the speed capability of the tire is limited to 186 mph
(300 km/h).
앫
Any tire with a speed capability above
186 mph (300 km/h) must include a
“ZR” in the size designation AND the
service description must be placed in
parenthesis.
Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99Y).
The “(Y)” speed rating in parenthesis
designates the maximum speed capability of the tire as being above
186 mph (300 km/h). Consult the tire
manufacturer for the actual maximum
permissible speed of the tire.
277
Operation
Tires and wheels
All-season and winter tires
Index
Load identification
Speed rating
1
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
1
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
1
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
Q M+S
T M+S
H M+S
No specification given: absence of any text
(like in above example) indicates a
standard load (SL) tire.
V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
1
XL or Extra Load: designates an extra load
(or reinforced) tire.
or M+S.for winter tires
Light Load: designates a light load tire.
i Not all M+S rated tires provide special winter performance. Make sure the tires you use
show M+S and the mountain/snowflake.
marking on the tire sidewall. These tires meet
specific snow traction performance requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association
(RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada
(RAC) and have been designed specifically for
use in snow conditions.
278
In addition to tire load rating, special load
identification 1 may be molded into the
tire sidewall following the letter designating the tire speed rating (컄 page 274).
1 Load identification
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
C, D, E: designates load range associated
with the maximum load a tire can carry at
a specified pressure.
Operation
Tires and wheels
DOT (Department of Transportation)
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
A tire branding symbol 1 (컄 page 279)
which denotes the tire meets requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
U.S. tire regulations require each new tire
manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a
TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire
produced.
The TIN is a unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufactures to notify
purchasers in recall situations or other
safety matters concerning tires and gives
purchasers the means to easily identify
such tires.
The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s
identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type
code” and “Date of manufacture”.
Manufacturer’s identification mark
1 DOT
2 Manufacturer’s identification mark
3 Tire size
4 Tire type code (at the option of the tire
manufacturer)
5 Date of manufacture
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
The manufacturer’s identification mark 2
(컄 page 279) denotes the tire
manufacturer.
New tires have a mark with two symbols.
Retreaded tires have a mark with four symbols. For more information on retreaded
tires, see (컄 page 258).
Tire size
The code 3 (컄 page 279) indicates the
tire size.
279
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire type code
Maximum tire load
Warning!
The code 4 (컄 page 279) may, at the
option of the manufacturer, be used as a
descriptive code for identifying significant
characteristics of the tire.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit or vehicle capacity
weight as indicated on the placard located
on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the
tires can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
Date of manufacture
The date of manufacture 5 (컄 page 279)
identifies the week and year of
manufacture.
The first two figures identify the week,
starting with “01” to represent the first full
week of the calendar year. The second two
figures represent the year.
For example, “3202” represents the 32nd
week of 2002.
280
G
1 Maximum tire load rating
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
The maximum tire load is the maximum
weight the tires are designed to support.
For more information on tire load rating
(컄 page 275).
For information on calculating total and
cargo load capacities (컄 page 263).
Operation
Tires and wheels
Maximum tire inflation pressure
Always follow the recommended tire
inflation pressure (컄 page 267) for proper
tire inflation.
Warning!
G
Never exceed the max. tire inflation
pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
1 Maximum permissible tire inflation
pressure
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
This is the maximum permissible tire
inflation pressure for the tire.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
(U.S. vehicles)
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on three performance
factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being
overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
1 Treadwear
2 Traction
3 Temperature resistance
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
281
Operation
Tires and wheels
Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear Traction Temperature
200
AA
A
All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
282
Treadwear
Traction
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (11/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning!
G
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Warning!
G
Tire ply material
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause
excessive heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
1 Plies in sidewall
2 Plies under tread
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
This marking tells you about the type of
cord and number of plies in the sidewall
and under the tread.
283
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire and loading terminology
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those
standard items which may be replaced) of
automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power
seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that
these items are available as
factory-installed equipment (whether
installed or not).
Bar
DOT (Department of Transportation)
Another metric unit for air pressure. There
are 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi)
to 1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa)
to 1 bar.
A tire branding symbol which denotes the
tire meets requirements of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Bead
The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the
rim.
Cold tire inflation pressure
Air pressure
The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire.
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or
bars.
Aspect ratio
Dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width
expressed in percentage.
284
Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or
driven no more than one mile (1.6 km).
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum
capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so
equipped, air conditioning and additional
optional equipment, but without passengers and cargo.
The GAWR is the maximum permissible
axle weight. The gross vehicle weight on
each axle must never exceed the GAWR for
the front and rear axle indicated on the
certification label located on the driver’s
door A-pillar.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The GVW comprises the weight of the
vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel,
installed accessories, passengers and
cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue
load. The GVW must never exceed the
GVWR indicated on the certification label
located on the driver’s door A-pillar.
Operation
Tires and wheels
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
Maximum tire inflation pressure
PSI (Pounds per square inch)
This is the maximum permissible vehicle
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of
the vehicle including all options, passengers, fuel, and cargo and, if applicable,
trailer tongue load). It is indicated on
certification label located on the driver’s
door A-pillar.
This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should ever be put in the tire
under normal driving conditions.
A standard unit of measure for air pressure
-> bar, kilopascal (kPa).
Kilopascal (kPa)
The metric unit for air pressure. There are
6.9 kPa to 1 psi; another metric unit for air
pressure is bars. There are
100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar.
Maximum load rating
The maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The sum of curb weight, accessory weight,
total load limit and production options
weight.
Recommended tire inflation pressure
Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants the vehicle is
designed to seat, multiplied by
68 kilograms (150 lb).
Recommended tire inflation pressure
listed on the Tire and Loading Information
placard located on driver’s door B-pillar for
normal driving conditions. Provides best
handling, tread life and riding comfort.
Occupant distribution
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle
at their designated seating positions.
Production options weight
The combined weight of those installed
regular production options weighing over
5 lb (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those
standard items which they replace, not
previously considered in curb weight or
accessory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
battery, and special trim.
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are
seated.
Sidewall
The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
285
Operation
Tires and wheels
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Tire speed rating
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
Unique identifier which facilitates efforts
by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers
in recall situations or other safety matters
concerning tires and gives purchases the
means to easily identify such tires. The TIN
is comprised of “Manufacturer’s identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code”
and “Date of manufacture”.
Part of tire designation; indicates the
speed range for which a tire is approved.
A tire information system that provides
consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction,
temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The
ratings are molded into the sidewall of the
tire.
Tire load rating
Numerical code associated with the
maximum load a tire can support.
Tire ply composition and material used
This indicates the number of plies or the
number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials
in the tire and sidewall, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
286
Total load limit
Rated cargo and luggage load plus
68 kilograms (150 lb) times the vehicle’s
designated seating capacity.
Traction
Force exerted by the vehicle on the road
via the tires. The amount of grip provided.
Tread
The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear indicators
Narrow bands, sometimes called
“wear bars” that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 in (1.6 mm) of tread
remains.
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each axle its
share of the maximum loaded vehicle
weight and dividing it by two.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Rotating tires
! A wheel change should only be carried out
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Otherwise there is a danger of damaging the vehicle by
jacking it up incorrectly.
Warning!
G
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires
are of the same dimension.
If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size
tires (different tire dimensions front vs.
rear), tire rotation is not possible.
Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles
with tires of the same dimension all
around. If your vehicle is equipped with
tires of the same dimension all around,
tires can be rotated, observing a
front-to-rear rotation pattern that will
maintain the intended rotation (spinning)
direction of the tire (컄 page 261).
In some cases, such as when your vehicle
is equipped with mixed-size tires (different
tire dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation
is not possible.
If applicable to your vehicle’s tire configuration, tires can be rotated according to
the tire manufacturer’s recommended intervals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty
pamphlet located in your vehicle literature
portfolio. If none is available, tires should
be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles
(5000 to 10000 km), or sooner if necessary, according to the degree of tire wear.
The same rotation (spinning) direction
must be maintained (컄 page 261).
Warning!
G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. Wheels could become
loose if not tightened with a torque of
95 lb-ft (130 Nm).
Only use Genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
bolts specified for your vehicle’s rims.
For information on wheel change, see the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 362).
Rotate tires before the characteristic tire
wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder
wear on front tires and tread center wear
on rear tires).
Thoroughly clean the mounting face of
wheels and brake disks, i.e. the inner side
of the wheels/tires, during each rotation.
Check for and ensure proper tire inflation
pressure.
287
Operation
Tires and wheels
Removing anti-theft wheel nuts
Anti-theft wheel nuts
Your vehicle is equipped with anti-theft
wheel nuts that prevent the theft of your
vehicle’s wheels.
Warning!
G
Pull the parking brake lever up as many
notches as possible and move the gear selector lever to park position P, before loosening the wheel bolts. Otherwise the vehicle
may move and cause an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
! Do not use air tools, such as an impact
wrench, when installing or removing the
anti-theft wheel nuts. An impact wrench can
damage the anti-theft wheel nuts and the wheel
nut key, or cause them to malfunction.
! Store wheel bolts and anti-theft wheel nuts
not currently in use in a safe place to avoid
damage to the threads.
288
1 Anti-theft wheel nut
2 Wheel nut key
왘
Unscrew anti-theft wheel nut 1 using
wheel nut key 2.
왘
Replace anti-theft wheel nut 1 with
one of the regular wheel bolts.
왘
Fasten the wheel bolt and tighten it
with a torque wrench to a tightening
torque of 95 lb-ft (130 Nm).
Warning!
G
The wheels could come loose if the wheel
bolts are not tightened to a torque of 95 lb-ft
(130 Nm). Have the tightening torque
checked after changing a wheel.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Fitting anti-theft wheel nuts
i Keep the anti-theft wheel nut key in a conve-
왘
Unscrew a wheel bolt from one of the
wheels.
nient place in your vehicle where you and service
personnel can always find it easily when it is
needed.
왘
Replace that wheel bolt with one of the
anti-theft wheel nuts 1 delivered with
your vehicle.
i If you should lose the anti-theft wheel nut
왘
Fasten anti-theft wheel nut 1 using
wheel nut key 2 and tighten with a
torque wrench to a tightening torque of
95 lb-ft (130 Nm).
Warning!
key or one of the anti-theft wheel nuts, please
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
a replacement.
G
The wheels could come loose if the wheel
bolts are not tightened to a torque of 95 lb-ft
(130 Nm). Have the tightening torque
checked after changing a wheel.
289
Operation
Winter driving
Before the onset of winter, have your
vehicle winterized at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. This service
includes:
앫
Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
concentration.
앫
Addition of cleaning concentrate to the
water of the windshield and headlamp
cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate
“MB Summerfit” to a premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze
which is formulated for below freezing
temperatures (컄 page 397).
앫
Battery test. Battery capacity drops
with decreasing ambient temperature.
A well charged battery helps to make
sure that the engine can be started,
even at low ambient temperatures.
앫
Tire change. Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated radial-ply tires with a
minimum tread depth of approximately
1
/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels for the
winter season.
290
Winter tires*
Warning!
! A wheel change should only be carried out
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Otherwise there is a danger of damaging the vehicle by
jacking it up incorrectly.
Always use winter tires at temperatures
below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry
road conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated
tires provide special winter performance.
Make sure the tires you use show the
mountain/snowflake.marking on the
tire sidewall. These tires meet specific
snow traction performance requirements
of the Rubber Manufacturers Association
(RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) and have been designed specifically for use in snow conditions. Use of
winter tires is the only way to achieve the
maximum effectiveness of the ABS and
ESP® in winter operation.
For safe handling, make sure that all
mounted winter tires are of the same make
and have the same tread design.
G
Winter tires with a tread depth of less than
1/ in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no
6
longer suitable for winter operation.
Always observe the speed rating of the
winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
maximum speed for which your tires are
rated is below the speed rating of your
vehicle, you must place a notice to this
effect where it will be seen by the driver.
Such notices are available from your tire
dealer or from any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Operation
Winter driving
Snow chains
Snow chains should only be driven on
snow-covered roads at speeds not to
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains
as soon as possible when driving on roads
without snow.
i When driving with snow chains, you may
wish to deactivate the ESP® (컄 page 85) before
setting the vehicle in motion. This will improve
the vehicle’s traction.
Please observe the following guidelines
when using snow chains:
! Use of snow chains is not permissible with
tire sizes:
앫
Use of snow chains is not permissible
with all wheel/tire combinations.
앫
255/35 ZR19 (96Y) XL
앫
295/30 ZR19 (100Y) XL
Snow chains should only be used on
the rear wheels. Follow the manufacturer’s mounting instructions.
앫
295/35 ZR18 (99Y)
앫
! If snow chains are mounted to the front
wheels, they may scrape against the body or axle
components. The tires or the vehicle could be
damaged as a result.
앫
Only use snow chains that are
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
be glad to advise you on this subject.
앫
Use of snow chains may be prohibited
depending on location. Always check
local and state laws before installing
snow chains.
291
Operation
Maintenance
! Excessive load on the brake system causes
In order to maintain the performance and
safety of your SLR, we strongly recommend that you have your vehicle serviced
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center,
every 12 months, even if the vehicle has
covered less than 10000 miles
(15000 km) in that time.
increased wear of brake pads and brake disks. If
the brake pads have to be replaced multiple
times within one maintenance service interval,
the brake disks must be checked. Observe the
information given in the Maintenance Booklet
and contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
The maintenance service indicator will
notify you when the next maintenance service is due within the next 12 months or
10000 miles (15000 km), whichever
comes sooner.
Before the next maintenance service is
due, one of the following messages will appear in the right multifunction display while
you are driving or when you switch on the
ignition:
! Failure to have the vehicle maintained in accordance with the Maintenance Booklet and
maintenance service indicator at the designated
times/mileage will result in vehicle damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Service in .. days
Service in .. miles
When the maintenance service is due, the
following message appears in the multifunction display:
Service Due now
Clearing the maintenance service
indicator message
The maintenance service indicator message is automatically cleared after 30 seconds when you switch on the ignition. You
can also clear it yourself.
1 Reset button
왘
Press reset button 1.
The maintenance service indicator
message is cleared and the standard
display appears in the multifunction
display (컄 page 117).
292
Operation
Maintenance
Maintenance service term exceeded
If you have exceeded the suggested maintenance service term, you will see the following message in the right multifunction
display:
Calling up the maintenance service due
date
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
Press button è or ÿ on the
multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the standard display appears in
the multifunction display (컄 page 117).
왘
Press button k or j on the
multifunction steering wheel until the
maintenance service indicator service
symbol 9 appears in the left multifunction display and the maintenance
service deadline appears in the right
multifunction display.
Service exceeded by .. days
Service exceeded by .. miles
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
reset the maintenance service indicator
following a completed maintenance
service.
i If the vehicle is not be used for a longer period of time, do not disconnect the consumer
battery. Instead, maintain the condition of the
battery by using the battery charger approved by
Mercedes-Benz for use on the SLR and supplied
with the car (컄 page 369). This charger automatically controls the charge rate, and can be left
connected to the car for long periods without
damage to the battery.
If the battery supplying the vehicle’s electrical
consumers is disconnected, the days of disconnection will not be included in the count shown
by the maintenance service indicator. To arrive
at the true maintenance service deadline, you
will need to subtract these days from the days
shown in the maintenance service indicator.
Do not confuse the maintenance service indicator with the engine oil level indicator :.
293
Operation
Maintenance
Resetting the maintenance service
indicator
i If the maintenance service indicator was in-
In the event that the maintenance service
on your vehicle is not carried out by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, you can
have the maintenance service indicator
reset. The automotive maintenance facility
carrying out the maintenance service will
find the information for resetting the
maintenance service indicator in the
maintenance-relevant information for your
vehicle. Such information is available from
either an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or directly from Mercedes-Benz.
Only reset if the proper maintenance service has
been performed. Resetting the system without
performing the proper service as called for by
the maintenance service indicator will result in
engine damage and/or other vehicle damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
294
advertently reset, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center correct it.
Operation
Vehicle care
왔 Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of the vehicle
Warning!
G
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
Always follow the instructions on the particular container. Always open your vehicle’s
doors or windows when cleaning the inside.
Never use fluids or solvents that are not
designed for cleaning your vehicle.
If you have any questions about proper
care of your SLR, please contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
Mercedes-Benz care products. These have been
specially developed to suit Mercedes-Benz vehicles and are state of the art. Mercedes-Benz
care products are available from any
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Depending on body color the characteristic carbon structure of the body surface
may become visible due to high ambient
temperatures and humidity. This phenomenon is related to the technology and
concept of the vehicle’s body.
! Affixing stickers, magnets, adhesive tape or
similar materials to painted body components
may damage the paintwork.
While in operation, even while parked, your
vehicle is subjected to varying external
influences which, if gone unchecked, can
attack the paintwork as well as the
underbody and cause lasting damage.
Such damage is caused not only by
extreme and varying climatic conditions,
but also by:
앫
Air pollution
앫
Road salt
앫
Tar
앫
Gravel and stone chipping
To avoid paint damage, you should
immediately remove:
앫
Grease and oil
앫
Fuel
앫
Coolant
앫
Brake fluid
앫
Bird droppings
앫
Insects
앫
Tree resins, etc.
Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates the aggressiveness and potency of
the above adverse influences.
More frequent washings are necessary to
deal with unfavorable conditions:
앫
near the ocean
앫
in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
emissions)
앫
during winter operation
You should check your vehicle from time to
time for stone chipping or other damage.
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
possible.
295
Operation
Vehicle care
Vehicle washing
! When washing the vehicle, fine and rigid
particles in sponges or brushes could scratch or
otherwise damage the paint. This applies to
both, hand-wash or automatic car wash.
Mercedes-Benz recommends you to have your
vehicle cleaned at an automatic car wash from
the start, preferably one without brushes, or to
use plenty of water when hand-washing your
vehicle.
Do not wash the car in direct sunlight and when
the body surface is hot.
In the winter, remove salt residue quickly and
thoroughly.
Hand-wash
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle
in direct sunlight.
왘
왘
Only use a mild car wash detergent,
which is recommended by
Mercedes-Benz.
Only use a soft sponge or a washing
brush.
296
왘
Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a
diffused jet of water.
Direct only a very weak spray towards
the ventilation intake.
왘
Use plenty of water and rinse the
sponge and chamois frequently.
왘
Rinse with clean water and thoroughly
dry with a chamois.
Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on
the finish.
! Do not use scouring agents on these parts.
Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
non-scratching cloth when cleaning the vehicle.
Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry
cloth or sponge.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the paint.
Automatic car wash
You can have your car washed in an automatic car wash from the start. Automatic
car washes without brushes are
preferable.
왘
To protect the filter system, switch the
automatic climate control to air
recirculation mode (컄 page 195).
! Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic
touchless car wash which uses caustic spray.
Otherwise, the caustic spray will damage the
paint or ornamental moldings.
If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it before running it through the automatic car
wash.
! Make sure that the windshield wiper switch
is set to 0 (컄 page 52). Otherwise, the rain
sensor could activate and cause the wipers to
move unintentionally. This may lead to vehicle
damage.
Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in exterior
rear view mirrors prior to running the vehicle
through an automatic car wash to prevent
damage to the mirrors.
i After running the vehicle through an automatic car wash, wipe any wax off of the windshield (컄 page 297). This will prevent smears
and reduce wiping noise which can be caused by
residual wax on the windshield.
Operation
Vehicle care
Power washer
! Do not use power washer to clean your
vehicle or the engine.
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. They
could tear.
왘
Cleaning the windows and wiper blades
! The hood must be opened (컄 page 250) before folding the wiper arm away from the windshield. You could otherwise damage the hood
and/or the wiper arms.
! Never open or close the hood when the wiper arms are folded away from the windshield.
You could otherwise damage the hood and/or
the wiper arm.
Warning!
G
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and
remove SmartKey from starter switch
before cleaning the wiper blades. Otherwise
the wiper motor could suddenly turn on and
cause injury.
왘
Fold the wiper arm away from the
windshield (컄 page 361).
You must feel the wiper arm engage in
position.
왘
왘
Clean the wiper blade inserts with a
clean cloth and detergent solution.
Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window cleaning solution on all outside
and inside glass surfaces.
An automotive glass cleaner is
recommended.
! To clean the window interior, do not use a
dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleaners containing solvents. Do not touch the inside of the
front, rear or side windows with hard objects
such as an ice scraper or ring. Doing so may
damage the windows.
! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto
the windshield before turning the SmartKey in
the starter switch.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm
back. If released, the force of the impact from
the tensioning spring could crack the windshield.
Cleaning the headlamps
왘
Wipe the headlamp lens with a damp
sponge.
! Only use windshield washer fluid suitable
for plastic lamp lenses. Unsuitable windshield
washer fluid may cause damage to the plastic
lenses of the headlamps.
Do not use
앫
a dry cloth
앫
abrasive products
앫
solvents
앫
cleaning agents containing solvents
You could otherwise scratch or damage the lens
surface.
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
297
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Where will I find ...?
Unlocking in an emergency
Replacing SmartKey batteries
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Batteries
Towing the vehicle
Fuses
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Lamps in instrument cluster
Problem
v
General information:
If any of the following lamps in the instrument cluster fails to come on during the
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solutions
The yellow
warn- Risk of accident!
왘 Switch the ESP® back on (컄 page 86).
ing lamp comes on while the
Exceptions: (컄 page 85).
The ESP® has been switched off.
engine is running.
왘 If leaving the ESP® switched off, adapt your
When the ESP® is switched off it will not
speed and driving to the prevailing road and
stabilize the vehicle if the system recogweather conditions.
nizes that the vehicle starts to skid or that
If the ESP® cannot be switched on:
a wheel is spinning.
ABS/ESP®
Risk of accident!
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
왘
Read and observe additional messages in
the multifunction display (컄 page 314).
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
ESP®
is not operational due to a
The
malfunction.
300
bulb self-check when switching on the
ignition, have the respective bulb checked
and replaced if necessary.
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Problem
v
Possible cause/consequence
The yellow ABS/ESP® warn- Risk of accident!
ing lamp flashes while
The ESP®, ABS, or traction control has
driving.
come into operation because of detected
traction loss in at least one tire.
Suggested solutions
왘
When driving off, apply as little throttle as
possible.
왘
While driving, ease up on the accelerator.
왘
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
왘
Do not deactivate ESP®.
Exceptions: (컄 page 85).
The cruise control is deactivated.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of an accident.
301
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Problem
-
The yellow ABS indicator
lamp comes on while the
engine is running.
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solutions
Risk of accident!
왘
The ABS has detected a malfunction and
has switched off. The BAS and the ESP®
are also switched off.
Continue driving with added caution. Wheels
may lock during hard braking, reducing
steering capability.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning,
other systems such as the automatic
Failure to follow these instructions increases
transmission may also be malfunctioning. the risk of an accident.
The electro-hydraulic brake system is still
functioning normally but without ABS
available.
왘
The charging voltage has fallen below
10 volts. The ABS has switched off.
When the voltage is above this value again, the
ABS is operational again and the ABS indicator
lamp should go out.
The battery may not be charged
sufficiently.
If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out:
왘
302
Read and observe messages in the
multifunction display (컄 page 314).
Have the generator (alternator) and the
battery checked.
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Problem
3
;
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solutions
You are driving with the parking brake set.
왘
Release the parking brake (컄 page 49).
(Canada only)
Risk of accident!
왘
(USA only)
앫
There is a malfunction in the
electro-hydraulic brake system.
앫
There is insufficient brake fluid in the
reservoir.
Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe location
or as soon as it is safe to do so and contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do
not add brake fluid! This will not solve the
problem.
왘
Read and observe messages in the
multifunction display (컄 page 314).
(Canada only)
(USA only)
The red brake warning lamp
comes on while driving and
you hear a warning sound.
3
;
The red brake warning lamp
comes on while the engine is
running and you hear a
warning sound.
Warning!
G
Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your
brake system checked immediately if the
brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add
brake fluid before checking the brake
system.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You
can be seriously burned.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or
below, have the brake system checked for brake
pad thickness and leaks.
303
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Problem
ú
±
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solutions
(USA only)
There is a malfunction in:
왘
(Canada only)
앫
The fuel injection system
The yellow engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on
while the engine is running.
앫
The ignition system
앫
The emission control system
앫
Systems which effect emissions
Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
An on-board diagnostic connector is used by
the service station to link the vehicle to the
shop diagnostics system. It allows the accurate identification of system malfunctions
through the readout of diagnostic trouble
codes. It is located in the front left area of
the footwell next to the parking brake pedal.
왘
After refueling, start, turn off, and restart the
engine three or four times in succession.
Such malfunctions may result in excessive
emissions values and may switch the
engine to its limp-home (emergency
operation) mode.
Your fuel tank is empty.
The limp-home mode is canceled. You do not
need to have your vehicle checked.
i Some states may by law require you to visit
a workshop immediately as soon as the engine
malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Check
local requirements.
304
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Problem
ú
±
(USA only)
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
The fuel cap is not closed tightly.
왘
Check the fuel cap (컄 page 247).
(Canada only)
If it is not closed properly:
The yellow engine malfunction
indicator lamp comes on while
driving.
왘
Close the fuel cap.
If it is closed properly:
왘
Have the fuel system checked by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i Some states may by law require you to visit
a workshop immediately as soon as the engine
malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Check
local requirements.
305
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Problem
D
D
The red coolant temperature
warning lamp comes on while
the engine is running.
The red coolant temperature
warning lamp comes on while
the engine is running and you
hear a warning sound.
Warning!
G
Driving when your engine is overheated can
cause some fluids which may have leaked
into the engine compartment to catch fire.
You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
306
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
There is insufficient coolant in the reservoir.
왘
Immediately add coolant to prevent engine from overheating (컄 page 255).
If this warning lamp comes on frequently,
there is a leak in the cooling system.
왘
Have the cooling system checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If the coolant level is correct, the electric
radiator fan may be broken.
왘
If the coolant temperature is below
248°F (120°C), you can continue driving to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Avoid high engine loads (e.g. driving
uphill) and stop-and-go driving.
왘
Stop as soon as possible in a safe location and allow the engine and coolant
to cool down.
The coolant temperature has exceeded
248°F (120°C).
serious burns which can occur just by opening the engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from
other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of
the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle
until the engine has cooled down.
During severe operating conditions, e.g.
stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).
! The engine should not be operated with the
coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solutions
<
The red Airbrake warning
The Airbrake or the central locking system
lamp comes on while driving is malfunctioning.
and you hear a warning
sound.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center immediately.
>
The red gearshift indicator
You are driving with the manual shift prolamp comes on while driving. gram. The engine is in the overrevving
range.
왘
Shift to the next higher gear. Otherwise the
fuel supply will be interrupted to prevent the
engine from overrevving.
A
The yellow fuel reserve warn- The fuel level has dropped below the
ing lamp comes on while
reserve mark.
driving.
The fuel cap is not closed tightly.
왘
Refuel at the nearest gas station
(컄 page 247).
왘
Check the fuel cap (컄 page 247).
The engine oil temperature
indicator comes on in the
tachometer while driving.
왘
Warm up the engine and do not drive at full
power until the operating temperature has
been reached.
=
The engine oil has not yet reached its
operating temperature.
The symbol will go out as soon as the engine
oil has reached its operating temperature.
307
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Problem
<
<
<
308
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
The red seat belt telltale comes The telltale reminds you and your passenger
on for a maximum of 6 seconds to fasten your seat belts before driving off.
after starting the engine.
왘
You hear a warning chime for a
maximum of 6 seconds after
starting the engine.
왘
You have forgotten to fasten your seat belt.
The red seat belt telltale comes You and/or your passenger have forgotten to
on while the vehicle is standing fasten your seat belts.
still and the engine is running or
There are items placed on the passenger seat
during driving.
and therefore the system senses the passenger seat as being occupied.
Fasten your seat belts.
Regardless of whether the seat belts
are fastened or not, the seat belt telltale always comes on and remains lit
for 6 seconds after starting the
engine.
Fasten your seat belt.
The warning chime stops sounding.
왘
Fasten your seat belts.
The seat belt telltale goes out.
왘
Remove the items from the passenger
seat and put them in a safe place.
The seat belt telltale goes out.
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Problem
<
Possible cause/consequence
During driving the red seat belt The vehicle’s speed once exceeds 15 mph
telltale flashes and you addition- (25 km/h) and you and/or your passenger
ally hear an intermittent warning have forgotten to fasten your seat belts.
chime with increasing intensity.
There are items placed on the passenger seat
and therefore the system senses the passenger seat as being occupied.
Suggested solution
왘
Fasten your seat belts.
The seat belt telltale goes out and the
warning chime stops sounding.
왘
Remove the items from the passenger
seat and put them in a safe place.
The seat belt telltale goes out and the
warning chime stops sounding.
i After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat
belt, the warning chime stops sounding and the
seat belt telltale illuminates continuously. The
seat belt telltale will only go out if both, the
driver’s and passenger’s seat belt are fastened,
or the vehicle is standing still and a door is
opened.
309
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Problem
1
The red SRS indicator lamp
comes on while the engine is
running.
Warning!
G
In the event that a malfunction of the SRS is
indicated as outlined above, the SRS may
not be operational. For your safety, we
strongly recommend that you contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked, otherwise
the SRS may not be deployed when needed
in an accident, which could result in serious
or fatal injury, or it might deploy
unexpectedly and unnecessarily which
could also result in an accident and/or
injury to you or to others.
310
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
There is a malfunction in the restraint systems. The air bags or emergency tensioning
device (ETD) could deploy unexpectedly or
fail to activate in an accident.
왘
Drive with added caution to the
nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Problem
H
Possible cause/consequence
Low tire pressure telltale for the The TPMS detects a loss of pressure in at
TPMS illuminates continuously. least one tire.
Suggested solution
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
avoiding abrupt steering and braking
maneuvers. Observe the traffic
situation around you.
왘
Read and observe messages in the
multifunction display.
The low tire pressure telltale goes out
once the TPMS has been reactivated after
the tire inflation pressure has been
corrected.
Warning!
G
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure
label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or the tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if underinflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
311
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Lamp in center console
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
The system is malfunctioning.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
왘
Also read and observe any messages
in the multifunction display and follow
corrective steps (컄 page 319).
The passenger front air bag off
indicator lamp illuminates and
remains illuminated with the
weight of a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual
on the passenger seat.
Warning!
G
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp illuminates and remains illuminated
with the weight of a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual on the passenger seat, do not have any passenger use
the passenger seat until the system has
been repaired.
312
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
The system is malfunctioning.
왘
Make sure there is nothing between
seat cushion and child seat and check
installation of the child seat.
왘
Make sure that no objects applying
supplemental weight onto the seat
are present.
왘
If the passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains out, have the system checked as soon as possible by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Do not transport a child on the passenger seat until the system has been
repaired.
왘
Also read and observe any messages
in the multifunction display and follow
corrective steps (컄 page 319).
The passenger front air bag off
indicator lamp does not illuminate and/or does not remain illuminated with the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child in a
standard child restraint or less
on the passenger seat.
Warning!
G
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp does not illuminate or remains out with
the weight of a typical 12-month-old child
in a standard child restraint or less on the
passenger seat, do not transport a child on
the passenger seat until the system has
been repaired.
313
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display
Warning and malfunction messages
appear in the multifunction display located
in the instrument cluster.
Certain warning and malfunction messages are accompanied by an audible signal.
Address these messages accordingly and
follow the additional instructions given in
this Operator’s Manual.
Selecting the vehicle status message
memory menu in the control system
(컄 page 128) displays both cleared and
uncleared messages.
High-priority messages appear in the
multifunction display in red color.
314
Certain messages of high priority cannot
be cleared from the multifunction display
using the reset button (컄 page 29) or
button j, k, ÿ, or è on the
multifunction steering wheel.
Other messages of high priority and
messages of less immediate priority can
be cleared from the multifunction display
using the reset button or button j,
k, ÿ, or è on the multifunction
steering wheel. They are then stored in the
vehicle status message memory
(컄 page 128). Remember that clearing a
message will only make the message
disappear. Clearing a message will not
correct the condition that caused the
message to appear.
Warning!
G
All categories of messages contain
important information which should be
taken note of and, where a malfunction is
indicated, addressed as soon as possible at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Failure to repair condition noted may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty, or result in property
damage or personal injury.
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Warning!
G
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction
display is inoperative.
As a result, you will not be able to see information about your driving conditions, such
as speed or outside temperature, warning/indicator lamps, malfunction/warning
messages or the failure of any systems.
Driving characteristics may be impaired.
If you must continue to drive, do so with
added caution. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
i Switching on the ignition causes all instrument cluster lamps (except high beam headlamp
indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps
unless activated) as well as the multifunction
display to come on. Make sure the lamps and
multifunction display are in working order before
starting your journey.
On the pages that follow, you will find a
compilation of the most important warning
and malfunction messages that may
appear in the multifunction display. High
priority messages appear in red color.
For your convenience the messages are
divided into two sections:
앫
Text messages (컄 page 316)
앫
Symbol messages (컄 page 327)
315
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Text messages
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
ABS
ABS, ESP
unavailable
See
Oper. Manual
Risk of accident!
왘
The ABS and ESP® are not available
due to a malfunction. The BAS is also
deactivated.
Drive a short distance with added caution at
a vehicle speed of above 12 mph
(20 km/h).
When the message disappears, the ABS, the
ESP®, and the BAS are available again.
The system’s self-diagnosis may not
If the message does not disappear:
be completed yet.
The electro-hydraulic brake system 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Wheels may lock during hard braking,
is still functioning normally but withreducing steering capability.
®
out the ABS, the ESP , and the BAS
available.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of an accident.
316
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
ABS
ABS, ESP
inoperative
See
Oper. Manual
Risk of accident!
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
Wheels may lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
The ABS and ESP® have switched off
due to a malfunction.
The BAS is also deactivated.
The electro-hydraulic brake system
Failure to follow these instructions increases
is still functioning normally but withthe risk of an accident.
®
out the ABS, the ESP , and the BAS
available.
Convenience
functions
temporarily
unavailable
The battery for electrical consumers
has insufficient voltage and can no
longer supply the convenience functions such rear window heating.
As soon as the on-board voltage is sufficient,
you will see the following message in the multifunction display: Convenience functions
available again. The electrical consumers are
switched on again.
Cruise control
––– mph
You have attempted to resume a
stored speed, but nothing is stored.
왘
Store a speed (컄 page 204).
You have attempted to set a speed
below 20 mph (30 km/h).
왘
Accelerate to a speed exceeding
20 mph (30 km/h) and set the speed
(컄 page 204).
The ESP® is switched off.
왘
Switch on the ESP® (컄 page 86).
Exceptions: (컄 page 85).
(USA only)
––– km/h
(Canada only)
317
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
ESP
ESP
inoperative
See
Oper. Manual
Risk of accident!
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
The ESP® has detected a malfunction and switched off.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
The ABS may not be operational.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of an accident.
The electro-hydraulic brake system
is still functioning normally but without the ESP® available.
ESP
ESP unavailable
See
Oper. Manual
Risk of accident!
왘
The ESP® is deactivated because the
power supply has been interrupted.
The ABS may not be operational.
The electro-hydraulic brake system
is still functioning normally but without the ESP® available.
Synchronize the ESP®. With the vehicle stationary, turn the steering wheel completely
to the left and then to the right.
If the ESP® message does not go out:
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of an accident.
! When synchronizing the ESP®, make sure
you can turn the steering wheel in both directions as far as it will go without the wheels hitting
any objects, e.g. a road curb.
318
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
Front passenger enabled
The passenger front air bag and Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and
airbag
See Oper. Manual the passenger knee air bag are check the passenger seat for the following:
activated while driving even
though a child, small individual,
or object below the system’s
weight threshold is on the passenger seat, or the passenger
seat is empty. Objects on the
seat or forces acting on the seat
may make the system sense
supplemental weight.
왘
Switch off the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
Apply the parking brake (컄 page 55).
왘
Remove child and child restraint from passenger seat.
왘
Make sure that no objects which are applying supplemental weight onto the seat are present. The system may recognize such supplemental weight and sense that an
occupant on the passenger seat is of a greater weight
than actually present.
왘
Keep the seat unoccupied, close the passenger door and
switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
Monitor the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
(컄 page 70) and the multifunction display in the instrument
cluster (컄 page 117) for the following:
(Continued on next page)
319
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display Right display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on,
앫
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp (컄 page 70) should
illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS
(컄 page 67) has deactivated the passenger front air bag and the
passenger knee air bag.
앫
the message Front passenger airbag enabled See Oper. Manual
or the message Front passenger airbag disabled See Oper.
Manual should not appear in the multifunction display at any time
the seat is unoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to
complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure neither
message appears in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the passenger seat again.
Depending on the passenger classification sensed by the OCS
(컄 page 67), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp will remain
illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working properly.
Have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
320
lamp remains out even after performing the
above corrective steps, do not have any
children 12 years old and under and other
small individuals use the passenger seat
until the system has been repaired.
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
Front passenger disabled
The passenger front air bag is
airbag
See Oper. Manual deactivated while driving even
though an adult or someone
larger than a small individual is
occupying the passenger seat.
Forces acting on the seat may
make the system sense a
decrease in weight.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and
check the passenger seat for the following:
왘
Switch off the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
Apply the parking brake (컄 page 55).
왘
Have the passenger vacate the seat and exit the vehicle.
왘
Keep the seat unoccupied, close the passenger door and
switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
Monitor the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
(컄 page 70) and the multifunction display in the instrument
cluster (컄 page 117) for the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on,
앫
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp (컄 page 70)
should illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating that
the OCS (컄 page 67) has deactivated the passenger front
air bag and the passenger knee air bag.
(Continued on next page)
321
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
앫
the message Front passenger airbag enabled See
Oper. Manual or the message Front passenger airbag
disabled See Oper. Manual should not appear in the
multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure
neither message appears in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the passenger
seat again. Depending on the passenger classification
sensed by the OCS (컄 page 67), the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working
properly. Have the system checked as soon as possible by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains illuminated with an adult occupant on the passenger seat even after
performing the above corrective steps, do
not have any passenger use the passenger
seat until the system has been repaired.
322
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
P
Gear selector
lever to P
You wish to start the engine and the
selector lever is not in park
position P.
왘
Move the selector lever to park position P.
Shift to N
to start
왘
Move the selector lever to neutral
position N.
SLR
ACL malfunction
Visit
workshop
앫
The locking system is
malfunctioning.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
앫
The transmission cooling system
is malfunctioning.
Restraint
system malfunction
Visit
workshop
There is a malfunction in the supplemental restraint systems. The
air bags or emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or fail to activate in an accident.
왘
Drive with added caution and have the
system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
SRS
Warning!
G
In the event that a malfunction of the SRS is
indicated as outlined above, the SRS may
not be operational. For your safety, we
strongly recommend that you contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately to have the system checked;
otherwise the SRS may not be deployed
when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which
could result in an accident and/or injury to
you or to others.
323
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
Tire pressure
monitor
reactivated
The TPMS is using the current pressure
values as the basis for monitoring.
Tire pressure
displayed only
after driving
a few minutes
The tire inflation pressure is being checked.
Tire pressure
displayed only
when ignition
is switched on
Tire pressure
monitor
temporarily
unavailable
The tire inflation pressure monitor is unable
to monitor the tire inflation pressure due to
앫
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
324
Possible solution
왘
Drive the vehicle for a few minutes.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
Remove any extra wheel sensors
from the vehicle.
앫
the presence of several wheel sensors in As soon as the causes of the malfunction have been removed, the TPMS autothe vehicle.
excessive wheel sensor temperatures. matically becomes active again.
앫
a nearby radio interference source.
앫
unrecognized wheel sensors mounted.
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Reactivate
tire pressure
monitor
after correcting
tire pressure
There was a tire inflation pressure warning
message.
왘
Reactivate the TPMS after correcting
the tire inflation pressure values
(컄 page 271).
Tire pressure
monitor
inoperative
Drive to
workshop
The TPMS is malfunctioning.
왘
Have the TPMS checked by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
A wheel without proper sensor was
installed.
왘
Have the wheel checked.
The tire inflation pressure is too low in one
or more tires.
왘
Check and correct tire inflation
pressure as required (컄 page 268).
The low tire pressure telltale for the TPMS
comes on and you have not reactivated the
system since the last tire inflation pressure
warning message.
Please correct
the tire pressure
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
325
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Transmission
Visit
workshop
The provided operating safety of the
automatic transmission is reduced.
왘
Drive with added caution and have
the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
Transmission
Shift to N
The transmission is in neutral although the
gear selector lever is not.
왘
Move the gear selector lever to
neutral position N.
326
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Symbol messages
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/
consequence
Possible solution
<
Airbrake
malfunction
The Airbrake locking mechanism is malfunctioning.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately.
#
Battery/Alternator The battery is malfunctioning.
Stop car
왘
Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Adjust
driving to be consistent with reduced braking
responsiveness.
왘
Do not drive any further.
왘
Call Roadside Assistance.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately.
The electro-hydraulic brake
system requires electrical
energy and therefore has only
limited operation. Considerably
greater brake pedal force is
required and the pedal travel is
longer. The stopping distance is
increased. If necessary, apply
full pressure to the brake pedal.
327
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/
consequence
Possible solution
#
The battery is no longer
charging. Possible causes:
왘
앫
alternator malfunctioning
If it is broken:
앫
broken poly-V-belt
왘
Do not forget that the brake
system requires electrical
energy and may be operating
with restricted capability.
Considerably greater brake
pedal force is required and the
pedal travel is longer. The stopping distance is increased. If
necessary, apply full pressure
to the brake pedal.
328
Stop the vehicle immediately in a safe location and
check the poly-V-belt.
Do not continue to drive. Otherwise, the engine will
overheat due to an inoperative water pump which
may result in damage to the engine. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If it is in order:
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced
braking responsiveness.
왘
Read and observe additional messages in the
multifunction display.
The starter battery has been
charged with a battery charger
or jump started.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
There is a malfunction in the
electronic system.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/
consequence
Possible solution
T
Reduced
brake effect
Depress brake
pedal fully!
The electro-hydraulic brake
system is in emergency operation mode. Considerably greater brake pedal force is required
and the pedal travel is longer.
The stopping distance is increased. If necessary, apply full
pressure to the brake pedal.
왘
Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe
to do so.
왘
Apply the parking brake (컄 page 55).
왘
Do not drive any further.
왘
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking the
wheels with wheel chocks or other sizeable objects.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Call for Roadside Assistance.
The maximum speed is limited
or
to 55 mph (90 km/h).
Warning!
G
Driving while this message is displayed can
result in an accident. Have your brake
system checked immediately.
If the electro-hydraulic brake system enters
its emergency operation mode, the driver
must apply significantly greater brake pedal
pressure and depress the pedal much further than normal to obtain braking effect.
If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake
pedal. Brakes are only applied to the front
wheels. Stopping distance is increased!
If there is a malfunction in the
electro-hydraulic brake system, we recommend that the vehicle be transported with
all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment.
A tow bar must be used if circumstances do
not permit the use of the recommended
towing methods and the vehicle requires
towing with all four wheels on the ground.
Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is only permissible for distances
up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more information, see “Towing the vehicle”
(컄 page 370).
329
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/
consequence
Possible solution
;
3
Check
brake fluid level
Risk of accident!
왘
There is insufficient brake fluid
in the reservoir.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as
it is safe to do so.
왘
Do not drive any further.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
(USA only)
(Canada only)
Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the
problem.
Warning!
G
Driving with the message Check brake
fluid level displayed can result in an
accident. Have your brake system checked
immediately. Do not add brake fluid before
checking the brake system. Overfilling the
brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling
brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire. You can be
seriously burned.
330
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or
below, have the brake system checked for brake
pad thickness and leaks.
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
;
3
Right display
(USA only)
Reduced
brake effect
(Canada only)
Visit
workshop
Increased
stopping distance
Visit
workshop
Possible cause/
consequence
Possible solution
The electro-hydraulic
왘
brake system is in emergency operation mode.
왘
Considerably greater
왘
brake pedal force is
required and the pedal 왘
travel is longer. The stopping distance is in왘
creased. If necessary,
apply full pressure to the or
brake pedal.
왘
Warning!
G
Driving while these messages are displayed
can result in an accident. Have your brake
system checked immediately.
If the electro-hydraulic brake system enters
its emergency operation mode, the driver
must apply significantly greater brake pedal
pressure and depress the pedal much further than normal to obtain braking effect.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is
safe to do so.
Apply the parking brake (컄 page 55).
Do not drive any further.
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking the
wheels with wheel chocks or other sizable objects.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Call for Roadside Assistance.
If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake
pedal. Brakes are only applied to the front
wheels. Stopping distance is increased!
If there is a malfunction in the
electro-hydraulic brake system, we recommend that the vehicle be transported with
all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment.
A tow bar must be used if circumstances do
not permit the use of the recommended
towing methods and the vehicle requires
towing with all four wheels on the ground.
Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is only permissible for distances
up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more information, see “Towing the vehicle”
(컄 page 370).
331
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
;
3
Right display
(USA only)
Reduced
brake effect
(Canada only)
Start engine
Increased
stopping distance
Start engine
Warning!
G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
unconsciousness and possible death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated.
332
Possible cause/
consequence
Possible solution
The battery has insufficient
voltage and cannot supply
sufficient power to the
electro-hydraulic brake system.
왘
Considerably greater brake
pedal force is required and the
pedal travel is longer. The
stopping distance is increased.
Start the engine.
As soon as the engine is running, the message
disappears.
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
;
3
Right display
Possible cause/
consequence
Possible solution
Brakes overheated The brake system is overheated 왘 Relieve the load on the brake system.
Drive on, but with due to an excessive load on the
(Canada only)
왘 Drive more smoothly and think ahead to avoid
even greater care brakes.
(USA only)
unnecessary braking.
Warning!
왘
Use the engine’s braking power more frequently. Shift into a lower gear (컄 page 174).
왘
Cautiously continue driving so that the air
stream will cool down the brakes.
왘
The message disappears after driving carefully
for a few minutes.
G
Overheating of the brake system will shorten the service life of the brake disks. The
brake disks could fail. Have the brake disks
checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
333
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
;
3
2
Right display
Possible cause/
consequence
Possible solution
Service brake
Visit
(Canada only)
workshop
There are malfunctions, but the
electro-hydraulic brake system
is operating normally.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately.
Release
parking brake
You are driving with the parking
brake set.
왘
Release the parking brake (컄 page 49).
Brake wear
The brake pads have reached
their wear limit.
왘
Have the brake pads replaced as soon as possible.
(USA only)
! Brake pad thickness must be visually
checked by a qualified technician at the intervals
specified in the Maintenance Booklet.
Excessive load on the brake system causes increased wear of brake pads and brake disks. If
the brake pads have to be replaced multiple
times within one maintenance service interval,
the brake disks must be checked. Observe the
information given in the Maintenance Booklet
and contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
334
Warning!
G
Have brake pad replacement and other work
on the electro-hydraulic brake system carried out by qualified technicians only. Contact your Mercedes-Benz Center for further
information. The electro-hydraulic brake
system must be deactivated prior to working
on the system. High pressure is intermittently built up in the system as part of its
automatic self-test. In addition, the system
is automatically activated when the vehicle
is unlocked by remote control, when the
driver or passenger door is opened, when
the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned
to position 1, when the brake pedal is
depressed or when the parking brake is
released.
Failure to deactivate the system prior to
maintenance will cause brake pistons to
extend and brake fluid to leak, which may
result in injuries (contusions and acid
burns), see “Electro-hydraulic brake system” (컄 page 86).
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/
consequence
Possible solution
B
Top up
coolant
See Oper. Manual
The coolant level is too low.
왘
•
Add coolant (컄 page 255).
Comply with all warnings while doing so.
The cooling fan for the coolant
is malfunctioning.
왘
If you have to add coolant frequently, have the cooling
system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately.
왘
Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the instrument cluster (컄 page 29).
If the coolant temperature is under 248°F (120°C), you
may continue driving to the nearest specialist workshop.
Warning!
G
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts. You could be seriously burned.
왘
Avoid placing heavy loads on the engine (e.g. by driving
uphill) as well as stop-and-go traffic.
왘
Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.
! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level
warning. Extended driving with the message and
symbol displayed may cause serious engine
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant
in the cooling system. The engine will overheat
causing major engine damage.
335
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/
consequence
Possible solution
•
Coolant
Stop car –
Turn engine off
The coolant is too hot.
왘
Among other possible causes,
the poly-V-belt could be
broken.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe to
do so.
왘
Turn off the engine.
왘
Check the poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
왘
Do not continue to drive. Otherwise, the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in
damage to the engine. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
If it is intact:
왘
Wait for the message to disappear before restarting the
engine.
Doing otherwise could result in serious engine damage that
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
(Continued on next page)
336
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/
consequence
Possible solution
왘
Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the
instrument cluster (컄 page 29).
If the temperature rises again:
왘
Warning!
G
Driving when your engine is overheated can
cause some fluids which may have leaked
into the engine compartment to catch fire.
You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. Stay away from the engine if
you see or hear steam coming from it.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately.
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).
! The engine should not be operated with the
coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C).
Doing so may cause serious engine damage
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from
other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of
the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle
until the engine has cooled down.
337
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/
consequence
Possible solution
•
Differential
overheated
The differential oil is too hot.
왘
Stop your vehicle immediately in a safe location.
왘
Do not drive any further.
왘
Apply the parking brake (컄 page 55).
왘
Wait until the instrument cluster display has cleared.
Otherwise you could damage the rear differential.
! The differential warning should not be
ignored. Extended driving with the symbol
displayed could result in serious rear differential
damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
338
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/
consequence
Possible solution
±
Visit
workshop
Certain electronic systems are
unable to relay information to
the control system. The following systems may have failed:
왘
Have the electronic systems checked by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately.
왘
Stop your vehicle immediately in a safe location.
왘
Switch off the engine.
왘
Do not drive any further.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately.
Fuel system
malfunction
Visit
workshop
:
앫
Coolant temperature gauge
앫
Tachometer
The fuel cooling system is
malfunctioning.
Engine oil pressure There is no oil in the engine.
Visit
There is a danger of engine
workshop
damage.
! The engine oil level warning should not be
ignored. Extended driving with the symbol
displayed could result in serious engine damage
that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
339
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/
consequence
Possible solution
A
Reserve fuel
The fuel level has fallen into the
reserve range.
왘
Fuel cap
open
A loss of pressure has been
왘 Check the fuel cap (컄 page 247).
detected in the fuel system.
If it is not closed properly:
The fuel cap may not be closed
properly or the fuel system may 왘 Close the fuel cap.
be leaky.
If it is closed properly:
Refuel at the next gas station (컄 page 247).
왘
Have the fuel system checked by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
ì
Tel
Enter PIN
You have not yet entered your
PIN in you telephone.
왘
Enter the PIN for your SIM card.
I
Remove
key
You have forgotten to remove
the SmartKey.
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
Replace
key
No additional code available for
the SmartKey.
왘
Have the SmartKey checked. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
340
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/
consequence
Possible solution
.
3rd brake lamp
The high mounted brake lamp
is malfunctioning.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Brake lamp
left
Auxiliary bulb on
The left brake lamp is malfunctioning. This message will only
appear if a critical number of
LEDs have blown.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Brake lamp
right
Auxiliary bulb on
The right brake lamp is malfunctioning. This message will
only appear if a critical number
of LEDs have blown.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Front foglamp
left
The left front fog lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Front foglamp
right
The right front fog lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Rear foglamp
left
The left rear fog lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
High beam
left
The left high beam lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
High beam
right
The right high beam lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
341
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/
consequence
Possible solution
.
Turn signal
left mirror
The turn signal in the left exterior rear view mirror is malfunctioning. This message will only
appear if all LEDs have stopped
working.
왘
Have the LEDs replaced as soon as possible.
Turn signal
right mirror
The turn signal in the right exterior rear view mirror is
malfunctioning. This message
will only appear if all LEDs have
stopped working.
왘
Have the LEDs replaced as soon as possible.
License plate
lamp - left
The left license plate lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
License plate
lamp - right
The right license plate lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
AUTO light
inoperative
The light sensor is malfunctioning. The headlamps switch on
automatically.
왘
In the control system, set lamp operation to manual
mode (컄 page 134).
왘
Switch on headlamps using the exterior lamp switch.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately.
342
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/
consequence
Possible solution
.
Low beam
left
The left low beam lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Low beam
right
The right low beam lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Marker lamp
front left
The front left side marker lamp
is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Marker lamp
front right
The front right side marker
lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Marker lamp
rear left
The rear left side marker lamp
is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Marker lamp
rear right
The rear right side marker lamp
is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Parking lamp
front left
Auxiliary bulb on
The left front parking lamp is
malfunctioning. An auxiliary
bulb is being used.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Parking lamp
front right
Auxiliary bulb on
The right front parking lamp is
malfunctioning. An auxiliary
bulb is being used.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
343
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/
consequence
Possible solution
.
Reverse lamp
right
The right backup lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Reverse lamp
left
The left backup lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Tail lamp
left
Auxiliary bulb on
The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. This message will only
appear if a critical number of
LEDs have blown.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Tail lamp
right
Auxiliary bulb on
The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. This message will only
appear if a critical number of
LEDs have blown.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Turn off
lights
You have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch,
opened the driver’s door and
left the exterior lamps on.
왘
Switch off the headlamps.
Turn off lights
or
remove key
The exterior lamp switch is set 왘 Switch off the headlamps.
to U and you have forgotten or
to take out the SmartKey. The
parking lamps remain switched 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
on.
344
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/
consequence
Possible solution
.
Turn signal
front left
Auxiliary bulb on
The left front turn signal lamp is
malfunctioning. An auxiliary
bulb is being used.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Turn signal
front right
Auxiliary bulb on
The right front turn signal lamp
is malfunctioning. An auxiliary
bulb is being used.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Turn signal
rear left
Auxiliary bulb on
The left rear turn signal lamp is
malfunctioning. An auxiliary
bulb is being used.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Turn signal
rear right
Auxiliary bulb on
The right rear turn signal lamp
is malfunctioning. An auxiliary
bulb is being used.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
345
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/
consequence
Possible solution
H
Tire pressure
Caution
Tire defect
One or more tires is deflating.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic
situation around you.
왘
Temporarily repair tire using TIREFIT (컄 page 362) or
contact Roadside Assistance. If tire cannot be temporarily repaired using TIREFIT, contact Roadside
Assistance.
왘
Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle.
Continued driving with a flat tire will cause
excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
346
Warning!
G
Have worn or damaged tires replaced in
pairs (front pair or rear pair) an make sure
the tires rotate in the direction specified
(컄 page 261). Otherwise, the driving
stability of the vehicle will be adversely
affected, especially when driving at high
speeds.
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/
consequence
Possible solution
H
Tire pressure
Check tires
The tire inflation
pressure in one or
more tires is already
below the minimum
value.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and
braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.
왘
Check the tires. If no damage visible, check and correct tire
inflation pressure as required.
왘
Temporarily repair tire using TIREFIT (컄 page 362) or contact
Roadside Assistance. If tire cannot be temporarily repaired using
TIREFIT, contact Roadside Assistance.
왘
Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
The tire inflation
pressure in one or
more tires is low.
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle.
Continued driving with a flat tire will cause
excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Warning!
G
Have worn or damaged tires replaced in
pairs (front pair or rear pair) an make sure
the tires rotate in the direction specified
(컄 page 261). Otherwise, the driving
stability of the vehicle will be adversely
affected, especially when driving at high
speeds.
347
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/
consequence
Possible solution
H
Tire pressure, FL
Caution
Tire defect
The left front tire is
deflating.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and
braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.
왘
Temporarily repair tire using TIREFIT (컄 page 362) or contact
Roadside Assistance. If tire cannot be temporarily repaired using
TIREFIT, contact Roadside Assistance.
왘
Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
왘
Check the tires. If no damage visible, check and correct tire
inflation pressure as required.
왘
If necessary, have the wheel repaired or replaced at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire pressure, FL
Check tire
Warning!
The left front tire
inflation pressure is
low.
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle.
Continued driving with a flat tire will cause
excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
348
Warning!
G
Have worn or damaged tires replaced in
pairs (front pair or rear pair) an make sure
the tires rotate in the direction specified
(컄 page 261).
Otherwise, the driving stability of the vehicle
will be adversely affected, especially when
driving at high speeds.
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/
consequence
Possible solution
H
Tire pressure, FR
Caution
Tire defect
The right front tire is
deflating.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and
braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.
왘
Temporarily repair tire using TIREFIT (컄 page 362) or contact
Roadside Assistance. If tire cannot be temporarily repaired using
TIREFIT, contact Roadside Assistance.
왘
Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
왘
Check the tires. If no damage visible, check and correct tire
inflation pressure as required.
왘
If necessary, have the wheel repaired or replaced at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire pressure, FR
Check tire
Warning!
The right front tire
inflation pressure is
low.
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle.
Continued driving with a flat tire will cause
excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Warning!
G
Have worn or damaged tires replaced in
pairs (front pair or rear pair) an make sure
the tires rotate in the direction specified
(컄 page 261).
Otherwise, the driving stability of the vehicle
will be adversely affected, especially when
driving at high speeds.
349
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/
consequence
Possible solution
H
Tire pressure, RL
Caution
Tire defect
The left rear tire is
deflating.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and
braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.
왘
Temporarily repair tire using TIREFIT (컄 page 362) or contact
Roadside Assistance. If tire cannot be temporarily repaired using
TIREFIT, contact Roadside Assistance.
왘
Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
왘
Check the tires. If no damage visible, check and correct tire
inflation pressure as required.
왘
If necessary, have the wheel repaired or replaced at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire pressure, RL
Check tire
Warning!
The left rear tire
inflation pressure is
low.
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle.
Continued driving with a flat tire will cause
excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
350
Warning!
G
Have worn or damaged tires replaced in
pairs (front pair or rear pair) an make sure
the tires rotate in the direction specified
(컄 page 261).
Otherwise, the driving stability of the vehicle
will be adversely affected, especially when
driving at high speeds.
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/
consequence
Possible solution
H
Tire pressure, RR
Caution
Tire defect
The right rear tire is
deflating.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and
braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.
왘
Temporarily repair tire using TIREFIT (컄 page 362) or contact
Roadside Assistance. If tire cannot be temporarily repaired using
TIREFIT, contact Roadside Assistance.
왘
Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
왘
Check the tires. If no damage visible, check and correct tire
inflation pressure as required.
왘
If necessary, have the wheel repaired or replaced at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire pressure, RR
Check tire
Warning!
The right rear tire
inflation pressure is
low.
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle.
Continued driving with a flat tire will cause
excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Warning!
G
Have worn or damaged tires replaced in
pairs (front pair or rear pair) an make sure
the tires rotate in the direction specified
(컄 page 261).
Otherwise, the driving stability of the vehicle
will be adversely affected, especially when
driving at high speeds.
351
Practical hints
What to do if ...
Left display
Right display
Possible cause/
consequence
<
Driver’s seat belt You have forgotten to fasten
Fasten seat belt
your seat belt.
Possible solution
왘
Fasten your seat belt.
Passenger
seat belt
Fasten seat belt
Your passenger has forgotten
to fasten seat belt.
왘
Fasten your seat belt.
O
You are driving with the hood
open.
왘
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
왘
Close the hood (컄 page 250).
There is otherwise danger of an accident.
2
You are attempting to drive
with one or more doors open.
왘
Close the doors.
Ê
This message will appear
whenever the trunk lid is open.
왘
Close the trunk lid (컄 page 103).
L
Tele Aid
Drive to
workshop
One or more main functions of
the Tele Aid system are
malfunctioning.
왘
Have the Tele Aid system checked by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
W
Washer fluid,
please refill
The washer fluid level has
dropped to about 1/3 of total
reservoir capacity.
왘
Add washer fluid (컄 page 257).
Check doors
352
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
왔 Where will I find ...?
First aid kit
The first aid kit is located on the right-hand
side in the trunk.
TIREFIT kit, electric air pump, towing
eye bolt and vehicle literature portfolio
The TIREFIT kit, the electric air pump, the
vehicle literature portfolio and the towing
eye bolt are located on the right-hand side
underneath the floor in the trunk.
i When your SLR is delivered, you will find the
vehicle literature portfolio in the rear storage
compartment (컄 page 207). For permanent
storage in the vehicle, keep the vehicle literature
portfolio in the storage compartment in the
trunk.
! Your vehicle is equipped with a front towing
eye bolt only.
You cannot tow other vehicles with your vehicle.
1 First aid kit
2 Retaining strap
왘
Open the retaining strap 2.
왘
Remove the first aid kit 1.
i Check expiration dates and contents for
completeness at least once a year and replace
missing/expired items.
1 Vehicle literature portfolio
2 TIREFIT kit, electrical air pump
3 Towing eye bolt
353
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Compact guide (Canada only)
The compact guide is located in the rear
storage compartment.
1 Storage compartment
354
Practical hints
Unlocking in an emergency
왔 Unlocking in an emergency
Unlocking the vehicle
Unlocking the trunk
If you cannot unlock the trunk with the
SmartKey, open the trunk with the
mechanical key.
i Unlocking the trunk with the mechanical key
will trigger the anti-theft alarm system when the
door is opened.
To cancel the alarm, insert the SmartKey in the
starter switch.
The handle is located above the rear
license plate recess.
1 Mechanical key locking tab
2 Mechanical key
왘
Press locking tab 1 in the direction of
arrow and, at the same time, remove
mechanical key 2 completely out of
the housing.
Trunk lid lock
3 Unlocking
왘
Insert the mechanical key in the trunk
lid lock.
왘
Perform the following two steps
simultaneously:
왘
Turn the mechanical key
counterclockwise to the stop, to
position 3.
왘
Pull the trunk lid handle and lift the
trunk lid.
355
Practical hints
Unlocking in an emergency
Unlocking the driver’s door
If you can no longer lock or unlock the
doors using the SmartKey, unlock the
driver’s door using the emergency release
catch.
The emergency release catch is located on
the left side in the trunk.
Unlock the trunk (컄 page 355).
왘
Pull emergency release catch 1.
The door is unlocked.
i If it still is not possible to unlock the door,
pull more firmly on the emergency release catch.
i Unlocking the driver’s door with the emergency release catch will trigger the anti-theft
alarm system.
To cancel the alarm, insert the SmartKey in the
starter switch.
1 Emergency release catch
356
왘
왘
Open the door in the normal way.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
왔 Replacing SmartKey batteries
If the batteries in the SmartKey are
discharged, the vehicle can no longer be
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to
have the batteries replaced at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
i When inserting the batteries, make sure
they are clean and free of lint.
i When replacing batteries, always replace
both batteries. The required replacement batteries are available at any Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Remove the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey (컄 page 355).
Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive
substances. Therefore keep the batteries
out of reach of children.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.
357
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
1 Mechanical key
2 Unlocking the battery compartment
3 Removing the battery compartment
4 Slide
왘
Insert mechanical key 1 in side
opening, push gray slide 4 in direction
of arrow 2.
The battery compartment is unlatched.
왘
Pull battery compartment out of the
housing in direction of arrow 3.
358
5 Battery
6 Contact spring
왘
Remove the discharged batteries.
왘
Using a lint-free cloth, insert new
batteries 5 under the contact
spring 6 with the plus (+) side facing
up.
왘
Return battery compartment into
housing until it locks into place.
왘
Slide mechanical key 1 back into the
SmartKey.
왘
Check the operation of the SmartKey.
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
왔 Replacing bulbs
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper
exterior lighting and signaling. It is therefore essential that all bulbs and lamp
assemblies are in good working order at all
times.
! Do not replace the LEDs or bulbs yourself.
You could otherwise damage the vehicle lighting
system or parts of the vehicle. Only have the
LEDs or bulbs replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. See an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for headlamp
adjustment.
i If the headlamps are fogged up on the inside
i Substitute bulbs will be brought into use
when lamps malfunction. Observe the messages
in the multifunction display (컄 page 341).
i If one of the following bulbs blows, another
bulb will adopt its function:
as a result of high humidity, driving the vehicle a
distance should clear up the fogging.
앫
Rear turn signals
앫
Brake lamps
앫
Side lamps
앫
Tail lamps
359
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Front lamps
Lamp
360
Rear lamps
Type
Lamp
Type
1 Additional turn signal
LEDs
8 Brake/parking lamp
LEDs
2 Turn signal
PY 21 W
9 Turn signal lamp
LEDs
3 Side marker lamp
WY 5 W
a Side marker lamp
P 21 W
4 Parking lamp
W5W
LEDs
5 Low and high beam
lamp
D2S, 35 W
b High mounted brake
lamp
c License plate lamp
C5W
6 High beam flasher
H7, 55 W
d Rear fog lamp
P 21 W
7 Front fog lamp
H3, 55 W
e Backup lamp
P 21 W
f Reflector
-
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
왔 Replacing wiper blades
왘
Removing wiper blades
Warning!
G
For safety reasons, remove SmartKey from
starter switch before replacing a wiper
blade. Otherwise the motor could suddenly
turn on and cause injury.
Position the wiper blade at 90° to the
wiper arm.
왘
Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper
arm.
You must feel the wiper arm engage in
position.
왘
Fold the wiper blade parallel to the
wiper arm.
Set the wiper blade at 90° to the wiper
arm.
왘
Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on
the windshield. Make sure you hold on
to the wiper when folding the wiper arm
back.
could tear.
왘
Fold the wiper arm forward.
G
Wiper blades are components that are subject to wear and tear. Change the wiper
blades twice a year, preferably in the spring
and fall. Otherwise the windows will not be
properly wiped. As a result, you may not be
able to observe surrounding traffic conditions and could cause an accident.
! The hood must be opened (컄 page 250)
before folding the wiper arms away from the
windshield. You could otherwise damage the
hood and/or the wiper arm.
Installing wiper blades
왘
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. They
왘
Warning!
Remove the SmartKey from starter
switch.
! Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper
arm back. If released, the force of the impact
from the tensioning spring could crack the
windshield.
Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the
windshield glass without a wiper blade inserted.
왘
Slide the wiper blade out in direction of
arrow.
Make sure the wiper blades are properly
installed. Improperly installed wiper blades may
cause windshield damage.
For your convenience, we recommend that you
have this work carried out by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
361
Practical hints
Flat tire
The vehicle is equipped with the TIREFIT
kit.
i Open door only when conditions are safe to
! A wheel change should only be carried out
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Otherwise there is a danger of damaging the vehicle by
jacking it up incorrectly.
왘
do so.
Have any passenger exit the vehicle at
a safe distance from the roadway.
Sealing tires with TIREFIT
Preparing the vehicle
왘
Park the vehicle in a safe distance from
moving traffic on a hard, flat surface
when possible.
왘
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
왘
Turn the steering wheel so that the
front wheels are in a straight ahead
position.
왘
Set the parking brake.
왘
Move the gear selector lever to park
position P.
왘
Turn off the engine (컄 page 56).
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
362
Warning!
G
Keep TIREFIT away from sparks, open flame
or heat source.
Do not smoke.
Small tire punctures, particularly those in
the tread, can be sealed with TIREFIT.
TIREFIT can be used in ambient temperatures down to -4°F (-20°C).
Warning!
G
TIREFIT is a limited repair device. TIREFIT
cannot be used for cuts or punctures larger
than approximately 0.16 in (4 mm) and tire
damage caused by driving with extremely
low tire inflation pressure, or on a flat tire, or
a damaged wheel.
Do not drive the vehicle under such
circumstances.
Contact your nearest Mercedes-Benz
Center for assistance or call Roadside
Assistance.
! After using TIREFIT, the tire inflation
pressure sensor may have to be replaced.
왘
Foreign objects (e.g. screws or nails)
should not be removed from the tire.
왘
Take TIREFIT, the sticker, and the
electric air pump out of the trunk.
왘
Attach the sticker where it will be easily
seen by the driver on the instrument
cluster.
Practical hints
Flat tire
Warning!
G
i If sealant has leaked out, let it dry. You can
왘
then peel it off.
Stick TIREFIT container 1 upside
down into notch 3 of the electric air
pump.
Take care not to allow the contents of
TIREFIT to come in contact with hair, eyes or
clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled,
swallowed or absorbed through the skin causes skin, eye and respiratory irritation.
Any contact with eyes or skin should be
flushed immediately with plenty of water.
If clothing comes in contact with TIREFIT,
change clothing as soon as possible.
In case of allergic reaction or rash, consult a
physician immediately.
Warning!
G
Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children.
If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with
plenty of water and drink plenty of water.
Do not induce vomiting!
Consult a physician immediately.
Keep away from open flame or heat source.
1 TIREFIT container
2 Flap
3 Notch
4 Electrical plug
5 Air hose
6 Flange
7 Tire valve
8 Electric air pump switch
9 Pressure gauge and vent screw
a Filler hose
G
왘
Open flap 2 on the electric air pump.
Warning!
왘
Pull plug 4 and air hose 5 out of the
pump housing.
Observe safety instructions on air pump
label.
왘
Screw the air pump’s air hose 5 onto
flange 6 of the TIREFIT container.
왘
Unscrew the valve cap from tire
valve 7.
컄컄
363
Practical hints
Flat tire
컄컄왘
Screw filler hose a onto tire valve 7.
왘
Close vent screw 9 on pressure
gauge.
왘
Insert electrical plug 4 into vehicle
cigarette lighter socket.
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 1 (컄 page 40).
왘
After 5 minutes, the pressure gauge must
display at least 26 psi (1.8 bar). The air
hose can become hot during inflation.
Please exercise appropriate caution.
왘
Press I on electric air pump switch 8.
If this tire inflation pressure is not attained, turn off the electric air pump,
detach the filler hose from the tire
valve, and drive vehicle back and forth
very slowly approximately 30 ft (10 m).
The electric air pump should now
switch on and inflate the tire.
This serves to better distribute the
TIREFIT sealant material inside the tire.
! Do not operate the electric air pump longer
왘
than 8 minutes without interruption. Otherwise it
may overheat.
You may operate the air pump again after it has
cooled off.
Unscrew the air pump’s air hose 5
from flange 6 of the TIREFIT
container.
왘
Screw air hose 5 onto tire valve 7.
왘
Inflate the tire again.
Warning!
G
If a tire inflation pressure of 26 psi (1.8 bar)
is not attained, the tire is too severely
damaged for TIREFIT to provide a reliable
tire repair.
In this case, TIREFIT cannot properly seal
the tire.
Do not drive the vehicle.
Contact the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center
or call Roadside Assistance.
왘
After attaining a tire inflation pressure
of 26 psi (1.8 bar), press 0 on electric
air pump switch 8.
The electric air pump should now be
switched off.
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 (컄 page 40).
왘
Detach the electric air pump.
The air hose may still be hot. Please
exercise appropriate caution.
364
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘
Store the electrical plug and the air
hose behind the flap and place the
electrical air pump back in the trunk.
왘
Close the trunk lid.
왘
Drive off immediately.
G
Do not exceed vehicle speed of
50 mph (80 km/h). A TIREFIT repair is not
designed to operate at higher speeds.
The sticker must be attached on the instrument cluster where it will be easily seen by
the driver.
Vehicle handling characteristics may
change. Adapt your driving accordingly.
왘
G
If tire inflation pressure has fallen below
20 psi (1.3 bar), do not continue to drive the
vehicle.
The TIREFIT sealant will distribute itself
evenly inside the tire.
Warning!
Warning!
After driving vehicle for an initial
10 minutes, check tire inflation pressure using the pressure gauge on the
air pump.
Park your vehicle safely away from the roadway and contact the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or Roadside
Assistance.
Warning!
G
Have worn or damaged tires replaced in
pairs (front pair or rear pair) an make sure
the tires rotate in the direction specified
(컄 page 261). Otherwise, the driving stability of the vehicle will be adversely affected,
especially when driving at high speeds.
컄컄
Have the damaged tire replaced.
왘
If tire inflation pressure is at least
20 psi (1.3 bar), inflate tire to correct
pressure (see placard on driver’s door
B-pillar) and contact a nearest qualified
workshop, e.g. an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, to have the
damaged tire replaced.
Recommended duration of use:
A maximum of 300 miles (500 km) at
or below 50 mph (80 km/h) with the
recommended tire inflation pressure.
365
Practical hints
Flat tire
컄컄
Warning!
G
Follow recommend tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being
overheated.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible to obtain a
new TIREFIT kit.
왘
Bring used TIREFIT materials to an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
proper disposal.
Warning!
G
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
Do not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h). A TIREFIT repair is not designed
to operate at higher speeds.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit or vehicle capacity
weight as indicated on the placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout.
Vehicle handling characteristics may
change. Adapt your driving accordingly.
366
The sticker must be attached on the instrument cluster where it will be easily seen by
the driver.
왘
Replace your TIREFIT container every
4 years. Replacement containers are
available at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Practical hints
Batteries
왔 Batteries
Your vehicle is equipped with two batteries:
Warning!
G
앫
The starter battery (located in the
trunk)
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in severe injury or death.
앫
The battery for electrical consumers
(located in the trunk)
Never lean over batteries while connecting,
you might get injured.
Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries
(컄 page 256).
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking, etc.
! You must not jump start the vehicle, otherwise the vehicle electrical systems could be
damaged.
Only use the battery charge unit tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for use on the SLR to
charge the battery or maintain the battery
charge. Using other battery chargers may cause
damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Information on charging the batteries
(컄 page 368).
Have the batteries checked regularly by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Refer to
Maintenance Booklet for maintenance intervals
or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for further information.
If it is necessary to replace the batteries, contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
Do not place metal objects on the battery as
this could result in a short circuit.
Use leak-proof batteries only to avoid the
risk of acid burns in the event of an
accident.
367
Practical hints
Batteries
Warning!
G
The brake system requires electrical power
to operate.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply
or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. The same applies if
battery is disconnected. To brake, the driver
must then apply significantly greater brake
pedal pressure and depress the pedal much
further to obtain the expected braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the
brake pedal. Brakes are only applied to the
front wheels. Stopping distance is
increased! Adjust your driving style
accordingly. For more information, see
“Electro-hydraulic brake system”
(컄 page 86).
Warning!
G
With a disconnected battery
앫
you will no longer be able to turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch
앫
the gear selector lever will remain
locked in park position P
Charging the batteries
Warning!
G
Never charge a battery while still installed in
the vehicle unless the battery charge unit
approved by Mercedes-Benz (supplied with
your vehicle) is being used. Gases may escape during charging and cause explosions
that may result in paint damage, corrosion
or personal injury.
A battery charge unit specially adapted for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz is available,
permitting the charging of the battery in its
installed position. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for information and
availability. Charge battery in accordance
with the separate operating instructions for
the battery charger.
You can obtain detailed information on
charging the battery from your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
368
Practical hints
Batteries
Charging with the battery charger
Using the charging terminals
Only use the battery charge unit approved
by Mercedes-Benz and supplied with your
vehicle. This charger is designed to automatically control the charge rate, and
charge the battery or maintain the existing
charge in the battery while the vehicle is
parked and not being driven for long
periods of time (on average approximately
3 weeks or more). Not driving the vehicle
for such extended periods may cause the
charge in the vehicle battery to drop.
The charging terminals for the battery
charger are located in the trunk underneath the interior floor.
Using the charging point
The charging point for the battery charger
is located next to the CD-changer on the
left-hand side in the trunk.
1 Charging point
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
왘
Open the cover of the charging
point 1.
왘
Connect the battery charger with the
charging point 1.
왘
Observe and follow the separate
operating instructions for the battery
charger.
왘
Charge up the battery.
The battery charger switches off
automatically when the battery is
sufficiently charged.
1 Negative charging terminal
2 Positive charging terminal
왘
Connect positive terminal 2 and
negative terminal 1 with the battery
charger. Start with the positive
terminal 2.
왘
Charge up the battery. Observe and follow the separate operating instructions
for the battery charger.
369
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the
vehicle be transported with all wheels off
the ground using flatbed or appropriate
wheel lift/dolly equipment.
! Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equipment
with SmartKey in starter switch turned to
position 0.
Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Towing
with sling-type equipment over bumpy roads will
damage radiator and supports.
To prevent damage during transport, do not tie
down vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts.
! Do not tow-start the vehicle.
When circumstances do not permit the
recommended towing methods, the vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the
ground or front wheels raised only so far as
necessary to have the vehicle moved to a
safe location where the recommended
towing methods can be employed.
370
! If the vehicle is towed with the front axle
raised, the gear selector lever must be in neutral
position N and the engine must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1).
Active braking action through the ESP® may otherwise seriously damage the brake system which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the
ground, the gear selector lever must be in neutral position N and the SmartKey must be in
starter switch position 2.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the
ground or the front axle raised, the vehicle may
be towed only for distances up to 30 miles
(50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph
(50 km/h).
! To be certain to avoid a possibility of damage to the transmission, however, we recommend the drive shaft be disconnected at the rear
axle drive flange for any towing beyond a short
tow to a nearby garage.
Warning!
G
If circumstances require towing the vehicle
with all wheels on the ground, always tow
with a tow bar if:
앫
the engine will not run
앫
there is a malfunction in the electro-hydraulic brake system
앫
there is a malfunction in the power
supply or in the vehicle’s electrical
system
as that will be necessary to adequately
control the towed vehicle.
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, make certain that the SmartKey
is in starter switch position 2.
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Warning!
G
The brake system requires electrical power
to operate.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply
or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. To brake, the driver
must then apply significantly greater brake
pedal pressure and depress the pedal much
further to obtain the expected braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the
brake pedal. Brakes are only applied to the
front wheels. Stopping distance is increased! Adapt your driving style accordingly. For more information, see
“Electro-hydraulic brake system”
(컄 page 86).
! Towing of the vehicle should only be done
using the properly installed towing eye bolt.
Never attach tow cable, tow rope or tow rod to
the vehicle chassis, frame or suspension parts.
i To signal turns while being towed with the
hazard warning flasher in use, turn SmartKey in
starter switch to position 2 and activate the
combination switch for the left or right turn
signal in the usual manner – only the selected
turn signal will operate.
Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard
warning flasher will operate again.
i When towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, please note the following:
With the automatic central locking activated and
the SmartKey in starter switch position 2 the
vehicle doors lock if the left front wheel as well
as the right rear wheel are turning at vehicle
speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or
more.
To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking,
deactivate the automatic central locking
(컄 page 139) and switch off the tow-away alarm
(컄 page 94).
i The gear selector lever will remain locked in
park position P and the SmartKey will not turn in
the starter switch if the battery is disconnected
or discharged. See notes on the battery
(컄 page 367).
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
371
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Installing/reinstalling towing eye bolt
왘
! Only secure the tow bar to the towing eye
bolt. The vehicle could otherwise be damaged.
왘
Take the towing eye bolt 1 from its
storage compartment (컄 page 353).
! Your vehicle is equipped with a front towing
eye bolt only (컄 page 372).
You cannot tow other vehicles with your vehicle.
1 Towing eye bolt
왘
Remove cover from the access hole.
왘
Screw towing eye bolt 1 clockwise in
to its stop.
372
Remove the towing eye bolt when you
no longer need it. To do this, carry out
the above steps in reverse order.
Points to bear in mind
앫
The vehicle must not be tow-started.
앫
If the vehicle is to be towed, only tow it
with all wheels on the ground.
앫
If the vehicle has suffered transmission
damage, only tow it with the propeller
shaft disconnected.
앫
Before towing the vehicle, make sure
the battery is connected and charged.
Otherwise you will not be able to switch
on the ignition and move the selector
lever to neutral position N. There will
then be no power assistance when
steering and braking.
Transporting the vehicle
The towing eye bolt can be used to pull the
vehicle onto a trailer or transporter for
transporting purposes.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
Move the selector lever to neutral
position N.
! Due to the low clearance height of the SLR,
care must be taken when loading and unloading
from a transporter to avoid damaging the vehicle
body work.
To secure the vehicle, only tie it down by the
wheels or tires. Otherwise it could be damaged.
Practical hints
Fuses
왔 Fuses
! You must not change the fuses yourself, as
you could damage the vehicle electrical systems.
Have fuses changed at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
373
Technical data
Spare parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and tires
Electrical system
Main dimensions
Weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Technical data
Spare parts service
The “Technical data” section provides the
necessary technical data for your vehicle.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers
maintain a stock of Genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts required for maintenance and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts distribution centers
provide quick and reliable parts service.
More than 300 000 different parts for
Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subjected to stringent quality inspections. Each
part has been specifically developed,
manufactured or selected for and adapted
to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should be installed.
376
! The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts and accessories not authorized by
Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehicle, which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty, or could compromise the vehicle’s
durability or safety.
Technical data
Warranty coverage
왔 Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of
the warranties printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed in the vehicle in accordance
with the terms of the following warranties:
앫
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
앫
Emission System Warranty
앫
Emission Performance Warranty
앫
California, Maine, Massachusetts and
Vermont1 Emission Control System
Warranty
1
At time of printing, the decision regarding compliance with Vermont certification regulations was
still pending. The vehicle may not be permitted to
be registered in Vermont. Check with an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details.
Replacement parts and accessories are
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Spare Parts
and Accessories warranties, copies of
which are available at any Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet
Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information booklet, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a
replacement. It will be mailed to you.
377
Technical data
Identification labels
Engine number
The engine number is engraved on the underside of the engine and can only be read
after removing the casing on the bottom of
the engine.
There is also a plate on the left-hand side
of the engine cover.
i When ordering parts, please specify vehicle
1 Vehicle certification label with Vehicle
Identification Number
2 Product option code plate with paint
number
3 Vehicle Identification Number
The vehicle certification plate with the Vehicle Identification Number and the vehicle
identification plate (certification plate)
with the paint number are located on the
A-pillar on the driver’s side.
The Vehicle Identification Number is located on the driver’s side in the bottom corner
of the windshield.
378
4 Vacuum line routing diagram label
5 Emission control information label,
includes both federal and California
certification exhaust emission
standards
identification and engine numbers.
Technical data
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
왔 Layout of poly-V-belt drive
The SLR has two poly-V-belts (belt one
shown in purple/belt two shown in black).
1 Idler pulley
2 Automatic belt tensioner
3 Power steering pump
4 Air conditioning compressor
5 Idler pulley
6 Crankshaft
7 Coolant pump
8 Generator (alternator)
9 Idler pulley
a Automatic belt tensioner
b Supercharger
379
Technical data
Engine
Model
Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren
(199.376)1
Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren 722 Edition
(199.376)1
Engine
155
155
Mode of operation
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders
8
8
Bore
3.82 in (97.00 mm)
3.82 in (97.00 mm)
Stroke
3.60 in (92.00 mm)
3.60 in (92.00 mm)
Total piston displacement
331.8 cu in (5439 cm )
331.8 cu in (5439 cm3)
Compression ratio
8.8:1
8.8:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349
3
rpm2
617 hp/6500
(460 kW/6500 rpm)
641 hp/6500 rpm2
(478 kW/6500 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 575 lb-ft/3250-5000 rpm
(780 Nm/3250-5000 rpm)
605 lb-ft/4000 rpm
(820 Nm/4000 rpm)
Maximum engine speed
7000 rpm
7000 rpm
Firing order
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt
2415 mm/1244 mm
2415 mm/1244 mm
1
2
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
380
Technical data
Rims and tires
왔 Rims and tires
! For safety reasons, only use tires and rims
which have been tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz for use on SLR vehicles. Tires
approved by Mercedes-Benz are developed to
provide best possible performance in conjunction with the driving safety systems on your
vehicle such as ABS or ESP®.
! Using tires and rims other than those approved by Mercedes-Benz can have detrimental
effects, such as
앫
Poor handling characteristics
앫
Increased noise
앫
Increased fuel consumption
Moreover, tires and rims not approved by
Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit dimensional variations and different tire deformation
characteristics that could cause them to come
into contact with the vehicle body or axle parts.
This may result in damage to the tires or the
vehicle.
i Further information on tires and rims is
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. A placard with the recommended tire inflation pressures is located on the driver’s door
B-pillar. Some vehicles may have supplemental
tire pressure information for driving at high
speeds (컄 page 268) or for vehicle loads less
than the maximum loaded vehicle condition. If
such information is provided, it can be found on
the placard located on the inside of the fuel filler
flap. The tire pressure should be checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires.
Follow tire manufacturer’s maintenance
recommendation included with vehicle.
381
Technical data
Rims and tires
Mixed size tires
Only Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren:
Turbine-style
10-spoke-style*
Rims (light alloy)
9 J x 19
9 J x 18
Wheel offset
1.83 in (46.5 mm)
Front axle:
Summer tires (radial-ply tires)
255/35 ZR19 (96Y) XL
1.77 in (45 mm)
1
245/40 ZR18 (93Y)
Rear axle:
Rims (light alloy)
111/2 J x 19
Wheel offset
1.73 in (44 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires)
1
Must not be used with snow chains.
! Only use Michelin tires of the sizes and
types noted above. They are the only tires
approved for use on the Mercedes-Benz SLR
McLaren. Use of tires not specially approved for
the Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren could result in
unanticipated performance characteristics. For
more information, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
382
295/30 ZR19 (100Y) XL
111/2 J x 18
1.73 in (44 mm)
1
295/35 ZR18 (99Y)1
Technical data
Rims and tires
Only Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren
722 Edition:
Lightweight-style
Front axle:
Rims (light alloy)
9 J x 19
Wheel offset
1.83 in (46.5 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires)
255/35 ZR19 (96Y) XL1
Rear axle:
Rims (light alloy)
111/2 J x 19
Wheel offset
1.73 in (44 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires)
295/30 ZR19 (100Y) XL1
1
Must not be used with snow chains.
! Only use Michelin tires of the sizes and
types noted above. They are the only tires
approved for use on the Mercedes-Benz SLR
McLaren 722 Edition. Use of tires not specially
approved for the Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren
722 Edition could result in unanticipated performance characteristics. For more information,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
383
Technical data
Rims and tires
Winter tires*
Only Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren:
Front axle:
Rims (light alloy)
9 J x 18
Wheel offset
1.77 in (45 mm)
Tires (radial-ply tires)
245/40 R18 97V XL M+S.
Rear axle:
Rims (light alloy)
9 J x 18
Wheel offset
1.77 in (45 mm)
Tires (radial-ply tires)
245/40 R18 97V XL M+S.
! Only use Michelin tires of the sizes and
types noted above. They are the only tires
approved for use on the SLR. Use of tires not
specially approved for the SLR could result in
unanticipated performance characteristics. For
more information, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
384
Technical data
Rims and tires
Only Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren
722 Edition:
Front axle:
Rims (light alloy)
9 J x 19
Wheel offset
1.83 in (46.5 mm)
Tires (radial-ply tires)
255/35 R19V 96 XL M+S.1
Rear axle:
Rims (light alloy)
9 J x 19
Wheel offset
1.83 in (46.5 mm)
Tires (radial-ply tires)
255/35 R19V 96 XL M+S.1
1
Must not be used with snow chains.
! Only use Dunlop tires of the sizes and types
noted above. They are the only tires approved for
use on the Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren 722
Edition. Use of tires not specially approved for
the Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren 722 Edition
could result in unanticipated performance characteristics. For more information, contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
385
Technical data
Electrical system
Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren
Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren 722 Edition
Generator (alternator)
14 V/150 A
14 V/150 A
Starter motor
12 V/1.7 kW
12 V/1.7 kW
Starter battery
12 V/35 Ah
12 V/35 Ah
Battery for electrical consumers
12 V/70 Ah
12 V/70 Ah
Spark plugs
NGK ILFR6A
NGK ILFR6A
Electrode gap
0.031 in (0.8 mm)
0.031 in (0.8 mm)
Tightening torque
18 – 22 lb-ft (25 – 30 Nm)
18 – 22 lb-ft (25 – 30 Nm)
Battery
386
Technical data
Main dimensions
왔 Main dimensions
Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren
Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren 722 Edition
Overall vehicle length
183.3 in (4656 mm)
183.3 in (4656 mm)
Overall vehicle width
75.1 in (1908 mm)
75.1 in (1908 mm)
Overall vehicle width
(doors open - widest point)
111.7 in (2838 mm)
111.7 in (2838 mm)
Overall vehicle height
49.6 in (1261 mm)
49.3 in (1251 mm)
Overall vehicle height
(doors open - highest point)
80.5 in (2045 mm)
80.1 in (2035 mm)
Wheelbase
106.3 in (2700 mm)
106.3 in (2700 mm)
Track, front
64.5 in (1638 mm)
64.5 in (1638 mm)
Track, rear
61.8 in (1569 mm)
61.8 in (1569 mm)
387
Technical data
Weights
Trunk load max.
388
Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren
Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren 722 Edition
220 lb (100 kg)
220 lb (100 kg)
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
왔 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Capacities
Warning!
Vehicle components and their respective
lubricants must match. Therefore only use
products tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Please refer to the Factory Approved
Service Products pamphlet (USA only), or
inquire at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
G
Comply with all valid regulations with
respect to handling, storing and disposing of
service fluids. Otherwise you could
endanger persons or the environment.
For health reasons, you should prevent service fluids from coming into direct contact
with your skin or clothing.
If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a
physician immediately.
Keep service fluids out of the reach of
children.
Capacity
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Engine with oil filter
9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
Approved engine oils
Automatic transmission
8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
MB Automatic Transmission Fluid
Rear axle
2.3 US qt (2.2 l)
Hypoid gear oil SAE 75 W 85
Power steering
approx. 1.15 US qt (1.1 l)
MB Power Steering Fluid
(Pentosin CHF 11S)
Brake system
1.6 US qt (1.5 l)
MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)
389
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Capacity
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
approx. 10.6 US qt (10.0 l)
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren
approx. 5.3 US qt (5.0 l)
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren 722 Edition
approx. 6.3 US qt (6.0 l)
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
Fuel tank
including a reserve of
25.6 US gal (97.0 l)
3.2 US gal (12.0 l)
Premium unleaded gasoline:
Minimum Posted Octane 91
(Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON)
Cooling system
Low temperature cooling system
Air conditioning system
Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning
system
1
R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant
oil (never R-12)
7.4 US qt (7 l)
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” and
commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing. Follow suggested mixing ratios (컄 page 397).
390
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Engine oils
Engine oil additives
Air conditioning refrigerant
Engine oils are specifically tested for their
suitability in our engines and durability for
our service intervals. Therefore, only use
approved engine oils and oil filters
required for vehicles with Maintenance
System. For a listing of approved engine
oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory
Approved Service Products pamphlet
(USA only), or contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
! Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
They may damage the engine.
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
lubricating oil are used in the air conditioning system.
Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending
oil additives are not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based
lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the system
will occur.
! Using engine oils and oil filters of
specification other than those expressly required for the Maintenance System, or changing
of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer than
those called for by the Maintenance System will
result in engine or emission control system damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Please follow Maintenance System recommendations for scheduled oil changes. Failure to do
so will result in engine or emission control system damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
391
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Brake fluid
Warning!
Premium unleaded gasoline
G
During vehicle operation, the boiling point of
the brake fluid is continuously reduced
through the absorption of moisture from the
atmosphere. Under extremely strenuous
operating conditions, this moisture content
can lead to the formation of bubbles in the
system, thus reducing the system’s
efficiency.
Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced
regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s Maintenance Booklet for replacement interval.
Only brake fluid approved by
Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
provide you with additional information.
392
Warning!
G
! To maintain the engine’s durability and performance, premium unleaded gasoline must be
used. If premium unleaded is not available and
low octane fuel is used, follow these precautions:
앫
Have the fuel tank only partially filled with
unleaded regular gasoline and fill up with
premium unleaded gasoline as soon as
possible.
Never allow sparks, flame or smoking
materials near gasoline!
앫
Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration.
Turn off the engine before refueling.
앫
Do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm
if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such
as two persons and no luggage.
앫
Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator
pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or
operating in mountainous terrain.
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
It burns violently and can cause serious
personal injury.
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
inhaling fumes and skin or cloth contact,
extinguish all smoking materials.
Direct skin contact with fuels and the
inhalation of fuel vapors can damage your
health.
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Fuel requirements
Gasoline additives
Only use premium unleaded fuel:
A major concern among engine
manufacturers is carbon build-up caused
by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends
only the use of quality gasoline containing
additives that prevent the build up of
carbon deposits.
앫
The octane number (posted at the
pump) must be 91 min. It is an average
of both the Research Octane Number
(RON) and the Motor Octane Number
(MON): (RON+MON)/2. This is also
known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be
used provided the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed
10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.
The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is
not allowed. Gasohol, which contains
10% ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline,
can be used.
These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
After an extended period of using fuels
without such additives, carbon deposits
can build up especially on the intake valves
and in the combustion area, leading to
engine performance problems such as:
앫
Warm-up hesitation
앫
Unstable idle
앫
Knocking/pinging
앫
Misfire
앫
Power loss
In areas where carbon deposits may be
encountered due to lack of availability of
gasolines which contain these additives,
Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of
additives approved by us for use on
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Refer to Factory
Approved Service Products pamphlet
(USA only) or contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for a listing of
approved product(s). Follow directions on
product label.
Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel.
This only results in unnecessary cost and
may be harmful to engine operation.
! Damage or malfunction resulting from poor
fuel quality or from blending additional fuel
additives other than those tested and approved
by us for use on Mercedes-Benz vehicles are not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
For a listing of approved products, refer to the
Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet
(USA only) or contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
393
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Coolants
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:
앫
corrosion protection
앫
freeze protection
앫
boiling protection (by increasing the
boiling point)
The cooling system was filled at the factory
with a coolant providing freeze protection
to approximately -35°F (-37°C) and
corrosion protection.
! Add premixed coolant solution only. Adding
water and MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
separately from each other, could cause engine
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to
-35°F (-37°C), the boiling point of the coolant in the pressurized cooling system is
reached at approximately 266°F (130°C).
394
The coolant solution must be used year
round to provide the necessary corrosion
protection and increase in the boil-over
protection. Refer to Maintenance Booklet
for replacement interval.
Coolant system design and coolant used
determine the replacement interval. The
replacement interval published in the
Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze solution or other Mercedes-Benz approved
products of equal specification are used to
renew the coolant concentration or bring it
back up to the proper level.
For information on other Mercedes-Benz
approved products of equal specification,
refer to the Factory Approved Service
Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
To provide important corrosion protection,
the solution must be at least 50% anticorrosion/antifreeze (equivalent to freeze
protection to approximately
-35°F [-37°C]). If you use a solution that is
more than 55% anticorrosion/antifreeze
(freeze protection to approximately
-49°F [-45°C]), the engine temperature
will increase due to the lower heat transfer
capability of the solution. Therefore, do not
use more than this amount of
anticorrosion/antifreeze.
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
If the coolant level is low, water and
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
should be used to bring it up to the proper
level (have cooling system checked for
signs of leakage). Please make sure the
mixture is in accordance with label instructions.
The water in the cooling system must meet
minimum requirements, which are usually
satisfied by normal drinking water. If you
are not sure about the water quality, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
395
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts. The use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines
necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze
coolant used in such engines be specifically formulated to protect the aluminum
parts. Failure to use such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will result in a
significantly shortened service life.
Therefore, the following product is strongly
recommended for use in your vehicle:
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze agent.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
Approximately freeze protection
-35°F (-37°C)
-49°F (-45°C)
5.2 US qt (5.0 l)
5.8 US qt (5.5 l)
Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren
2.6 US qt (2.5 l)
2.9 US qt (2.75 l)
Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren 722 Edition
3.2 US qt (3.0 l)
3.5 US qt (3.3 l)
Main cooling system
Low temperature cooling system
396
Before the start of the winter season (or
once a year in hot southern regions), you
should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
concentration checked. The coolant is also
regularly checked each time you bring your
vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for service.
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system
Both the windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system are supplied
from the windshield washer reservoir.
The windshield washer reservoir has a
capacity of approximately 7.4 US qt (7 l).
왘
Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate and water (or concentrate and commercially available
premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient
temperatures).
Warning!
G
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze
on hot engine parts because it may ignite
and burn. You could be seriously burned.
Windshield and headlamp washer fluid
mixing ratio
For temperatures above freezing point, use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
“MB SummerFit” and water:
앫
1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts
water
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to
1 gal [4.0 l] water)
For temperatures below freezing point, use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
“MB SummerFit” and commercially available premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze:
앫
1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts
solvent
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to
1 gal [4.0 l] solvent)
397
T e c h n ic a l t e r m s
Technical terms
ABS
(Anti-lock Braking System)
Prevents the wheels from locking up
during braking so that the vehicle can
continue to be steered.
Accessory weight
(컄 page 284)
ACL
(Airbrake/Central Locking)
Controls the locking mechanism of the
Airbrake and the central locking
system.
Air pressure
(컄 page 284)
Aspect ratio
(컄 page 284)
Bar
(컄 page 284)
BAS
(Brake Assist System)
System for potentially reducing braking
distances in emergency braking situations. The system is activated when it
senses an emergency based on how
fast the brake is applied.
CAN system
(Controller Area Network)
Data bus network serving to control
vehicle functions such as door locking
or windshield wiping depending on
vehicle settings and/or ambient
conditions.
Bead
(컄 page 284)
Cockpit
All instruments, switches, buttons and
indicator/warning lamps in the passenger compartment needed for vehicle
operation and monitoring.
Bi-Xenon headlamps
Headlamps which use an electric arc as
the light source and produce a more intense light than filament headlamps.
Bi-Xenon headlamps produce low
beam and high beam.
CAC
(Customer Assistance Center)
Mercedes-Benz customer service center, which can help you with any questions about your vehicle and provide
assistance in the event of a
breakdown.
Cold tire inflation pressure
(컄 page 284)
Control system
The control system is used to call up
vehicle information and to change
component settings. Information and
messages appear in the multifunction
display. The driver uses the buttons on
the multifunction steering wheel to
navigate through the system and to
adjust settings.
399
Technical terms
Cruise control
Driving convenience system for automatically maintaining the vehicle speed
set by the driver.
ESP®
(Eectronic Stability Program)
Improves vehicle handling and
directional stability.
Curb weight
(컄 page 284)
ETD
(Emergency Tensioning Device)
Device which deploys in certain frontal
and rear collisions exceeding the system’s threshold to tighten the seat
belts.
->SRS
DOT
(Department of Transportation)
(컄 page 284)
Engine number
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the cylinder block to
uniquely identify each engine
produced.
Engine oil viscosity
Measure of the internal oil friction (viscosity) at different temperatures. The
higher the temperature the oil can tolerate without thinning too much, or the
lower the temperature it can tolerate
without thickening too much, the better the viscosity characteristics of the
oil.
400
GAWR
(Gross Axle Weight Rating)
(컄 page 284)
Gear range
Number of gears which are available to
the automatic transmission for shifting.
The automatic gear shifting process
can be adapted to specific operating
conditions using the gear selector lever
or the steering wheel gearshift control
buttons.
GPS
(Global Positioning System)
Satellite-based system for relaying
geographic location information to and
from vehicles equipped with special receivers. Employs CD digital maps for
navigation.
GVW
(Gross Vehicle Weight)
(컄 page 284)
GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
(컄 page 285)
Head-thorax air bag
Installed in the doors, these air bags
protect occupants during side impact
collisions exceeding a preset threshold. Unlike normal side air bags,
head-thorax air bags are also designed
to provide protection for the head area.
Technical terms
Instrument cluster
The displays and indicator/warning
lamps in the driver’s field of vision, including the tachometer, speedometer,
engine temperature and fuel gauge.
Kickdown
Depressing the accelerator past the
point of resistance shifts the transmission down to the lowest possible. This
very quickly accelerates the vehicle
and should not be used for normal
acceleration needs.
Kilopascal (kPa)
(컄 page 285)
Maximum load rating
(컄 page 285)
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
(컄 page 285)
Maximum tire inflation pressure
(컄 page 285)
MON
(Motor Octane Number)
The Motor Octane Number for gasoline
as determined by a standardized
method. It is an indication of a gasoline's ability to resist undesired detonation (knocking). The average of both
the MON (Motor Octane Number) and
RON (Research Octane Number) is
posted at the pump, also known as
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Multifunction display
Two display fields in the instrument
cluster used to present information
provided by the control system.
Multifunction steering wheel
Steering wheel with buttons for
operating the control system.
OCS
(Occupant Classification System)
The system automatically turns the
front passenger front air bag on or off
based on the classified occupant size
category determined by weight sensor
readings from the seat.
Overspeed range
Engine speeds within the red marking
on the tachometer dial. Avoid this
engine speed range, as it may result in
serious engine damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Poly-V-belt drive
Drives engine-components (alternator,
AC compressor, etc.) from the engine.
Normal occupant weight
(컄 page 285)
401
Technical terms
Power train
Collective term designating all components used to generate and transmit
motive power to the drive axles,
including
앫
engine
앫
clutch/torque converter
앫
transmission
앫
transfer case
앫
drive shaft
앫
differential
앫
axle shafts/axles
Production options weight
(컄 page 285)
Program mode selector switch
Used to switch the automatic transmission between sport operation (S),
comfort operation (C) and manual
operation (MAN).
PSI
(Pounds per square inch)
(컄 page 285)
402
Recommended tire inflation pressure
(컄 page 285)
REST
(Residual Engine Heat Utilization)
Feature that uses the engine heat
stored in the coolant to heat the vehicle interior for a short time after the
engine has been turned off.
Rim
(컄 page 285)
RON
(Research Octane Number)
The Research Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized
method. It is an indication of a gasoline’s ability to resist undesired detonation (knocking). The average of both
the MON (Motor Octane Number) and
RON (Research Octane Number) is
posted at the pump, also known as
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Electro-hydraulic brake system
Electronically controlled hydraulic
braking system for increased braking
safety and comfort.
Shift lock
When the vehicle is parked, this lock
prevents the gear selector lever from
being inadvertently moved out of park
position P without SmartKey turned
and brake pedal depressed.
Sidewall
(컄 page 285)
SRS
(Supplemental Restraint System)
Seat belts, emergency tensioning device and air bags. Though independent
systems, they are closely interfaced to
provide effective occupant protection.
Technical terms
Tele Aid
(Telematic Alarm Identification on
Demand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response: automatic and
manual emergency, Roadside
Assistance and Information. Tele Aid is
initially activated by completing a
subscriber agreement and placing an
acquaintance call.
The Tele Aid system is operational
provided that the vehicle’s battery is
charged, properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is
available.
Tightening torque
Force times lever arm (e.g. a lug
wrench) with which threaded fasteners
such as wheel bolts are tightened.
TIN
(Tire Identification Number)
(컄 page 286)
Tire load rating
(컄 page 286)
Tire ply composition and material used
(컄 page 286)
Tire speed rating
(컄 page 286)
TIREFIT kit
Accessory for emergency and temporary tire repair. The TIREFIT kit consists
of a container with sealant material, a
filler hose and an air compressor.
Traction
(컄 page 286)
Tread
(컄 page 286)
Treadwear indicators
(컄 page 286)
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
(컄 page 286)
Vehicle capacity weight
(컄 page 286)
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
(컄 page 286)
VIN
(Vehicle Identification Number)
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the body to uniquely
identify each vehicle produced.
403
I nd e x
Index
A
ABS 81, 399
Indicator lamp 29, 302
Messages in the multifunction
display 316, 317
ABS/ESP®
Warning lamp 29, 300
Accelerator position, automatic
transmission 173
Accessory weight 284
Accident 54
ACL 399
Messages in the multifunction
display 323
Additional turn signals, Exterior
mirror 360
Air bags 62
Children 63
Front, Driver 65
Front, Passenger 66
Head-thorax 65, 66
Knee 66
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) 67
Passenger front air bag off indicator
lamp 70
Safety guidelines 64
Air conditioning system see Automatic climate control
Air distribution 191, 192
Air pressure 284
Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure
Air recirculation mode 195
Air vents 187
Air volume 191, 193
Airbrake 31, 89
Automatic mode 91
Emergency braking 91
Manual mode 90
Message in the multifunction
display 327
Test Mode 90
Warning lamp 29, 307
Alarm system see Anti-theft systems
Anticorrosion/antifreeze 390, 396
Antiglare, Interior rear view mirror 182
Antilock Brake System see ABS
Anti-theft systems
Anti-theft alarm system 92
Immobilizer 92
Tow-away alarm 94
Anti-theft wheel nuts 288
Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning
Armrest 206
405
Index
Ashtray 208
Aspect ratio 284
AUDIO menu 126
Audio system 31, 145
Button and soft key operation 148
Cassette operation 154
CD operation 158
Location 145
Operating and display elements 146
Operating safety 145
Operation 148
Radio operation 151
Switching on/off 148
Telephone operation 162, 210
Auto-dimming, Interior rear view
mirror 182
Automatic car wash 296
Automatic central locking, Control
system 104, 139
406
Automatic climate control 186
Adjusting air volume 193
Air conditioning refrigerant 391
Air conditioning, Cooling 196
Air distribution 191, 192
Air recirculation mode 195
Air vents 187
Air volume 191
Control panel 188
Deactivating system 190
Defrosting 185, 194
MAXCOOL 193
Residual heat utilization 197
Side air vents 31
Temperature 191
Temperature sensor 33
Automatic headlamp mode 107
Automatic lighting control, Interior
lighting 112
Automatic transmission 169
Accelerator position 173
Damage 372
Driving tips 173
Emergency operation (Limp-Home
Mode) 181
Gear ranges 174
Gear selector lever 32, 169
Gear selector lever control one-touch
gearshifting 175
Gear selector lever position 171
Gear shifting malfunctions 181
Kickdown 173
Manual shift program 179
Shift program mode selector
switch 175
Shifting procedure 170
Starting the engine 47
Steering wheel gearshift control
one-touch gearshifting 177
Towing 372
Transmission fluid level 254
Automatic transmission fluid 254
Index
B
Backup lamp 360
Messages in the multifunction
display 344
Bar 284
BAS 83, 399
Batteries, SmartKey
Checking battery condition 101
Replacing 357
Batteries, Vehicle 256
Charging 368
Consumer battery 367
Jump starting 367
Maintenance 367
Messages in the multifunction
display 327
Starter battery 256
Batteries, vehicle
Consumer battery 256
Battery charger 369
Bead 284
Bi-Xenon headlamps 399
Body surface 295
Brake
Electro-hydraulic brake system
Brake Assist System see BAS
Brake disks
Wear 238
Brake fluid 389, 392
Checking 248
Messages in the multifunction
display 330
Brake lamps 360
High mounted 360
Messages in the multifunction
display 341
Brake pads
Messages in the multifunction
display 334
Wear 238
Brakes 236
Excessive loads 238
Warning lamp 29, 303
Break-in period 234
Bulbs
Messages in the multifunction
display 341
Replacing 359
86
C
CAC 399
California retail buyers and lessees, important notice for 15
Call priority, Tele Aid 220
CAN system 399
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants 389
Cargo area see Trunk
Cassette player 154
Catalytic converter 244
CD changer 158
Location 159
CD player 127
Cellular phone
Delayed switch-off time 212
Making calls in hands-free mode 213
Making calls in private mode 212
Center console
Lower part 32
Upper part 31
Center storage compartment 207
407
Index
Central locking
Automatic 104, 139
Central locking switch 31
Locking/unlocking from inside 105
Central locking switch 105
Child restraints 60
Children in the vehicle 75
Air bags 63
Indicator lamp, passenger front air
bag 70
Infant and child restraint systems 60,
70, 78
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) 67
Passenger front air bag off indicator
lamp 70, 312
Cigarette lighter 208
Clock 29, 133
Setting time 134
Closed circuit racing
Brakes 238
Cockpit 26, 399
408
Cold tire inflation pressure 284
Combination switch 27, 51, 110
Compact guide 354
Control and operation of radio
transmitters 243
Control system 117, 399
Multifunction display 117
Multifunction steering wheel 118
Control system menus 120
722 Edition menu 123
AUDIO menu 126
Settings menu 129
Standard display menu 122
TEL menu 141
Trip computer menu 139
Vehicle status message memory
menu 128
Control system submenus 121, 130
Instrument cluster 132
Lighting 134
Time 133
Vehicle 138
Controller Area Network see CAN
Coolant 248, 255, 394
Anticorrosion/antifreeze mixing ratio
and quantity 396
Capacities 390
Checking coolant level 248, 255
Messages in the multifunction
display 335
Temperature 245
Temperature gauge 115
Warning lamp 29, 306
Courtesy lighting 113
Cruise control 27, 203, 400
Messages in the multifunction
display 317
Curb weight 284
Customer Assistance Center see CAC
Index
D
Daytime running lamp mode 108
Setting 135
Deep water see Standing water
Defogging, Windshield 194
Defrosting, Front 194
Defrosting, Rear 185
Delayed switch-off
Exterior lamps 136
Interior lighting 137
Department of Transportation see DOT
Differential
Message in the multifunction
display 338
Difficulties
While driving 54
With starting 49
Digital clock see Clock
Digital speedometer 122
Dimensions, Vehicle 387
Direction of rotation, Tires 261
Display elements, Audio system 146
Displays
Digital speedometer 122
Maintenance service indicator 292
Multifunction display 117
Outside temperature 116, 122
Symbol messages 327
Text messages 316
Vehicle status messages 128, 314
Distance to empty 140
Distance to empty (range), Trip
computer 140
Door
Control panel 34
Entry lamps 112
Handle, Inside 34
Handle, Outside 38
Locking/unlocking, SmartKey 38, 98
Message in the multifunction
display 352
Opening from inside/outside 38,
101
Remote door unlock, Tele Aid 220
Unlocking in an emergency 356
DOT 284
Drinking and driving 235
Driving 45, 50
Abroad 243
Hints, Electro-hydraulic brake
system 88
Hydroplaning 241
In winter 242
Instructions 45, 235
Problems 54
Safety systems 81
Systems 203
Through standing water 243
Tips, Automatic transmission 173
Driving safety systems 81
ABS 81
BAS 83
Electro-hydraulic brake system 86
Electronic traction system 85
ESP® 83
Driving systems
Cruise control 203
Dust cover 228
409
Index
E
Electric air pump 353
Electrical fuses 373
Electrical outlet see Power outlet
Electrical system, Technical data 386
Electro-hydraulic brake system 81, 86,
402
Activation 87
Deactivation 88
Driving hints 88
Emergency operating mode 87
Messages in the multifunction
display 329
Self-check 88, 334
Warning lamp 86
Electronic Stability Program see ESP®
Emergency calls
911 166
Tele Aid 215
Emergency operations
Automatic transmission (Limp-Home
Mode) 181
Remote door unlock, Tele Aid 220
Trunk lid, Releasing from inside 104
Unlocking the vehicle 355
410
Emergency Tensioning Device see ETD
Emergency, In case of
First aid kit 353
Flat tire 362
Hazard warning flasher 111
Instrument cluster, Indicator
lamps 300
Roadside Assistance 16, 217
Towing the vehicle 370
Emission control 245
Information label 378
System warranties 14
Vacuum line routing diagram
label 378
Engine
Break-in recommendations 234
Cleaning 297
Compartment 250
Malfunction indicator lamp 29, 304
Number 378, 400
Poly-V-belt layout 379
Starting 47
Tachometer 29
Technical data 380
Turning off 56
Engine coolant see Coolant
Engine oil 253, 391
Adding 254, 389
Additives 253, 391
Checking level 253
Consumption 253
Filler neck 253
Message in the multifunction
display 339
Recommended engine oils and oil
filter 391
Temperature 29
Oil temperature indicator 307
Viscosity 400
ESP® 81, 83, 400
Messages in the multifunction
display 318
Resetting 318
Warning lamp 83, 300
ETD 74, 400
Safety guidelines 64
Exterior lamp switch 51, 106
Exterior rear view mirrors 44
Index
F
Filler neck, Engine oil 253
First aid kit 353
Flat tire 362
Preparing the vehicle 362
TIREFIT kit 362
Floormats* 226
Floormats* (Only Mercedes-Benz SLR
McLaren 722 Edition) 227
Fluids
Automatic transmission fluid 254,
389
Brake fluid 248, 389, 392
Capacities 389
Engine coolant 255, 390, 394
Engine oil 253, 389, 391
Power steering fluid 389
Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system 257, 390
Fog lamps 109, 360
Message in the multifunction
display 341
Front air bags 65
Front lamps see Headlamps
Fuel 247
Additives 393
Capacity, Fuel tank 390
Consumption statistics 139, 140
Filler flap 247
Filling the tank 247
Fuel reserve warning lamp 29, 307
Gauge 29
Premium unleaded gasoline 247,
392
Requirements, Octane rating 390,
393
Fuel cap
Messages in the multifunction
display 305, 340
Fuel filler flap
Locking/unlocking 247
Fuel reserve
Message in the multifunction
display 340
Fuel reserve warning lamp 29
Fuel system
Message in the multifunction
display 339
Fuel tank
Capacity 390
Filler flap 247
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. 389
Fuses 373
G
Garage door opener 221
Gasoline see Fuel
GAWR 284
Gear range
Automatic transmission 174
Canceling limit 176
Limiting 174
Shifting into optimal 176, 178
Gear selector lever 32, 169
Gearshift pattern 169
Lock 48, 50, 169, 402
Position 170, 171
Position indicator 170
Shifting procedure 170
411
Index
Gear selector lever one-touch gearshifting
Automatic transmission 175
Gearshift
Indicator lamp 29
Program, Manual 175, 179
Global locking/unlocking see Key
Good visibility 182
GPS 400
Gross Axle Weight Rating see GAWR
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see GVWR
Gross Vehicle Weight see GVW
GVW 284
GVWR 285
H
Hands-free microphone 33
Hazard warning flasher 111
Headlamp switch-off delay see Delayed
switch-off, exterior lamps
Headlamps
Automatic headlamp mode 107
Cleaning lenses 297
Cleaning system 182, 257, 397
Manual headlamp mode 107
Messages in the multifunction
display 341
412
Replacing bulbs 359
Switch 51, 106
Head-thorax air bag 66, 400
High beam flasher 51, 110
Replacing bulbs 359
High beam headlamps
Indicator lamp 29
Messages in the multifunction
display 341
Replacing bulbs 359
Switching on 110
High mounted brake lamp 360
High performance driving 238
High-pressure cleaners 297
Hood 250
Messages in the multifunction
display 352
Horn 27
HVAC see Automatic climate control
Hydroplaning 241
I
Identification labels 378
Identification Number, Vehicle (VIN) 378
Ignition 40
Immobilizer 92
Indicator lamps see Lamps, Indicator and
warning
Infant and child restraint systems see Children in the vehicle
Inflation pressure see Tires, Inflation pressure
Inside door handle 34
Instrument cluster 28, 114, 401
Illumination brightness 114
Lamps 300
Messages in display see Multifunction
display messages
Multifunction display 117
Instrument lighting see Instrument cluster,
Illumination brightness
Instrument panel see Instrument cluster
Instruments and controls see Cockpit
Interior lighting 112
Delayed switch-off 137
Index
Interior rear view mirror 44
Auto-dimming 182
Interior storage spaces see Storage compartments
J
Jacking up the vehicle 362
Jump starting 367
K
Key, Mechanical 355
Key, SmartKey
Battery check lamp 100
Checking the batteries 101
Factory setting 99
Locking/unlocking 98
Locking/unlocking, Global setting
Locking/unlocking, Selective
setting 100
Loss of 101
Messages in the multifunction
display 340
Opening and closing the
windows 201, 202
Positions in starter switch 40
99
Remote control 98
Replacing the batteries 357
Turning off the engine 56
Unlocking, Trunk 101
Kickdown 173, 401
Kilopascal 285
Knee air bags 66
L
Labels
Certification 378
Emission control label 378
Vacuum line routing 378
Lamps
Exterior 359
Lamps, exterior
Messages in the multifunction
display 341
Lamps, indicator and warning
ABS 29, 302
ABS/ESP® 29, 300
Airbrake 29, 307
Battery, SmartKey 100
Brake 29, 303
Center console 312
Coolant 29, 306
Engine malfunction 29, 304
Engine oil temperature 29, 307
Fog lamps 109
Fuel reserve 29, 307
Gearshift 29, 307
High beam 29
Instrument cluster 300
Low tire pressure telltale 29, 311
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 70, 312
Seat belt telltale 29, 308
Seat belts 308–309
SRS 29, 61, 310
Turn signals 29
Language, Setting 133
413
Index
License plate lamp
Messages in the multifunction
display 342
Replacing bulbs 359
License plate lamps 360
Light sensor
Messages in the multifunction
display 342
Lighter see Cigarette lighter
Lighting
Exterior 106
Instruments 114
Interior 112
Limp-Home Mode, Automatic
transmission 181
Loading see Vehicle loading
Location
Audio system 145
Compact guide (Canada only) 354
Telephone 207
Vehicle literature portfolio 353
Locator lighting 109, 135
414
Loss of
Keys 101
Service and Warranty Information
Booklet 377
Low beam headlamps 106
Messages in the multifunction
display 343
Replacing bulbs 359
Switching on 51
Lubricants 389
M
Main odometer 29
Maintenance 292, 367
Calling up service indicator 294
Resetting service indicator 294
Service indicator 292
Service term exceeded 293
Manual headlamp mode see Headlamps
Manual shift program, Automatic
transmission 179
Map pocket in passenger footwell 206
Maximum load rating, Tires 285
Maximum loaded vehicle weight 285
Maximum tire inflation pressure 285
Mechanical key 355
Menus see Control system menus
Messages in display see Multifunction display messages 314
Microphone, Hands-free 33
Mirrors 182
Adjusting 43
Auto-dimming 182
Exterior rear view mirror 44
Interior rear view mirror 44
Mobile phone
Inserting the cradle 211
Re-inserting 213
Removing the cradle 211
MON 247, 401
Motor Octane Number see MON
Multifunction display 117, 401
Changing settings see Control system
menus and Control system
submenus 117
Left 29
Right 29
Selecting language 133
Index
Multifunction display messages
ABS 316, 317
ACL malfunction 323
Airbrake 327
Battery, Vehicle 327
Brake pads 334
Coolant 335
Coolant level 335
Differential 338
Doors 352
Electro-hydraulic brake system
Engine oil 339
ESP® 318
Fuel system 339
Hood 352
Lamps 341
Parking brake 334
Passenger front air bag 321
Reserve fuel 340
Seat belt 352
Service brake 334
SmartKey 340
Telephone 340
Tires 346
Trunk lid 352
Washer fluid 352
Multifunction steering wheel
401
Button operation 118
329
30, 118,
N
Net, parcel 207
Neutral gear position, Automatic
transmission 169
Night security illumination 109, 136
Normal occupant weight 285
Number, Vehicle Identification
(VIN) 378, 403
O
Occupant Classification System see OCS
Occupant distribution 285
Occupant safety
Air bags 62
Children and air bags 63
Children in the vehicle 75
Fastening the seat belts 45
Infant and child restraint systems 76
OCS 67
Passenger front air bag off indicator
lamp 70
Seat belts 71
SRS 60
OCS 67, 401
Self-test 71
Octane number 402
Odometer
Main 117
Trip 115
Oil level see Engine oil, Checking level
Oil see Engine oil
One-touch gearshifting
Gear selector lever 175
Steering wheel gearshift
control* 177
Operating safety
Audio system 145
Vehicle 20
Operator’s manual 353
Outside temperature 122
Outside temperature see Displays
Overdue maintenance service 293
Overhead control panel 33
Overspeed range, Engine 116, 401
415
Index
P
Panic alarm 80
Parcel net in trunk 207
Parking 55, 239
Parking brake 32
Engaging 56
Message in the multifunction
display 334
Releasing 49
Parking lamps 106
Message in the multifunction
display 343
Replacing bulbs 359
Parts service 376
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp 70
Passenger compartment 243
Passenger front air bag
Messages in the multifunction
display 319–322
Passenger front air bag off indicator
lamp 70, 312
416
Passenger safety see Occupant safety
Pedals 235
Performance enhancement system,
Airbrake 89
Phone see Telephone
Poly-V-belt drive 401
Layout 379
Power assistance 236
Power outlet 209
Power train 402
Power washer 297
Power windows 199
Cleaning 297
Operating 199
Synchronizing 201
Practical hints 298
Premium unleaded gasoline 392
Problems
While driving 54
With the vehicle 21
Product information 13
Production options weight 285
Program mode selector switch, Automatic
transmission 175, 402
PSI 285
Push starting 367
R
RACETIMER see Control system menus,
722 Edition
Radio
Operation 151
Selecting stations 127
Radio transmitters 243
Reading lamp 113
Rear fog lamp see Fog lamps
Rear lamps see Tail lamps
Rear view mirrors see Mirrors
Rear window defroster 185
Recommended tire inflation
pressure 285
Recovery services, Stolen vehicle
(Tele Aid) 221
Redial memory 144
Index
Refrigerant, Air conditioning 391
Refueling 247
Regular checks 248
Remote control, SmartKey 98
Remote door unlock, Tele Aid 220
Replacing bulbs 359
Reporting safety defects 22
Research Octane Number see RON
Reset button, in Instrument cluster 114,
292
Residual heat utilization 197
Restraint systems 60
Air bags 60, 62
Child restraints 60
Children in the vehicle 75
Emergency Tensioning Device
(ETD) 60, 74
Seat belts 60, 71
Reverse gear position, Automatic
transmission 169
Rims 285, 381
Roadside Assistance 16, 217
RON 247, 402
Roof rack 230
S
Safety
Driving safety systems 81
Occupant 60
Reporting defects 22
Safety belts see Seat belts
Seat belt force limiter 74
Seat belts 60
Children in the vehicle 75
Fastening seat belts 45
Message in the multifunction
display 352
Proper use of 46
Safety guidelines 64
Telltale 308
Warning lamp 308–309
Seating capacity 263
Seats 41
Selector lever see Gear selector lever
Self-test
Lamps in the instrument cluster 300
OCS 71
Tele Aid 215
Service and warranty information 14
Service intervals see Service indicator
Service life
Tires 260
Vehicle batteries 256
Service see Maintenance
Service, Parts 376
Settings
Control system menus 120
Control system submenus 121
Factory, SmartKey 99
Individual, Vehicle 129
Menus and submenus 119
Resetting to factory settings, Control
system 129
Selective, SmartKey 100
Time 133
Shift program mode selector switch, Automatic transmission 175
Shifting, Automatic transmission 169
Side air vents 31
417
Index
Side marker lamps
Messages in the multifunction
display 343
Replacing bulbs 360
Side windows see Power windows
Sidewall 285
SmartKey see Key, SmartKey
Snow chains 291
Snow tires* 290
Spare fuses 373
Spare parts service 376
Speed setting
Cruise control 205
Speed settings
Cruise control 205
Speedometer 29
SRS 60, 402
Indicator lamp 29, 310
Messages in the multifunction
display 323
Standing lamps 106
Standing water, Driving trough 243
418
Start button 48
Starter battery 256, 367
Starter switch 27, 40
Starting difficulties, Engine 49
Starting the engine 47
Steering wheel 42
Buttons 30
Steering wheel gearshift control
Indicator lamp 307
Steering wheel gearshift control one-touch
gearshifting
Automatic transmission 177
Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 221
Storage compartments 206
Armrest 206
Center 207
Map pocket, Passenger footwell 206
Parcel net in trunk 207
Rear 207
Storing tires 261
Submenus see Control system submenus
Sun visors 183
Supplement Restraint System see SRS
Symbols used in this Operator’s
Manual 19
T
Tachometer 29
Overspeed range 116
Tail lamps
Messages in the multifunction
display 344
Replacing bulbs 359
Technical data 374
Air conditioning refrigerant 391
Brake fluid 392
Coolants 394
Electrical system 386
Engine 380
Engine oil additives 391
Engine oils 391
Fuel requirements 393
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. 389
Gasoline additives 393
Main dimensions 387
Poly-V-belt 379
Premium unleaded gasoline 392
Index
Rims and tires 381
Weights 388
Windshield and headlamp washer
system 390
Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system 397
Tele Aid 214, 403
Call priority 220
Emergency calls 215
Hands-free microphone 33
Information 218
Initiating an emergency call
manually 217
Messages in the multifunction
display 352
Remote door unlock 220
Roadside Assistance 217
SOS button 217
Stolen Vehicle Recovery
services 221
System self-check 215
Telephone 209
Answering a call 142
Dialing 143
Ending a call 143
Hands-free microphone 33
Loading phone book 143
Messages in the multifunction
display 340
Operation 141, 162
Redialing 144
Signal strength 141
Storage location 207
Temperature
Interior temperature 191
Outside temperature 116
Sensor, Interior 33
Sensor, outside 116
Tether attachment points, see Children in
the vehicle
Tightening torque, Wheel bolts 287, 288,
403
Time 133
TIN 279, 286
Tire and Loading Information 262
Placard 262
Terminology 284
Tire Identification Number see TIN
Tire inflation pressure
Checking
Checking electronically 269
Checking manually 269
TIREFIT kit 353, 362, 403
Tire inflation pressure 364
Using 362
Tires 258, 381
Air pressure 284
Care and maintenance 259
Cleaning 261
Direction of rotation, Spinning 261
Driving instructions 240
Hydroplaning 241
Important guidelines 258
Important notes, Tire inflation
pressure 268
Inflation pressure 249, 267, 268,
281
Information placards 262
Inspection 259
Load rating 274, 280, 286
Loading terminology 284
419
Index
Low tire pressure telltale 29, 311
Messages in the multifunction
display 324, 346
Ply composition and material
used 283, 286
Problems under-/overinflation 273
Retreads 258
Rims and tires 381
Rotation 287
Service life 260
Size designation 274
Sizes 382
Snow chains 291
Speed rating 241, 274, 276, 286
Storing 261
Temperature 268, 283
Terminology 284
TIN 279
TIREFIT kit 362
Traction 241, 282
Tread depth 260, 290
Treadwear indicators 260
Vehicle maximum load on 286
Wear pattern 287
Winter* 290
420
Top tether, see Children in the vehicle
Total load limit 286
Tow-away alarm 94
Towing 370
Transmission damage 372
Towing eye bolt 353
Installing/reinstalling 372
Traction 85, 175, 241, 286
Transmission gear selector lever see Gear
selector lever
Transmission see Automatic transmission
Transporting the vehicle 372
Traveling abroad 243
Tread 286
Tread depth 260, 290
Treadwear indicators 286
Trip computer 139
Trip odometer 115, 117
Trunk
Closing 103
Emergency release 104
Lamp 113
Lock 102
Message in the multifunction
display 352
Opening 101, 102
Opening in an emergency 355
Parcel net 207
Trunk lid rack 230
Turn signals 51
Additional in mirrors 360
Indicator lamps 29
Messages in the multifunction
display 342
Replacing bulbs 359
Turning off the engine 56
Index
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards 286
Units, Setting
Digital speedometer 132
Unleaded gasoline, Premium 247, 392
Useful features 206
V
Vacuum line routing diagram label 378
Vehicle
Batteries 256
Control system, Settings menu 129
Dimensions 387
Locking/unlocking 38, 57, 98, 105
Modifications and alterations, Operating safety 20
Towing 370
Transporting 372
Unlocking in an emergency 355
Vehicle care 295
Vehicle Identification Number see VIN
Vehicle lighting 249
Vehicle literature portfolio 353
Vehicle loading 261
Load limit 262
Roof and trunk lid racks 230
Terminology 284
Vehicle maximum load on the tire 286
Vehicle Recovery services, Stolen
(Tele Aid) 221
Vehicle status message memory
menu 128
Vehicle washing 296
VIN 378, 403
W
Warning lamps see Lamps, Indicator and
warning
Warning sounds
Drivers seat belts 74
Exterior lamps 57
Parking brake 50
Warranty coverage 14, 377
Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid
Washer reservoir level 257
Washing the vehicle 295
Wear pattern, Tires 287
Wheel bolts
Anti-theft wheel nuts 288
Tightening torque 287
Wheels, Sizes 382
Wheels, Tires and 258
Windows see Power windows
Windshield
Cleaning 297
Defogging 194
Windshield washer fluid 257, 397
Message in the multifunction
display 352
Mixing ratio 397
Refilling 257
Wiping with 53
Windshield washer system 397
Windshield wipers 27, 52
Cleaning wiper blades 297
Replacing wiper blades 361
Single wipe 53
Winter driving 290
Instructions 242
Snow chains 291
Tires* 290
Winter tires* 290
421
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts to service your vehicle properly.
For expert advice and quality service, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.
G
Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have any questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment.
Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in this Operator’s Manual might differ from your vehicle.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.
Press time August 22, 2006
GSP/TIP
Printed in Germany
Order No. 6515 4813 13 Part No. 199 584 78 81 USA Edition B 2007